SC 120

SC-120
Auto Slide Maker & Stainer
SERVICE MANUAL
Copyright
2011-2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2012-03 (Version: 2.0).
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
. , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
III
Table of Contents
1 Using This Manual ............................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Scope..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Using This Manual ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 Terms Used in Software Operation ....................................................................... 1-1
1.4 Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-2
2 Product Specifications ........................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Slide Making Method ............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Staining Protocol .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Presentation Mode and Sample Volume ............................................................... 2-1
2.4 Throughput: ........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.5 Power supply ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.6 Environment Requirements ................................................................................... 2-2
2.7 Dimensions and Weight ......................................................................................... 2-2
3 Functions and System Principles ...................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Hardware ............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Overview ................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Appearance ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.4 Major Components and Modules........................................................................... 3-2
3.5 System Principles .................................................................................................. 3-8
4 Subsystem Functions ......................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Slide Storage & Loading Unit ................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Printing Unit ......................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3 Blood Dispensing Unit ......................................................................................... 4-54
4.4 Smearing Unit ...................................................................................................... 4-73
4.5 Spreader Slide Cleaning Unit ............................................................................ 4-105
4.6 Blood film drying unit ......................................................................................... 4-109
4.7 Vertical Transportation Unit ............................................................................... 4-128
4.8 Staining unit ....................................................................................................... 4-160
4.9 Slide Output Unit ............................................................................................... 4-179
4.10 Auto Loading Unit .............................................................................................. 4-198
4.11 Covers ............................................................................................................... 4-240
4.12 Open-Vial Unit ................................................................................................... 4-288
4.13 Replacing the Wearing Parts ............................................................................. 4-293
5 Fluidics ................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Fluidic Structure ..................................................................................................... 5-1
1
Table of Contents
5.2 Slide Making and Staining Sequence .................................................................. 5-24
6 Hardware .............................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Hardware Resources for Different Subsystems .................................................... 6-2
6.3 Hardware System Connection Diagram ................................................................ 6-3
6.4 Hardware Component Service Instructions ........................................................... 6-9
7 Software System .................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Software Update .................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Notes before Update ............................................................................................. 7-2
7.3 Update Procedure ................................................................................................. 7-3
8 Manual Maintenance ........................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Tools and Consumables ........................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 Maintenance Plan .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.3 What to Maintain .................................................................................................... 8-3
9 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 1
9.1 Reminder .................................................................................................................. 1
9.2 Sample Loading ........................................................................................................ 2
9.3 Smearing .................................................................................................................. 3
9.4 Printing...................................................................................................................... 7
9.5 Slide Gripper ............................................................................................................. 8
9.6 Staining ....................................................................................................................11
9.7 Output ..................................................................................................................... 14
9.8 Supporting .............................................................................................................. 15
2
1 Using This Manual
NOTE
Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this
manual and the operator's manual.
1.1 Scope
This manual is intended to be read by service professionals who:
Have comprehensive knowledge of circuitry and fluidics;
Have comprehensive knowledge of reagents;
Have comprehensive knowledge of quality control;
Have comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;
Are familiar with the operations of the system;
Are able to use basic mechanical tools and understand the terminology;
Are skilled users of the digital voltmeter and oscillograph;
Are able to analyze the circuit diagrams and fluidic charts.
1.2 Using This Manual

This manual comprises 13 chapters and the fluidic charts in the appendix.
1.3 Terms Used in Software Operation

When you read... It means...
to press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK
Click
it with the mouse.
to CLICK the desired edit box and use the external keyboard or
Enter the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or digits; or
to scan the number by using the bar-code scanner.
to move the cursor to the character or digit that you want to
delete by clicking the left button of the mouse or
using[][][Home][End], and then delete the character after the
Delete
cursor by pressing [Del], or delete the character before the cursor
by pressing [BackSpace] ([] on the upper right part of the soft
keyboard).
Drag Scroll Bar Click the arrow button on the scroll bar; or move the pointer to the
1-1
Using This Manual
slide bar, left click the mouse and hold, then scroll the bar at will;
tap/click the blank area on the scroll bar.
to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display the
SELECT from pull-down list, (and DRAG SCROLL BAR) to browse and then
pull-down list CLICK the desired item; or to press the keys
(for pull-down list) ([][][PageUp][PageDown]) to browse the current list and press
[ENTER] to select the desired item.
1.4 Symbols
Symbols used in this manual:
When you see... It means...
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
WARNING alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
CAUTION alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.

NOTE alerting you to information that requires your attention.
read the statement below the symbol . The statement is

alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the system, containers of reagents, controls or
calibrators:
When you see... It means...
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
1-2
Using This Manual
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
TYPE B APPLIED PART
LOT NO.
EXPIRATION DATE
SERIAL NUMBER
MEASURE COMPULSURE SYMBOL
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
Manufacturer
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Safety precautions: For the safety of patients and operators, be sure to follow the
precautions below during the installation.
1-3
Using This Manual
WARNING
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to
carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in
machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g. ethanol)
around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached to

power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to electronic
components. Power down before removing covers to access electronic
components.
Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do not
use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs and
hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, pincher and piercer.
Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during normal operation, removal and maintenance.
Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc. according to

government regulations.
The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper personal
protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory
procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of water
and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into your
eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a doctor.
CAUTION
Improper service may damage the system. Maintain the analyzer strictly as
instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer carefully after the
maintenance.
For problems not mentioned in this manual, contact Mindray customer service
department for service advice.
To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove metal

jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the equipment.
Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

possibility of ESD damage during servicing, then work at an ESD workstation, or
1-4
Using This Manual
wear an antistatic wrist strap while servicing the system.
NOTE
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious, so take
proper protective measures for operation and maintenance.
The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise
caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-5
2 Product Specifications
2.1 Slide Making Method
Wedge method
2.2 Staining Protocol

Wright's stain
Wright's stain with methanol prefix
Wright's-Giemsa stain
Wright's-Giemsa stain with methanol prefix
May-Giemsa-Giemsa stain
May-Giemsa stain with methanol prefix
Liu stain (functionally supported)
2.3 Presentation Mode and Sample Volume

Closed-tube: 200uLvolume in vial1000uL
Open-vial: 200uLvolume in vial500uL
Micro blood: 40uLvolume in vial500uL*
*Note: depending on the shape of the vial. The value could be lower for cone-shape vials.
2.4 Throughput:
Full-loaded; normal Sample; time set for the procedures in the staining protocol no longer
than default: 120 slides per hour.
2.5 Power supply

a.c. 110V/115V10% 50/60Hz 2Hz
Main unit International 500VA
a.c. 220V/230V10% 50/60Hz 2Hz
a.c. 110V/115V10% 60Hz 2Hz
Pneumatic unit International 400VA
a.c. 220V/230V10% 50/60Hz 2Hz
2-1
Product Specifications
2.6 Environment Requirements

Temperature 15-32
Environment Requirements Humidity 30-85%
Atmospheric Pressure 70-106 Kpa
Temperature 5-40
Operating Environment Humidity 10-90%
Temperature -10-40
Storage Environment Humidity 10-90%
2.7 Dimensions and Weight

Width: 842mm
Main unit dimensions Height: 611mm
Depth (including the autoloader): 912mm
Main unit weight about 200kg
Width: 280mm
Pneumatic unit dimensions Height: 385mm
Depth: 400mm
Pneumatic unit weight about 19.6kg
2-2
3 Functions and System Principles
3.1 Hardware
3.2 Overview
The SC-120 comprises the slide making module, slide staining module, information
management unit, output module, and accessories, where the accessories include slide
baskets, tube racks, staining cassettes, reagent container cap assemblies, waste tube
assembly, power cables, and reagent containers. Optional parts include external bar-code
scanner and sample transportation track.
3.3 Appearance
The appearance of SC-120 is shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-1 General appearance
Component Function
Main Unit Acquiring samples, and preparing smears
Pneumatic Unit Providing pressure and vacuum to the main unit
3-1
Functions and System Principles
3.4 Major Components and Modules
Figure 3-2 Front of the main unit
1 ---- Touch screen 2 ---- Front door

3 ---- Basket loading platform 4 ---- Tube
5 ---- Tube rack 6 ---- Autoloader
7 ---- Basket unloading platform 8 ---- Indicator
9 ---- Left cover
Touch screen
The touch screen locates on the front of the main unit, which can be used to operate the
instrument and display information.
Front door
Open this door to load the slides or present sample in open-vial mode.
Basket loading platform

Place an empty basket on the platform, and the instrument will load it to the slide output
position, waiting for accomodating the smeared slides.
Tubes
The container of the sample to make slide with.
3-2
Tube rack
To be loaded with tubes in autoloading mode.
Autoloader
To load the tube racks in autoloading mode.
Basket unloading platform

Accommodating the smeared slides
Indicator
The indicator tells you about the status of the instrument including ready, running, error,
standby and on/off, etc.
Left cover
Open it to maintain or service the parts on the left of the instrument.
Figure 3-3 Back of the analyzer
1 ---- Backflow prevention bath 2 ---- Filter

3 ---- Filter connector 4 ---- Pressure connector
5 ---- Vacuum connector 6 ---- Network interface
7 ---- Pneumatic unit control interface 8 ---- Power inlet
9 ---- WC-B waste connector 10 ---- WC-W waste connector
11 ---- LB-P connector 12 ---- LB-A1 connector
13 ---- LB-W connector 14 ---- LB-M connector
3-3
15 ---- LB-A2 connector 16 ---- LB-D connector

17 ---- WC-W waste sensor connector 18 ---- LB-A1 sensor connector
19 ---- LB-M sensor connector 20 ---- LB-A2 sensor connector
21 ---- LB-D sensor connector 22 ---- LB-W sensor connector
23 ---- LB-P sensor connector 24 ---- WC-B sensor connector
Figure 3-4 Top of the main unit (top cover open)
1 ---- Fluidics components 2 ---- Slide printing subsystem

3 ---- Slide storage&loading 4 ---- Autoloader
subsystem/Sample dispensing subsystem
5 ---- Basket loading subsystem 6 ---- Auto loading subsystem
7 ---- Slide output subsystem 8 ---- Slide staining subsystem
9 ---- Hardware subsystem
3-4
Figure 3-5 Left side of the main unit (left cover open)
1 ---- Manipulator Horizontal Movement 2 ---- Slide staining subsystem

Mechanism
3 ---- Ultrasound power 4 ---- Slide basket drying unit
5 ----Heater driving unit
3-5
Figure 3-6 Right side of the main unit (right door open)
1 ---- Fluidic unit 2 ---- Slide printing subsystem

3 ---- USB interface 4 ---- Power switch
5 ---- Pressure regulator 6 ---- Slide storage&loading subsystem
7 ---- Blood dispensing subsystem
1
Figure 3-7Front of the pneumatic unit
1 --- Relief valve 2 --- Operation indicator
3-6
Figure 3-8Back of the pneumatic unit
1 --- Power switch 2 --- AC input

3 ---- Pneumatic unit control interface 4 --- Vacuum interface
5 --- Pressure interface
3.4.1 External Equipment

External bar-code scanner (optional)
Printer (optional)
3.4.2 System Function
3.4.3 Power-on/Power-off Function

Providing a progress bar to show the progress of power-on/power-off process.
3.4.4 Automatic Maintenance Function

Providing automatic maintenance of the fluidics.
3-7
3.4.5 Slide Loading Function

Providing slide storage box to store unused slides.
3.4.6 Basket Loading Function

Providing slide baskets to accommodate slides output from the instrument.
3.4.7 Single Aspiration for Multiple Slides

Making multiple slides (no more than5) with only one aspiration.
3.4.8 Printing Function

Printing information (including 1D or 2D codes, sample ID, parameter, date, etc.) on slides.
3.4.9 Slide Making Only

Able to perform slide making only without staining
3.4.10 Slide Staining Only

Able to perform slide staining only without slide making.
3.4.11 User Management Function

Providing different passwords to different access levels.
3.5 System Principles

3.5.1 Slide Making
Use Wedge method for slide making. A sapphirine slide is used as the spreader slide of the
instrument, which is cleaned by ultrasound.
3-8
Figure 3-9Spreader slide assembly
After getting the viscosity or HCT value of the sample (See Section 4.3 Blood Dispensing Unit
for details), the instrument automatically define the parameters for slide making to attain
qualified smeared slide.
Adjustable slide making parameters include: slide making velocity, slide making angle,
spreading angle, spreading time, and dispensing volume (See Section 4.4 Smearing Unit for
details).
3.5.2 Slide Making Work Flow

The work flow of slide making is shown in the figure below, where the steps with the red
background color are all sample preparation procedures, and those with the blue background
color are slide making procedures.
Piercing &
Mixing Sample
Aspirating Sample State
Analysis
Open-vial
Aspirating Micro
Aspirating
Left-Right
Picking up Cleaning Loading Inversion Dispensing
Inversion Slide Printing
Slide Slide Slide Detection Blood
Detection
Staining Dryness Detection

Blood Film Slide Slide
Blood Film Drying Levering Making
Direct Output Spread Detection
Figure 3-10 Smearing work flow
3.5.3 Slide Storage

It is recommended use specified glass slides to ensure the reliability of SC-120.
To prevent the slides from moisture and contamination, store the slides as instructed below:
1) Keep the slides rotating in storage.
2) Keep the slides away from hard ground to prevent them from damage when falling
down.
3-9
3) Keep the slides away from windows, doors, dust and heat source.
4) Use the slides within 6 months after the manufacture date.
3.5.4 Slide Staining

Single-slide staining method is used for slide staining. Each slide is placed in a separate
staining cassette where the pre-fixing, staining and cleaning are completed.
Figure 3-11 Staining cassette

There are 4 staining positions, each of which has different function based on the staining
protocol selected, and different solution is added (See Section 4.8 Staining Unit for details).
SC-120 provides an open stain system, which means users can choose desired type and
brand of stains according to their own needs. The default mixing ratio of the instrument is 1:9
(for Wright's, Wright's-Giemsa ) or 1:1:18 (for May-Giemsa), which can not be modified. The
solution used to dilute the stain can be buffer or deionized water, which depends on the type
and brand of the stain used.
The time for each step can be edited, through which the stained cell color can be darker or
lighter.
3.5.5 Slide Staining Work Flow

The work flow of slide staining is shown in the figure below.
3-10
Staining Position 1 Staining Position 2
Outputting
Stained Slide
Stain Adding Draining Drying Adding

Tray Methanol Methanol Methanol Stain A
Recycling
Stain A
Staining Position 4 Staining Position 3
Draining Mixed Adding Draining
Washing
Solution Stain A-B Stain A
Stain A+B
Empty Stain Sending out Outputting

Drying
Tray Slide Slide
Figure 3-12 Staining work flow
3.5.6 Staining Protocol

SC-120 provides 6 staining protocols: Wright's Stain with Methanol Pre-fixation (using
Wright's stain), Wright's Stain, Wright's-Giemsa Stain with Methanol Pre-fixation (using Wright
Giemsa Stain), Wright's-Giemsa Stain, May-Giemsa Stain with Methanol Pre-fixation
(May-Grunwald Giemsa Stain), and May-Giemsa Stain.
Support Liu stain in function.
Romanowsky Stain
The stains used by SC-120 are all Romanowsky stains, which consists of methylene blue
and/or its oxydate (azure B), as well as halofluorescein (usually eosin B or Y). In pH6.4-7.0,
the stain interacts with special components of the cells (nucleus and special cytoplasm
granules), and produces typical colors.
Pre-Fixation with Methanol

Methanol has strong dehydration power, which can fix the cells in certain morphology and
increase their superficial areas, in order to enhance their absorption of stains. Moreover,
methanol can absorb the water in the stains, which make the temperature of the stains
increases, so as to speed up the staining action.
3-11
4 Subsystem Functions
4.1 Slide Storage & Loading Unit
Figure 4-1 Slide storage & loading subsystem
No. Name FRU Code No. Name FRU Code

1 Slide storage box 115-018273-00 9 Transmitting tube assembly of slide
115-023151-00
4-1
Subsystem Functions
quantity sensor
2 Receiving tube of no-slide 115-023150-00 10 Retaining assembly
115-018277-00
detection sensor
3 Receiving tube of slide 115-023149-00 11 In-position blocking assembly
115-018278-00
quantity sensor
4 Slip blade assembly 115-018276-00 12 Air vent block 041-007339-00
5 Belt BA30-10-06610 13 Slide left-right inversion
115-005375-00
detecting assembly
6 Motor 024-000149-00 14 3-wire sensor 011-000021-00
7 Slide residue collecting 042-010499-00 15 2-wire sensor
2800-21-28878
box
8 Transmitting tube of no-slide
1 115-023152-00
detection sensor
4.1.1 Introduction to Subsystem Functions

The major function of the slide storage is to push the slide out from the slide storage box one
by one, and load them onto the shuttle truck. The assembly consists of the following parts:
1) Driving part: the driving system of the slip blade (5) (including a motor, a driving
mechanism, and detection parts like sensors). It loads slides onto the shuttle truck.
2) Storage part: slide storage box (1). It provides temporary storage to slides. Before
dismounting the slide storage box (1), unscrew the retaining screws (fixing the retaining
assembly (10)) counterclockwise to remove it first, and then lift the storage box upwards
directly; when installing the storage box, place it back on the guide rail, and then secure the
retaining screws by twisting it clockwise to the extreme.
3) Detection part: consists of the slide quantity transmissive sensor (3), no-slide detection
transmissive sensor (2), and slide left-right inversion detecting assembly (9). It detects the
quantity of slides remaining in the storage box, whether there are slides or not, and whether
the slides are placed in an opposite direction.
4) Accessories: air blowing cleaning assembly (8) and slide residue box (4). The air blowing
cleaning assembly is to clean the print area of the slide; while the slide residue box is to
accommodate the slide residues that fall down.
4.1.2 Working Sequence of the Subsystem

1) Initialization;
2) Slide quantity detection;
3) No-slide detection;
4) Slide left/right inversion detection;
5) The slip blade pushing the slide to the cleaning position;
6) Gas valve starting to blow air;
7) Gas valve closed;
8) The slip blade pushing the slide to the standby position (wait for the loading command from
the shuttle truck after it goes back to the loading position);
9) The slip blade pushing the slide to the loading position, and make it loaded in the shuttle
4-2
Subsystem Functions
truck;
10) The slip blade going back to the start position.
4.1.3 Troubleshooting
a. Slide stuck or damaged when coming out of the storage box
Error Description
The slip blade is found unable to push the slide at the beginning, and the slide cannot come
out of the storage box, or only part of it comes out.
Error Analysis
Possible reasons include:
1. The slides are stuck together. When the slip blade pushes one of the slides, the slide is
dragged by the next one and unable to be separated, and then the exit of the storage box
damages the slide when it is being pushed out.
2. The slip blade needs to be maintained after a pre-defined period of service (half a year),
because there may be a number of residues inside the storage box, slots and surface of the
guide rail (see Figure 4-2 for specific positions need cleaning). The residues left on bottom of
the slide storage box may raise slide pile (the large residue may raise the slide up for 0.4mm),
making the slide on the bottom damaged and unable to be moved out (the slide is squeezed
to damage at the exit);
3. Incorrect position of the slide storage box. There are two different situations: 1) Storage
box not well locked, so it is not aligned with the guide rail, making the slide damaged by the
end of the guide rail while coming out; 2) there are residues in the slots of the guide rail where
the storage box is located, so the slides slant when they are put into the box, making them
damaged when coming out from the exit of the storage box.
4. The screws fixing the slip blade are loose or the slip blade is seriously worn. Check the
front of the blade and the the back to see whether they are seriously worn. Either loose or
worn slip blade can make the contact position of the slide and the blade change, making the
pushing-out action unreliable.
4-3
Subsystem Functions
4.1.4 Troubleshooting Procedure

Troubleshooting
Start
Instrument
shutdown
Check the slip

blade
If its blade or rear

chamfer badly worn?
N Y
Pick out glass The contacting position of bit

residues and check tool and slide changes due to
serious wear
Replace the slip

Slides get stuck?
blade
N Y
Error most probably Error because slides

caused by glass residues sticking together
Replace with new slides.

Check if the sticking
problem is removed.
Clean the glass residues

in the slide storage box
and guide rail slots
Re-install the slide storage

box to the guide rail
Fairly lock the slide

storage box
Re-start the slide making

process. The device shall
work properly
End
4-4
Subsystem Functions
Note:
1) The areas need cleaning are circled in red in the figure below;
Clear these
areas
Figure 4-2 Areas need cleaning
2) After dismounting and re-installing the slide storage box, adjust the slide quantity detection
sensor and the slide detection sensor (run blank adjustment when there is no slide) when the
storage box is locked by the locking mechanism. This is because different locking levels may
result in different sensor backgrounds, thus leads to varying thresholds and unstable
measurement.
b. The slide is not properly loaded on the shuffle truck, and gets damaged when the
truck moves.
Error Description
The slide is unable to be loaded on the shuttle truck properly, and gets damaged when the
truck moves. The error still exists after restarting the instrument.
Troubleshooting
Check whether there are scraps under the shuttle truck and the slip blade (circled in red). If
scraps are found, remove them using tweezers. Restart the smearing process after cleaning,
and check whether the error is eliminated .
4-5
Subsystem Functions
Check and clear

this area
Figure 4-3 Area needs cleaning
4.1.5 Replacing the FRU
4.1.6 Removing and Replacing the Motor and Belt
Tools
107 cross-head screwdriver
1.5mm small inner hexagon spanner
3.5mm block 3202-J30
Tension measurement device
Procedure
Removal:
Unplug the cables connected to the motor;
1 Remove the 4 M3X12 screws using the cross-head screwdriver, and the motor shaft
will slant to the interior. Remove the belt, and take out the motor with the large pulley;
Remove the two retaining screws fixing the large pulley using the 1.5mm small inner
hexagon spanner, making the large pulley separated from the motor.
Installation:
1) Install the synchronous belt, adjust the tension of the belt to make: span=68mm, mass of
the belt=1.2g, belt width=6.4mm, tensile force=72N. Fix the motor using a M3X12 inner
hexagon screw and a +3 big washer. The direction of the motor cable should be the same
as shown in the figure.
2) Check whether the retaining screw of the pulley is loose. If yes, use the block 3202-J30
(3.5m thick) to determine the interval, and then fix the retaining screw of the pulley.
4-6
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-4 Removing the motor and belt

1 Inner hexagon M04-051093--- 5 Large pulley BA30-10-06613
socket cap screw

M3X12
2 Belt BA30-10-06610 6 Motor 024-000149-00
3 Retaining screw M04-051102---

6
4 Small pulley M6C-010001---
Validation
1) Check whether the retaining screw of the pulley is loose. If yes, secure it.
2) Tensile force measurement device setup: span=68mm, mass of belt=1.2g, belt
width=6.4mm, displayed tensile force=72N.
4.1.7 Removing and Replacing Position Sensors
Tools
2pt x 250mm cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
1) Dismount the shielding board (1) using the cross-head screwdriver, and then loosen the
screw fixing the sensor mounting plate (5). Put your finger in and remove the sensor together
with the mounting plate.
2) Loosen the screw fixing the sensor to the plate, and then start replacing the sensor.
3) After the sensor is mounted back, the position might be deviate from the previous slightly,
so you need to re-adjust to ensure that it is in the right position. Refer the instructions for
using the fixture - Mechanical Position Adjustment - Step 1 below for details.
4-7
Subsystem Functions
2
1
Figure 4-5 Removing and replacing position sensors

1 Shielding board 042-008149-00 5 Cross-recessed 030-000099-00
socket cap screw

M3x8
2 Sunk screw M3x8 M04-005005--- 6 3-wire sensor 042-010212-00
mounting plate 5
3 2-wire sensor 2800-21-28878 7 3-wire sensor 011-000021-00
7
4 Sensor mounting 042-009225-00
plate 6
Validation 3
1) Check whether the outgoing wire of the 2-wire sensor is pressed by the mounting plate. If
yes, loosen the screw, and put the wire inside the square hole at the side.
2) Refer the instructions for using the fixture - Mechanical Position Adjustment - Step 2 below
for how to validate the position.
4.1.8 Removing and Replacing Detection Sensors
Tools
2pt x 250mm cross-head screwdriver
Nipper pliers
Procedure
1) To dismount the sensor 2 or 4, you need to remove the whole assembly first since the
space is limited, and then unplug the sensor connectors. Twist the sensor counterclockwise
4-8
Subsystem Functions
gently using the nipper pliers to dismount it, and then install a new one.
To dismount the sensor 1 or 3, unplug the sensor connectors. Twist the sensor
counterclockwise gently using the nipper pliers to dismount it, and then install a new one.
2) If you need to dismount the slide left-right inversion detection sensor (9), loosen the
screw 8 directly using the pt x 250mm cross-head screwdriver by putting it through the slit in
the middle of the blood dispensing subsystem, and then take out the sensor assembly.
7
Figure 4-6 Removing and replacing detection sensors

1 Transmitting tube of 115-023150-00 6 Slide storage box 115-018277-00
no-slide detection locking assembly
sensor
2 Receiving tube of 115-023152-00 7 Supporting bracket 042-008939-00
no-slide detection
sensor
4-9
Subsystem Functions
3 Transmitting tube 115-023149-00 8 Cross-headed 030-000099-00

assembly of slide screw M3X8
quantity sensor
4 Receiving tube of 115-023151-00 9 Slide left-right 115-005375-00
slide quantity inversion detecting
sensor sensor
5 Sensor mounting 041-012689-00
plate
Validation
1) Make sure that the black plastic nut is secured, and all sensor wires are correctly
connected to the right socket;
2) Fasten the screw 8.
4.1.9 Replacing the Wearing Parts
4.1.10 List of Wearing Parts
Table List of Wearing Parts
No. Name FRU Code Function Servic Remarks

e Life
2
1 Slip blade 041-008553-00 Slip blade assembly 75000 times
years
In-position blocking 2
2 Contacting block 041-009460-00 75000 times
assembly years
4.1.11 Replacing the Wearing Parts

1. Replacing the slip blade
Tools
A 2.5mm Inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
1) Remove the screw using the inner hexagon spanner and replace the slip blade directly.
Make sure the screw is secured after you mount back the blade, and apply thread sealant on
it. Slip
blade
4-10
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-7 Slip blade assembly
2. Replacing the in-position blocking assembly
Tools
A 107 cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
1) Remove the whole printing assembly first (see the process document of component
removal and maintenance for details), and then loosen the screw using the screwdriver to
replace the block.
Contacting
block
Figure 4-8 In-position blocking assembly
4.1.12 Using the Fixtures
4.1.13 Fixtures
No. Name FRU Code Function

Adjust the positions of
3202-J27 Slide shuttle truck the shuttle truck before
1 loading position adjusting 041-016604-00 and after slide loading
fixture (see the instructions for
using the fixture below).
3202-J09 Slide loading Validate the position of
2 041-016607-00
adjusting fixture the slide (see 4.1.7.2)
Adjust the installation
3 3.5mm block 3202-J30 / position of the large
pulley
4-11
Subsystem Functions
4.1.14 Instructions for How to Use the Fixtures
Procedure 7: mechanical position adjustment (1 slide loading

position)
3202-J27 shuffle truck loading

Gauges
Tools and position adjustment fixture
fixtures 3202-J09 slide loading adjusting
fixture
Jobs to be
Property
NO Work sequence managed
markings
Job Goal
1 Tap Service Position Adjust The fixture

to enter the Position Adjust " is just in
screen, and tap the " Initialize " contact
buttons for "Slide Loading Pos." with the
Figure A
and "Slide Loading End Pos.". shuffle
Then place the 3202-J27 shuffle truck front
truck loading position adjustment end
fixture at the position marked in
Figure B. Tap the Leftward or
Rightward button to move the
shuffle truck until the fixture is
just on the truck (the truck should
Figure B
be in contact with the fixture as
shown in Figure C); remove the
Junction fixture, and place it back again to
line confirm the position.
2 Place the fixture 3202-J09 on the Verify the

shuffle truck as shown in Figure adjustme
D. Make sure it does not cock up. nt with
Figure C Then tap the Slide Loading End gauges.

Pos. button, and the Leftward
or Rightward button to adjust
the position of the bit tool, until its
head just comes in contact with
Junction
the fixture. After adjustment, the
line
space between the fixture and
the bit tool should be able to hold
Figure D a 0.02mm gauge; but not a

0.1mm gauge.
4-12
Subsystem Functions
4.2 Printing Unit

4.2.1 Principle of Slide Printing
The thermal transfer printing method is used for slide printing of the instrument. The heating
microelement of the heater wire in the print head generate heat to transfer the ink on the
carbon strip to the label area on the slide. The print head moves one dot pitch in lengthwise
direction, and one row of the printout is produced.
Heating
cable Heating microelement
Figure4-9 Carbon strip print head
Figure4-10 Direction of carbon strip winding
4.2.2 Introduction to the Slide Printing Module

The whole slide printing mechanism consists of three parts.
1Main body for carbon strip winding: used to distribute, feed, flatten and withdraw
the carbon strip; consisting of leading axle, carbon strip feeding wheel, withdrawal
wheel, and distributing wheel.
4-13
Subsystem Functions
2Print head moving assembly: control the pressing and lifting of the print head, as
well as the horizontal movement, in order to facilitate the printing. The pressing and
lifting of the print head are driven by the stepping motor, while the horizontal
movement is driven by the linear stepping motor.
3Circuit board and print head.
Figure 4-11Slide printing subsystem

No. Name FRU code No. Name FRU code
1 Cross-recessed panhead / 4 Thermosensitive print
screw GB/T818-2000 M3X6 head 305dpi 32mm
024-000427-00
with environment-friendly
color-zinc coating
2 Printer drive board PCBA 051-001356 5 Print head moving 115-018139-00
-00 assembly
3 Main body for carbon strip 115-025153 6 Stainless steel inner
winding -00 hexagon socket cap
/
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M3X6 passivated
4-14
Subsystem Functions
4.2.3 Main Body for Carbon Strip Winding
Figure4-12 Diagram of main body for carbon strip winding 1
4-15
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-13 Diagram of main body for carbon strip winding 2
4-16
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-14 Diagram of main body for carbon strip winding 3

1 Back plate of the / 15 Printing module 051-001568-00
transmission case keypad PCBA
2 Front plate of the / 16 Synchronous pulley.
transmission case P48MXL025 /
(tailored)
3 Adjusting bar assembly / 17 Driving assembly
/
shield
4 Micro-switch SS-5GL2 M07-00143S--- 18 Synchronous belt.
BA30-10-06618
B73MXL6.4
5 Driven pressure assembly / 19 Small pulley 1 /
6 Carbon strip feeding 20 Mixing motor and
/ 3100-21-49049
rubber covered roller the connecting cable
7 Leading axle 21 Motor position
024-000366-00 2800-21-28878
sensor assembly
8 Tube detection assembly / 22 Withdrawal axle /
9 Withdrawal wheel 23 Driven gear wheel
/ /
assembly
4-17
Subsystem Functions
10 Carbon strip distributing 24 Micro torque holder

/ 031-000163-00
wheel assembly MK-08
11 Carbon strip rolling key 25 Driving gear wheel
/ /
cap
12 Carbon strip breakage
/
detection disc
13 Motor position sensor
2800-21-28878
assembly
14 Synchronous belt.
BA30-10-06618
B73MXL6.4
4.2.4 Print head moving assembly
Figure 4-15 Diagram of print head moving assembly 1
4-18
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-16 Diagram of print head moving assembly 2

1 Stainless steel inner / 18 Power lock MLSL5 /
hexagon socket cap screw
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X12
passivated
2 Cross-recessed small / 19 Synchronous pulley.
panhead screw P48MXL025 (tailored)
combination GB/T9074.8
/
M3X8 with
environment-friendly
color-zinc coating
3 Inner hexagon set screw / 20 Adjusting nut
with cup point /
GB/T80-2000 M3X5 black
4 Print head fixing assembly / 21 Rotation shaft /
5 Extension spring AWU 22 Printer baseplate
/
series 6
6 Spring drawbar 1 23 Linear guide rail set.
/ MR9MLSS1V1N-80L- /
10-10I
7 Motor Step 3.6V 1.8 24 Stainless steel inner
024-000366
degree/step hold torque hexagon socket cap /
-00
0.53Nm screw GB/T70.1-2000
4-19
Subsystem Functions
M3X8 passivated
8 Small pulley 1 / 25 Linear motor pedestal /
9 Stainless steel inner 26 Inner hexagon set
hexagon socket cap screw screw with cup point
/ /
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8 GB/T80-2000 M4X8
passivated black
10 Cable arranging plate 2 27 Lead screw
/ /
connecting pedestal
11 Cross-recessed panhead 28 Motor linear stepping
screw GB/T818-2000 5V 1.8step length
M3X6 with / 0.012192mm lead 024-000519-00
environment-friendly screw 66mm
color-zinc coating
12 Sensor bracket 3 / 29 Sensor bracket 1 /
13 Motor position sensor 30 Cross-recessed
assembly panhead screw
2800-21-28 GB/T818-2000
/
878 M4X10 with
color-zinc coating
14 Synchronous belt. 31 PHOTOELEC Optical
BA30-10-06
B73MXL6.4 Sensor IP55 940nm 011-000021-00
618
15cm
15 Sensor baffle plate 32 Motor position sensor
/ 2800-21-28878
assembly
16 Inner hexagon set screw 33 Sensor bracket 2
with cup point / /
GB/T80-2000 M3X5 black
17 Stainless steel inner 34
/
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X10
passivated
4.2.5 Replacing the Slide Printing FRU
4.2.6 Dismounting/Mounting the Slide Printing Assembly
Tools
Standard inner hexagon spanner (1 suite)
Procedure
1Remove the right plate of the main unit. See Figure 4-17;
2Remove the screw (No. 1) fixing the side bath, and then open the side bath plate;
4-20
Subsystem Functions
see figure 4-17;

3Open the door marked as No. 5 (Figure4-18);
4Disassemble the slide storage box;
5Remove the 3 M3X6 cross-recessed screws (No. 3) using the cross-head
screwdriver, and then dismount the printer shield (No. 2). Note: to dismount the
printer shield, lift if up by 8mm, and then try taking out. Make sure the shield do not
scratch the circuit board or the tubing.8mm.
6Remove the M4 inner hexagon screws (No. 4 and 6) using the inner hexagon
spanner;
Figure 4-17 Right side of the main unit
Figure4-18 Front door assembly
4-21
Subsystem Functions

1 Side cistern assembly / 4 Stainless steel inner /
hexagon socket cap
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M4X16 passivated
2 Printer shield / 5 Front window
/
assembly
3 Cross-recessed panhead / 6 Stainless steel inner
screw GB/T818-2000 hexagon socket cap
M3X6 with screw GB/T70.1-2000 /
environment-friendly M4X16 passivated
color-zinc coating
7) Unplug the power cord of the printer circuit board and the communication connector, and
then take out the power cord from the 4 wire harness retainers. Note that 2 wire harness
retainers are located in the inside;
Figure 4-19 Printer circuit board assembly

1 Power connector / 3 Wire harness retainer /
(middle size)
2 Communication connector /
of the print drive board
8) Take out the slide printing assembly from the right side of the instrument (avoid collision of
the circuit board and the parts around); the dismounted assembly is shown in the figure
below;
4-22
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-20 Slide printing assembly

9) Install the printing assembly following the steps above in the reversed order.
Validation
1) Check if the screws are in-place and tightened;
2) Check if all power cables and communication cables are properly connected, and the
power cord is fixed by the wire harness retainer;
3) Start up the instrument, and check if the slide printing system can print on the slide
properly.
4.2.7 Removing and Installing the Print Head Moving Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1)Dismount the whole slide printing assembly from the instrument;
2)Remove the 2 M4 screws under the slide printing system using the inner hexagon
spanner, and then dismount the printer connecting pedestal 1;
4-23
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-21 Print head moving assembly

1 Slide printing system 115-018138-00 3 Stainless steel inner /
hexagon socket cap
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M4X16 passivated
2 Printer connecting /
pedestal 1
3)Unplug the print head moving motor connector and the carbon strip feeding motor
connector;
4-24
Subsystem Functions
1 2
Figure 4-22Removing and installing the print head moving assembly 1
1 Print head moving / 2 Carbon strip feeding /
motor connector motor connector
4)Remove the 4 M3 screws (No. 2) using the cross-head screwdriver, and then lift
up the PCBA bracket (No. 1) together with the circuit board;
Figure 4-23 Removing and installing the print head moving assembly 2
4-25
Subsystem Functions

1 PCBA bracket / 2 Cross-recessed /
panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M3X6
with
color-zinc coating
5)Twist to loosen the PCBA bracket (shown in the figure below), cut off the cable tie
(No. 4), and then unplug the 1, 2 and 3 sensor connectors;
1 2 3 4
1 Sensor connector / 3 Sensor connector /
(PH-SEN1-LOCATIO) (PH-SEN3-FW)
2 Sensor connector / 4 Cable fixer. .Cable tie 0000-10-10906
(PH-SEN2-ADJUDGE) CTP-123B black
nylon
6) Remove the 4 M3 screws (No. 3), separate the main body for carbon strip
winding (No. 1) and print head moving assembly (No. 2), and then take out the print
head moving assembly; note: while separating the main body for carbon strip
winding and print head moving assembly, tilt the assembly a little bit to prevent the
spring drawbar 1 from twined by the carbon strip winding assembly. While mounting
back the print head moving assembly, make sure you put the spring drawbar 1 into
the notch of the carbon strip winding assembly and it does not hold out against the
front cover.
4-26
Subsystem Functions
1 Main body for carbon strip 115-025153-00 4 Spring drawbar 1 /
4-27
Subsystem Functions
winding
2 Print head moving 115-018139-00 5 Print head fixing
/
assembly assembly
3 Stainless steel inner 6 Notch position
/
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X6
passivated
7) Install the moving assembly following the steps above in the reversed order.
Validation
1Check whether the spring drawbar 1 is located in the notch position after installation, and
whether the print head fixing assembly is properly reset;
2Check whether the motor and sensor cables are correctly connected, and whether the
cable is pressed by any mechanical part;
Component Cable Labeling Mechanical ID
Print head movement motor M_PH-MOVE M_MOVE

Carbon strip feeding motor M_RB_FEED M_FEED
Vertical deflection position fixing
PH_SEN1_LOCATION PH_SEN1
sensor
Vertical deflection position
PH_SEN2_ADJUDGE PH_SEN2
detection sensor
Horizontal linear movement start
PH_SEN3_FW PH_SEN3
position sensor
3Start up the instrument, and check if the slide printing system can print on the slide
properly.
4.2.8 Removing and Installing the Main Body for Carbon Strip Winding
The removing and installing steps of the main body for carbon strip winding are similar to
those of removing and installing the print head moving assembly. Note: before the removal,
dismount the PCBA bracket together with the PCBA.
4.2.9 Removing and Installing the Print Head
Tools
Procedure
1Open the front door, and dismount the slide storage box and the carbon strip;
2Power off the main unit (as shown in Figure 4-22), and unplug the cables connected
4-28
Subsystem Functions
to the print head;
Figure 4-27 Removing the print head 6

3Put the inner hexagon spanner (No. 5) through the service hole, and use it to loosen
the M3 screw (No. 1), and then remove the print head as shown in Figure 4-23. Note:
loosen the screw rather than removing it; while mounting back the print head, the
position setting block should be aligned with the dowels (No. 4) in the fixing block.
4-29
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-28 Removing the print head 7

1 Stainless steel inner / 4 Print head /
hexagon socket cap dowels
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M3X8 passivated
2 Print head fixing / 5 Spanner.
assembly Ball-head inner
hexagon /
spanner
2.5mm
3 Thermosensitive print 024-000427-0
head 305dpi 32mm 0
4Before mounting the new print head, record the resistance (R) on the data plate
(shown in the figure below), and then tap "Setup""System""Advanced Print Setup",
4-30
Subsystem Functions
enter the recorded resistance value into the "Average Electric Resistance" field, and
save the change;
Figure4-29 Electric resistance of the print head
Validation
1Make sure the connecting cables are securely connected to the print head socket;
2Note: Make sure that the wires of the print head are properly placed;
properly.
4.2.10 Removing and Installing the Printer Drive Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
1Unplug all the connectors connected to the printer drive board PCBA;
Corresponding
Cable Name ID
Socket on the Board
Print head connecting cable - large connector 009-003473-00 J19
Print head connecting cable-small connector 009-003473-00 J2
Print module sensor connecting cable 1 009-003474-00 J5
Print module sensor connecting cable 2 009-003475-00 J6
Print head pressing motor connecting cable 009-003471-00 J17
Power cord 009-003468-00 J1
Printer drive board communication cable 009-003469-00 J13
Print head moving motor connecting cable 009-003470-00 J16
4-31
Subsystem Functions
Carbon strip feeding motor connecting cable 009-003472-00 J18
2Remove the 6 M3 screws (No. 3) using a cross-head screwdriver;
Figure4-30 Removing and installing the printer drive board PCBA

1 PCBA bracket / 3 Cross-recessed /
panhead screw
GB/T818-2000
M3X6 with
environment-frien
dly color-zinc
coating
2 Printer drive board 051-001356-00 4 Pre-installation
/
PCBA dowel
3Install the new PCBA following the steps above in the reversed order.
Validation
1Check whether the connectors are properly inserted to the corresponding sockets
and whether the connections are secure;
2Start up the instrument and print on a slide, and then check the printout to see
whether the slide printing system works properly.
4-32
Subsystem Functions
4.2.11 Removing and Installing the Carbon Strip Feeding Motor
Tools
Procedure
1)Remove the carbon strip twining assembly;
2)Remove the driving assembly shield (NO. 1) and the screws (No. 3, 4, and 5), and
then take out the motor;
3)Before installing the new motor, dismount the synchronous pulley (No. 7) and
mount it on to the new motor. Note: the distance between the pulley and the motor
surface should be 3mm; one of the fastening screws is placed against the flat
position; secure the screw by apply thread locker again;3mm
4)After installing the new motor, stretch the synchronous belt (No. 2) to retain proper
tension;
Figure 4-31Removing and installing the carbon strip feeding motor

1 Driving assembly shield / 5 Standard spring /
washer
GB/T93-1987 3
with
4-33
Subsystem Functions
environment-friendl
y color-zinc coating
2 Synchronous belt. BA30-10-0 6 Mixing motor and
B73MXL6.4 6618 the connecting 3100-21-49049
cable
3 Stainless steel inner / 7 Small pulley 1
hexagon socket cap
/
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M3X8 passivated
4 Flat washer - Grade A / 8 Glue. .Thread
GB/T97.1-2002 3 with locker 24350ml/EA
A90-000060---
environment-friendly (tube)
color-zinc coating
Validation
1)Check whether the synchronous belt is fully stretched and proper tension is
retained;
2)Check whether the screws fixing the synchronous belt is tightened;
3)Check whether the motor connector is facing the downside of the assembly;
4)Start up the instrument and print on a slide, and then check the printout to see
whether the slide printing assembly works properly.
4.2.12 Removing and Installing the Synchronous Belt (Carbon Strip

Winding and Feeding)
Tools
Procedure
1)Remove the carbon strip twining assembly;
2)Remove the driving assembly shield (No. 1), loosen the screws (No. 3, 4, and 5),
push the motor and take out the synchronous belt (No. 2). See the figure in Section
1.2.6;
3)After a new synchronous belt is installed, stretch it to retain proper tension;
Validation
retained;
4-34
Subsystem Functions
4.2.13 Removing and Installing the Print Head Pressing Motor
Tools
Procedure
1)Remove the print head moving assembly
2)Unplug the cable connectors connected to the motor;
3)Remove the M3 screw (No. 1) and the cable arranging plate (No. 2);
4)Remove the 4 M3 screws (No. 4), take off the synchronous belt, tilt and take out
the stepping motor (No. 3). Note: do not loosen or remove the sensor bracket or
the sensors;
5)Before installing the new motor, remove the synchronous pulley (No. 5) and
mount it on the new motor. One of the fastening screws is placed against the flat
position;
tension;
Figure 4-32Removing and installing the print head pressing motor

1 Cross-recessed / 5 Small pulley 1
panhead screw /
GB/T818-2000 M3X6
4-35
Subsystem Functions
with
color-zinc coating
2 Cable arranging plate2 / 6 Synchronous belt. BA30-10-0661
B73MXL6.4 8
3 Motor Step 3.6V 1.8 7 Glue. .Thread
024-00036
degree/step hold torque locker 24350ml/EA A90-000060---
6-00
0.53Nm (tube)
4 Stainless steel inner
hexagon socket cap
/
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M3X8 passivated
Validation
retained;
2)Check whether the screws fixing the synchronous belt is tightened;
3)Check whether the cable connector is inserted into the socket of the motor.
4.2.14 Removing and Installing the Print Head Moving Motor
Tools
Procedure
1)Remove the print head moving assembly
2)Remove the M4 screw (No. 2) from the lead screw;
3)Remove the M3 inner hexagon screw (No. 6), and dismount the linear stepping
motor (No. 4);
4)After the new motor is installed, secure the retaining screw using thread locker.
Note: the retaining screw should aim at the sunken spot of the lead screw;
5)Install the new motor following the steps above in the reversed order.
4-36
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-33 Removing and installing the print head moving motor
1 Lead screw connecting 5 Lead screw
024-000519-
pedestal / (integrated with the
00
motor)
2 Inner hexagon set screw 6 Stainless steel
with cup point inner hexagon
GB/T80-2000 M4X8 black / socket cap screw /
GB/T70.1-2000
M3X8 passivated
3 Linear motor pedestal 7 Glue. .Thread
A90-000060-
/ locker 24350ml/EA
--
(tube)
4 Motor linear stepping 5V
1.8step length 024-000519-
0.012192mm lead screw 00
66mm
Validation
1)Check whether the retaining screw is tightened;
2)Check whether the retaining screw aims at the sunken spot of the lead screw.
4-37
Subsystem Functions
4.2.15 Replacing Sensors
4.2.16 Locations of Sensors and Detecting Elements
Figure 4-34 Front cover Figure 4-35 Back plate (PCBA bracket removed)
No. Name No. Name

1 Pinch roller detection micro-switch 5 Horizontal linear movement
end position sensor
2 Carbon strip winding key cap 6 Vertical deflection position
fixing sensor
3 Carbon strip detection sensor 7 Vertical deflection position
detection sensor
4 Carbon strip breakage detection 8 Horizontal linear movement
sensor A and B start position sensor
The FRU ID of these parts are as follows:

1 Micro-switch M07-00143S--- 4~7 Motor position
2800-21-28878
SS-5GL2 sensor assembly
2 Printing module 051-001568-00 8 PHOTOELEC
keypad PCBA Optical Sensor IP55 011-000021-00
940nm 15cm
3 Tube detection
115-005375-00
assembly
4-38
Subsystem Functions
4.2.17 Removing and Installing the Micro-Switch (Operated on the

Instrument)
Tools
Procedure
1 Unplug the connecting cables from the micro-switch. Note: the green connector is
connected to Pin 1, and the black one to Pin 2, while the Pin 3 in the middle is idled.
Figure 4-36Removing and installing the micro-switch 1

2Remove the No. 2 screw from the micro-switch using the cross-head
screwdriver;
4-39
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-37 Removing and installing the micro-switch 2

1 Micro-switch SS-5GL2 M07-00143S-- 2 Cross-recessed
- panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M2X8
/
with
coating
3Install the new micro-switch following the steps above in the reversed order.
Validation
1)Check whether the cables are connected correctly;
2)Check whether the stroke opening and closing are proper, and whether the
micro-switch is over-pressed when the rotating arm goes down.
4.2.18 Removing and Installing the Carbon Strip Breakage Detection

Sensor
Tools
4-40
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
1Dismount the whole slide printing assembly from the instrument;

2Remove the No. 6 screw using the cross-head screwdriver;
3Unplug the connector of the motor position sensor assembly (No. 5) cable, and
then dismount the motor position sensor assembly;
4Dismount the other motor position sensor in the same way;
Figure 4-38Removing and installing the carbon strip breakage detection sensor
1 Stainless steel inner / 4 Front plate of the /
hexagon socket cap screw transmission case
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8
passivated
2 Printing module keypad 051-001568 5 Motor position sensor
2800-21-28878
PCBA -00 assembly
3 Key cap / 6 Cross-recessed
panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M3X6
/
with
color-zinc coating
Validation
Check whether the cables are connected correctly
4-41
Subsystem Functions
Component Cable Labeling Mechanical ID
Carbon strip breakage detection sensor A PH_SEN5_RB1 PH_SEN5

Carbon strip breakage detection sensor B PH_SEN6_RB2 PH_SEN6
4.2.19 Removing and Installing the Printing Module Key Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
1Dismount the whole slide printing assembly from the instrument;
2Pull out the key cap (No. 3);
3Remove the M3 inner hexagon screws (No. 1), and dismount the printing module
key board PCBA;
4While installing the new printing module key board PCBA, mount the key board
PCBA first from the inside, and then install the key cap from the outside.
4.2.20 Removing and Installing the Horizontal Linear Movement Start

Position Sensor
Tools
Cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
Dismount the whole slide printing assembly from the instrument;
Remove the PCBA bracket to reveal the back plate;
Unplug the sensor cable connector (No. 1);
Remove the No. 2 M4 screws, and dismount the sensor.
4-42
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-39 Removing and Installing the Horizontal Linear Movement Start Position
Sensor
1 PHOTOELEC Optical 2 Cross-recessed /
Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm panhead screw
011-000021- GB/T818-2000
00 M4X10 with
color-zinc coating
Validation
4.2.21 Removing and Installing Vertical Movement Position Detection

Sensor
Tools
Procedure
1Dismount the whole slide printing assembly from the instrument as instructed in
Section 1.2.1;
2Remove the PCBA bracket to reveal the back plate;
3Unplug the sensor cable connector (No. 1);
4Remove the M3 cross-recessed screw (No. 2), and dismount the sensor. Note:
Do not dismount or move the vertical deflection position fixing sensor or the sensor
bracket aside.
4-43
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-40 Removing and Installing Vertical Movement Position Detection Sensor
1 Motor position sensor 2 Cross-recessed /
assembly panhead screw
2800-21-28 GB/T818-2000 M3X6
878 with
color-zinc coating
Validation
4.2.22 Removing and Installing the Horizontal Linear Movement End

Position Sensor
Same as the steps in Section 1.2.10.6
4.2.23 Removing and Installing Vertical Movement Position Fixing

Sensor
Tools
4-44
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
1 Dismount the whole slide printing assembly from the instrument;

2 Remove the PCBA bracket to reveal the back plate;
3 Unplug the sensor cable connector (No. 1);
4 Remove the M3 cross-recessed screw (No. 2), and dismount the sensor. Note: Do
not dismount or move the sensor bracket (No. 3).
Figure 4-41 Removing and installing vertical movement position fixing sensor
1 Motor position sensor 2800-21-2 3 Sensor bracket /
assembly 8878
2 Cross-recessed /
panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M3X6
with
color-zinc coating
Adjustment
After the sensor is replaced, you need to re-adjust the printing pressure as instructed below:
1) Go to the "Slide Printing Pos." adjusting screen. In the "Shuttle Truck Motor" area, tap
"Motor Initialization", and then select "Printing Pos."; in the "Printing Module Vertical
Motor" area, select "Start Pos.";
4-45
Subsystem Functions
2) Place a slide in the shuttle truck. In the "Printing Module Vertical Motor" area, select
"Pre-Print Pos.", and then select "Print Pos.". Keep tapping the "Upward" button until the
compensation step becomes 0, and tap "Save";
3) Tap "Start Pos.", "Pre-Print Pos." and "Print Pos." in turn, and keep tapping
"Downward" until the print head goes 26steps after contacting the slide. Tap "Save" after
the adjustment. Note: remove the carbon strip to ensure better view when the print head
contact the slide.
Figure 4-42Printing pressure adjusting screen
Validation
properly.
2Check if the carbon strip has leak or crack.
4.2.24 Validating the Slide Printing Quality

Validate the printing quality by enabling the print test page function: log in at the service
access level, and tap "Setup"->"System"->"Advanced Print Setup", to go to the screen shown
below. Check the "Print Test Page Enabled" box.
4-46
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-43 Printout checking and setup screen

Check the following:
1. Whether the printout is clear in general;
2. Whether the 1D code, 2D code, letters and numbers are readable;
3. Whether the micro points of the print head are normal.
Note: after the print test page function is enabled, all the printouts are all considered as test
pages, which do not change when the print setup is changed (print contents or format). If you
switch to the administrator or operator access level, the print test page function will be
disabled automatically.
4.2.25 Solving Problems Related to Printing

1. Black line on top and/or bottom
Possible Cause:
4-47
Subsystem Functions
Small impurity substances on the surface of the slide

Print head needs to be cleaned
Solution:
Use a clean slide
Clean the print head (see Section 4.2.11)
If black line is still found in fixed position after cleaning, the heating micro-element of
the print head may be broken;
2. White line on top and/or bottom
Possible Cause:
Small impurity substances on the surface of the slide
Print head needs to be cleaned
Solution:
Use a clean slide
If white line is still found in fixed position after cleaning and the line goes through the
printout, the heating micro-element of the print head may be broken;
3. Unclear in general (too light)
Possible Cause:
Use slide other than specified (e.g. the label area is frosted)
The print head needs to be cleaned (See Section 4.2.11 for details
The degree of blackness is too low
Incorrect resistance entry after replacing the print head(see Section xxx);
Improper printing angle after replacing the print head
Printing pressure inadequate
4-48
Subsystem Functions
Solution:
Use a clean slide
Adjust the degree of blackness (not available temporarily)
Check and modify the print head resistance value R(See Section xxx);
Adjust the printing angle (See Section XXX)
Adjust the printing pressure (See Section XXX)
4. Frame losing in lengthwise direction
Possible Cause:
Impurity substances on the surface of the slide
Solution:
Use a clean slide
5. Printout unevenly (some parts are darker, and some parts are lighter)
Possible Cause:
The label area of the slide is not level;
Print head pressure uneven in left and right.
Solution:
Use specified slide
Adjust the printing pressure (See Section XXX)
4.2.26 Adjusting the Printing Settings
4.2.27 General Print Setup

Configure at the screen shown below, and check the preview on the screen after the settings
4-49
Subsystem Functions
are changed. After the setup is changed, print on one slide to check the quality.
Figure 4-44Print setup screen
4.2.28 Special Print Setup

1. Perform fine adjustment of the print position (to adapt to label areas of different widths)
The height of the printout is designed for the standard slide whose width is 19mm. If the
user use slides which has lower label area, adjust as follows.
1) In the " Adjusting Printing Pos." area, tap the "+" or "-" after "Transverse Pos.
Adjust" to move the print position up or down;
2) Tap "-" after the "Linewidth" in the "Print Template Setup" area to reduce the
linewidth;
3) Adjust and validate for once or twice, you should be able to get qualified printout.
2. Bar-code resolution setup (for different bar-code scanning device)

Different hospitals may use different types of bar-code scanners (e.g. laser, or CCD), which
have different resolutions. Therefore, the bar-code scanner resolution is editable.
When the printing area is the same, the information to be printed is proportional to the
dimension of the minimum bar-code unit, and reversely proportional to the resolution of
printing:
The more information to be printed, the smaller the minimum unit is, and the higher the
4-50
Subsystem Functions
resolution is;
The less information to be printed, the larger the minimum unit is, and the lower the resolution
is;
Tap "Setup" -> "System"->"Advanced Print Setup" , and select desired resolution,
where the options are:

Auto: the software automatically adjust the resolution according to the bar-code.
Suitable for laboratories where the contents to be printed are of different lengths;
Low: for laboratories which have less contents to be printed , and where the
bar-code scanner precision is low;
High: for laboratories which have more contents to be printed, and where the
bar-code scanner precision is high;
After the configuration, print on a slide, and use the bar-code scanner in site to see it can
identify the bar-code.
4-51
Subsystem Functions
4.2.29 Daily Maintenance
Figure 4-45 Print head assembly

Step 1: release the adjusting bar
Step 2: pull out the winding core of the carbon strip distributing wheel and that of the
withdrawal wheel
Step 3: get a new roll of carbon strip, press to install it on to the distributing wheel. Press to
fix the end of the carbon strip using the compression bar of the other withdrawal wheel
(spare part), and then wind the carbon strip according to the diagram labeled on the front
plate of the slide printing subsystem.
Step 4: tighten the adjusting bar , and press the carbon strip winding key 11 to stretch it.
4-52
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-46 Installing the print head carbon strip

After the print head is used for some time (about 3000 sample runs), dust or impurity
substances may be accumulated on it, which affect the heat conduction effect, making the
printout too light or unreadable. Therefore, the print head should be cleaned periodically.
Procedure and notes:

Removing the print head;
Wipe the heater wire along the printing direction using a clean cloth (or cotton swab)
dipped with anhydrous alcohol;
After the alcohol is fully volatilized, mount back the print back. (Do not dry the alcohol by
mouth blowing)
Note:
Wear clean gloves while cleaning the print head;
Taking the print head by holding the two sides between fingers;
While placing the print head, make sure the side with the aluminous block facing
down (the side with the heater wire facing up);
Do not blow from your mouth towards the print head (the spittle may come to the
surface of the print head, causing damage or corrosion);
4-53
Subsystem Functions
Do not touch the heater wire of the print head or PCB with bare hand;
Do not wipe the label area while cleaning, in order not to clear the printing on the
label.
4.3 Blood Dispensing Unit

4.3.1 Function Introduction
The functions of the auto slide maker & stainer are shown in the figure below.
Piercing &
Mixing Sample
Aspirating Sample State
Analysis
Open-vial
Aspirating Micro
Aspirating
Left-Right
Picking up Cleaning Loading Inversion Dispensing
Inversion Slide Printing
Slide Slide Slide Detection Blood
Detection
Staining Dryness Detection

Blood Film Slide Slide
Blood Film Drying Levering Making
Direct Output Spread Detection
Figure 4-47 Function flow of the auto slide maker & stainer
The functions circled in red are the functions completed by the sampling & dispensing
subsystem, which include:
1.Piercing the tube and aspirating sample in auto loading mode

2.Aspirating sample in open-vial mode
3.Aspirating sample in micro mode
4.Blood dispensing
5.Cleaning and resetting
6.Analyzing the blood sample state
4-54
Subsystem Functions
4.3.2 Mechanical Structure
4.3.3 Diagram
Figure 4-48 Blood dispensing assembly

1 Motor linear stepping 5V 024-000462- 7 Y-direction upper sensor 011-000021-
0.0635mm/step bipolar 00 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor 00
IP55 940nm 15cm
2 X-direction sensor baffle / 8 Vertical linear guide rail set.
MGN9-C1-R155-Z0CM
3 Blood dispensing probe 115-017561- 9 Y-direction lower sensor 011-000021-
00 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor 00
IP55 940nm 15cm
4 XX-direction sensor 011-000021- 10 Open-vial probe wipe 041-005497-
PHOTOELEC Optical 00 00
Sensor IP55 940nm
15cm
5 Stepping motor 3.7V 1.8 11 Synchronous flat-toothed
0000-10-109 M6C-020001
degree 3.2kgfcm single belt.142MXL025 rubber
85 ---
shaft
6 Horizontal linear guide 12 Tow chain. Model 0130
031-000255-
rail set. inside groove width 20mm 10
00
MGN9C1R135ZFCM segments with 2 fixes
4-55
Subsystem Functions

The blood dispensing assembly is designed to aspirate blood sample from the auto loading
aspiration position or open-vial aspiration position, and then dispense it from the dispensing
probe onto the slide glass.
The blood dispensing assembly moves in 2 directions: horizontal and vertical. Besides, a
towline is provided for reliable fixing of the moving tubes and cables.
As shown in the figure above, the horizontal step motor provides the driving power, the
synchronous pulley and belt are driven, the linear guide rail provides guidance, and a sensors
provides the function of position initialization.
The vertical linear motor provides the driving power, the linear guide rail provides guidance,
and 2 sensors detect the 2 positions (upper and lower).
In the vertical elastic mechanism where the dispensing probe is fixed to, there is a spring
inside it, and a lower sensor baffle attached to it. The lower sensor is not blocked by this
baffle when the elastic mechanism is at the upper position. Driven by the linear motor, the
elastic mechanism brings the dispensing probe downwards from the upper position; when the
dispensing probe tip contact the slide, the linear motor keeps driving, and the probe tip is in
relative rest on the slide; the elastic mechanism lifts up the lower sensor baffle until it block
the lower sensor, and the lower position detection is completed. The contact force between
the dispensing probe and the slide depends on the spring in the elastic mechanism and the
height of the sensor baffle when it is lifted up.
According to the movement flow design, the dispensing probe only contacts the slide when
dispensing blood. At this time,the lower position sensor baffle blocks the sensor. The
dispensing probe does not contact any parts of the instrument in other positions. Based on
the design above, the lower position sensor status can be detected: if the sensor is blocked
when it is not supposed to be, the movement is abnormal, and the dispensing probe should
have already contact other parts. In this case, stop the movement to protect the dispensing
probe.
4-56
Subsystem Functions
4.3.5 System Principle Schema
Aspiration pos. Cleaning pos. Dispensing pos./Start pos.

Dispensing probe horizontal
movement
Blood dispensing pathway
Start pos.
Separation bubble pos.
Dispensing probe vertical

Cleaning pos.
movement Ready for dispensing pos.
Dispensing pos.
Aspiration pos.
Open-vial loading
movement
Open-vial loading pathway

Aspiration pos.
User operation pos.
Start pos.
Figure 4-49 Mechanical structure of sampling & dispensing subsystem
Note: for the horizontal movement and vertical movement of the dispensing probe, there are
4 positions which has requirements for motor positions.
Aspiration position: both the horizontal motor and vertical motor are at the
aspiration position;
Cleaning position: both the horizontal motor and vertical motor are at the cleaning
position;
Ready for dispensing position: the horizontal motor is at the dispensing position
(start position), and the vertical motor at the ready for dispensing position;
Dispensing position: both the horizontal motor and vertical motor are at the
dispensing position (start position).
Figures and charts are used in subsequent sections for better understanding.
The requirements for different positions are shown in the table below.
Table 4-1 Requirements for different positions in sampling & dispensing subsystem
Distance
Step Need
Sequenc from the Detailed Position
Distance Name Adjustm
e Name Start Requirement
(mm) ent?
Position
4-57
Subsystem Functions
(mm)
Start position, Dispensing probe at

POS1 0.0 dispensing Yes the lengthwise center
Dispensin
position of the slide
g probe
0.1626 Cleaning Work with the cleaning
horizontal POS2 34.5 Yes
position bath, same axle
movement
Aspirate Same axle with the
POS3 80.0 Yes
position adapter
Probe tip inside the
POS1 0.0 Start position Yes
probe wipe: 10.2mm
Separation Probe tip outside the
POS2 11.2 None
bubble probe wipe: 1mm
Ready for
POS3 60.8 dispensing Yes Above the slide: 3mm
Dispensin position
g probe Dispensing Spring compressing:
0.0635 POS4 66.8 None
vertical position 3mm
movement Distance from the
Aspirate
POS5 85.0 None probe to the bottom of
position
the tube: 1mm
Adjusting
POS6 56.5 Yes
position
Cleaning
POS7 18.0 None
position
POS1 0.0 Start position None
Feeding
0.1626 Aspirate
movement POS2 113.0 None
position
4.3.6 Fluidic Structure

The fluidic structure is shown in the figure below.
4-58
Subsystem Functions
Piercing Probe
Piercing PV01/GV25 PV02/GV21

Needle
C5 C7
T4-J1 T9-P1 T10 T11 J7-T14-J8-P4
Blood Sensor1 Blood Sensor3
T5-J2
Blood Sensor2 Drop
J5-T13-J6
C3 Needle
T1 C4
Probe
T20 C8 Wipe
T6
Liquid Sensor
PS1
probe washing bath

Blood dispensing
T21 T17 T192
T7
T19 T16
CV1 T18
OPEN
C1
100uLSYRING
2.5mLSYRING
C9 C11
TS
C12
T2 T23 T24
PV04/GV16
PV03/GV20 GV57
PV05/GV15
WC-B2
WC-B1
70KPa
C2 T28
T22
T29
J3-T12-J4-P3
J9-T27-J10
LVM Valve Manifold

B C D E F
SV32 SV34 SV37 SV35 SV33 SV31
T3
SV36
WC-B1
WC-B2
H A
G
-40KPa
70KPa
T31
C19
T32
-40KPa
70KPa
GV41
T73
C10 T74
T45
T43
GV58
T83
TC8 LC-D
WC_B
LF1 TC4
C31
T82 T81
Figure 4-50Fluidic structure of the sample dispensing subsystem
For the fluidic component functions, see the section of the fluidic system.
4.3.7 Sequence Introduction
4.3.8 Sequence Flow

Based on the system design protocol, the sample dispensing system has the following
characters:
Work in iteration with 30s as a cycle.
There are 3 modes:
Auto loading mode
Open-vial mode
Micro Mode
The auto loading mode and open-vial mode supports single aspiration for multiple slides
(up to 5 slides);
For auto loading mode, the throughput is 120 samples/hour, and 60 samples/hour for
open-vial and micro mode;
4-59
Subsystem Functions
In each cycle, the start time of the dispensing sequence is fixed.

The figure below shows the sequence flow in single aspiration for single slide, and single
aspiration for 3 slides.
0 30 60 90 120 150 180
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120 120
Auto loading, single Dispensing

Aspirating Cleaning Aspirating Cleaning Dispensing Aspirating Cleaning
aspiration for single 17.5s Dispensing12s 3.5s 17.5s 12s 3.5s 17.5s 12s
slide Aspirating Cleaning Dispensing Aspirating Cleaning Dispensing
3.5s 17.5s 12s 3.5s 17.5s 12s 3.5s
Dispensing
Auto loading, single 3.5s Dispensing
Aspirating Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Dispensing Dispensing
aspiration for three 17.5s 26.3s 26.3s 12s 3.5s 3.5s 3.5s
slides Dispensing Dispensing Aspirating Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning
3.5s 3.5s 17.5s 26.3s 26.3s 12s
Open-vial, single
aspiration for single slide Aspirating Cleaning Aspirating Cleaning Aspirating Cleaning
17.5s 12s 17.5s 12s 17.5s 12s
Micro mode Dispensing Dispensing Dispensing
3.5s 3.5s 3.5s
Dispensing Dispensing
Open-vial, single 3.5s 3.5s Cleaning
Aspirating Cleaning Cleaning Aspirating Cleaning Cleaning
aspiration for three 17.5s 26.3s 26.3s 12s 17.5s 26.3s 26.3s
slides Dispensing Dispensing
3.5s 3.5s
Figure 4-51 Sequence flow of sample dispensing subsystem
The details of the sequences are shown in the table below:
Table 4-2 Sequence functions of sample dispensing subsystem
Function No. Details Remarks

F001 Piercing the tube, aspirating Piercing mode
blood sample, and preparing
for dispensing
Aspiration F005 Aspirating blood sample, and Open-vial mode
preparing for dispensing
F008 Aspirating blood sample, and Micro mode
preparing for dispensing
Blood F015-F050 Blood dispensing All modes
dispensing
F003 Cleaning the tubes Piercing mode
Cleaning and
F006 Cleaning the tubes Open-vial mode
resetting
F009 Cleaning the tubes Micro mode
F004 Cleaning the tubes, and Piercing mode,
preparing for dispensing single aspiration for
Single aspiration
multiple slides
for multiple
F007 Cleaning the tubes, and Open-vial mode,
slides
preparing for dispensing single aspiration for
multiple slides
Since the dispensing volume needs to be different based on different sample information,
different blood dispensing sequences are designed for different dispensing volumes.
Sequences F015-F050 are corresponding to the dispensing volumes 1.5uL-5.0uL.
4-60
Subsystem Functions
4.3.9 Auto Loading Sequences

In auto loading mode, the whole sampling process can be divided into 3 parts, where the
aspiration part can be divided into 5 parts, shown as follows:
Aspiration
Piercing (the probe pierces the tube cap and get into the tube)
First aspiration (aspirating 200uL blood sample from the tube)
Probe withdrawal (the probe gets out of the tube)
Second aspiration (aspirating the sample into the public tubing)
Preparing for dispensing (pushing the sample probe into the dispensing tubing, and
getting ready for dispensing)
Blood dispensing
Cleaning and resetting
The mechanical states and fluidic actions of the steps above are shown in the Figures below.
Piercing probe
30uL
Blood
sensor 1 Blood PV5-02
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
10uL
A) Initial Fluidic Status b) Initial Mechanical Status
Figure 4-52Initial status
These are the default states before the measurement.

Piercing probe
30uL
Blood
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
10uL
A) Fluidic Actions b) Mechanical Actions
Figure 4-53 Piercing
In the piercing sequence, the dispensing probe moves to the cleaning position. At the same
time, the piercing cylinder gas valve opens, and the probe gets into the tube.
4-61
Subsystem Functions
Piercing probe
200uL
Blood
PV5-01 sensor 2 30uL 1.0FEP-xx
30uL
100uL
2.5mL syringe syringe
10uL
Figure 4-54First aspiration

In the first aspiration sequence, the 2.5mL syringe aspirates 200uL sample.
Piercing probe
190u
L 120uL
Blood
sensor 1 Blood 80uLPV5-02
PV5-01
sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
30uL
100uL
10uL
Piercing probe
120uL 50uL
Blood
PV5-01
sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
30uL
100uL
Piercing probe
50uL
Blood
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
150uL
100uL
syringe
30uL
2.5mL syringe
Figure 4-55 Second aspiration
In the second aspiration sequence, the actions of different parts are as follows:
The 2.5mL syringe aspirate 50uL (fluidic action)
The 2.5mL syringe pushes the 50uL sample into the dispensing tubing (fluidic action)
The 2.5mL syringe aspirate 150uL (fluidic action)
In this way, while preparing for dispensing, there is a segment of gas and sample for
separation between the diluent and the sample, in order to reduce the influence of the diluent
residue to the subsequent sample flow.
4-62
Subsystem Functions
Piercing probe
30uL
Blood
PV5-01 sensor 2 2
1.0FEP-xx 120uL
100uL 1
syringe 3
2.5mL syringe
Figure 4-56 Preparing for dispensing
In the second aspiration sequence, the actions of different parts are as follows:
1.The 2.5mL syringe pushes the sample into the dispensing probe (fluidic action)
2.The dispensing probe gets inside the probe wipe, where the exterior and the tip of
the probe are cleaned (mechanical action:1 )
3.Dispensing probe goes to the ready for dispensing position (mechanical actions:
2 ,
3)
Piercing probe
30uL
Blood
PV5-01
sensor 2 117uL
1.0FEP-xx
1 2
100uL
syringe
Figure 4-57 Dispensing blood
In the dispensing sequence, the actions of different parts are as follows:

1.The dispensing probe goes to the dispensing position, and the probe tip contacts
the slide glass (mechanical action: 1 )
2.The 100uL syringe pushes the sample out of the dispensing probe, into the slide
glass (fluidic action)
3.Dispensing probe goes to the ready for dispensing position (mechanical action:
2 )
4-63
Subsystem Functions
Piercing probe
30uL 2
Blood
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
4 3
1
10uL
Figure 4-58 Cleaning and resetting
1.Dispensing probe goes to the cleaning position (mechanical action:

1,
2,
3)
2.Cleaning the piercing pathway, and the interior of the dispensing probe (fluidic
action)
3.Cleaning the exterior of the dispensing probe, and then the dispensing probe
goes to the separation bubble position (mechanical action: 4 )
In summary, the detailed actions of the sampling & dispensing subsystem in auto loading
mode are shown in the figure below:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Probe
Piercing First aspiration withdrawal Second aspiration Preparing for dispensing Dispensing Cleaning and resetting
M_DRP_H
5.2 5.6 0.9 1.3
M_DRP_V 6.3 6.7

4.5 4.9 1.3 1.6 5.7 6.1
5.6 6.5
0 0.9
M_TUBEIN
4.6 5
PUMP_SYR +2006
+4010 0.2 4.3 INIT 9 +5010 6.3 6.7 +2010
+50 7 +1606 -2956
-50 7 MAX-1200
+85010
DROP_SYR 6.7 7.0 +1016
+3516 -516 1.7 3.4 INIT 16
+1016 -216
MAX-46
Piercing V81 0 0
Diluent V36 0 4.3 5.0~5.5 6.2 9
2.5mL syringe V37 1 4.3 0.2 5
Aspiration tubing V25 0 1.3 0 4.2 2 3.2
Dispensing tubing V21 0 4.3 2 3.2
Dispensing & cleaning tubing V33 0.2 0.9 3 4.8
Open-vial probe wipe drawing V16 4.3 ~ 6.5 0 0.9 5.5 6.7
Open-vial probe wipe dispensing V31 4.5~5.3 5.7 6.7
Cleaning bath V15 4.5 5.5
Piercing probe wipe dispensing V35 0.2 0.8
Piercing probe wipe drying V53 0.8 4.6
Piercing probe wipe drawing V20 0 4.9
LC_D 7 11
WC_B 7 11
TS_L_B
PS_L_B
CHECK_PUNC
SAMPLE_COMPLETE
READY_DROP
DROP_OVER
4-64
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-59 Open-vial mode sequence flow of the sampling & dispensing subsystem
In the figure above, TS_L_B is the command of diluent temperature test, and PS_L_B is the
command of sample pressure test. See the introduction of viscosity test for details.
Note: the sampling & dispensing sequence of each sample lasts for 32s, where 2s is
overlapping with the time for the next sample.
Note: for single aspiration for multiple slides, its cleaning and resetting actions are covered by
the cleaning and resetting+preparing for dispensing actions introduced above.
4.3.10 Open-Vial Sequences

In open-vial mode, the whole sampling & dispensing process can be divided into 3 parts,
where the aspiration part can be divided into 4 parts, shown as follows:
Aspiration
Feeding (the open-vial loading module transports the uncapped tube from the start
position to the aspiration position)
Waiting for 2s
The syringe aspirates sample (the syringe aspirates 150uL sample from the tube, and
the exterior of the dispensing probe is cleaned)
Preparing for dispensing (finishes the preparations before dispensing)
Blood dispensing
Cleaning and resetting
The mechanical states and fluidic actions of the steps above are shown in the Figures below.
Piercing probe
30uL
Blood
PV5-01
sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
10uL
a) Initial Fluidic Status b) Initial Mechanical Status
Figure 4-60Initial status
These are the default states before the measurement.

Piercing probe
30uL
Blood
PV5-01
sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
10uL
Figure 4-61 Feeding
In the feeding sequence, the open-vial loading mechanism transports the uncapped tube
from the start position to the aspiration position.
4-65
Subsystem Functions
1
3
Piercing probe
10uL 150uL
30uL
Blood
sensor 1 Blood PV5-02 2
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
1 4
Figure 4-62Syringe aspirating
In the syringe aspirating sequence, the work flow is as follows:
1.Dispensing probe goes to the aspiration position (mechanical action; see the
figure above)
2.Aspirating 150uL sample (fluidic action)
3.Dispensing probe goes back to the cleaning position. At the sample time, the
exterior of the dispensing probe is cleaned, and the open-vial feeding mechanism
goes back to the start position (mechanical action; see the right figure below)
Piercing probe
190u
L
10uL 130uL
Blood
sensor 1
2
Blood PV5-02
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
1 3
100uL
syringe
2.5mL syringe
Figure 4-63 Preparing for dispensing
While preparing for dispensing, the work flow is as follows:
1.Dispensing 20uL sample, cleaning the dispensing probe tip (fluidic action)
2.Dispensing probe goes to the ready for dispensing position (mechanical action)
Piercing probe
190u
L
Blood
sensor 1 Blood PV5-02 2
PV5-01 sensor 2
1.0FEP-xx
4 3
100uL 1
syringe 10uL
Figure 4-64 Cleaning and resetting
4-66
Subsystem Functions
In the cleaning and resetting sequence, the work flow is as follows:
1.Dispensing probe goes to the cleaning position (mechanical action:

1,
2,
3)
2.Cleaning the interior of the dispensing probe (fluidic action)

3.Cleaning the exterior of the dispensing probe, and then the dispensing probe
goes to the separation bubble position (mechanical action: 4 )
In summary, the detailed actions of the sampling & dispensing subsystem in auto loading
mode are shown in the figure below:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Preparing for
Feeding Syringe aspirating Dispensing Cleaning and resetting
dispensing
M_DRP_H 3 3.4
0.9 1.3
M_DRP_V 6.3 6.7

2.3 2.6
1.3 1.6 5.7 6.1
3.4 4.3
0 0.9
M_TUBEIN
4.6 5
PUMP_SYR 0.2 4.3 INIT 9 +5010 6.3 6.7 +2010
+1506 -5010 +5010
MAX290
DROP_SYR 1.7 3.4 INIT 16 6.7 7.0 +1016

+3016 -216 -3.516 MAX-36
V81
V36 0 6.2 8.1 9.5 2.8~3.2 6.2 9
V37
V25
V21
V33 1.5 6.3 3 4.8

8.9 9.3
V16 2.7 4 6.3 8.4 0 0.9 5.5 6.7
2.1 ~ 4.3
V31 0.2 1.2 6.4 8.2 2.3~2.9 5.7 6.7
V15 4.5 5.5
V35
V57
V20
LC_D 7 11
WC_B 7 11
TS_L_B
PS_L_B
CHECK_PUNC
SAMPLE_COMPLETE
READY_DROP
DROP_OVER
Figure 4-65Open-vial mode sequence flow
Note: for single aspiration for multiple slides, its cleaning and resetting actions are covered by
the cleaning and resetting+preparing for dispensing actions introduced above.
The actions in micro mode is similar to those in open-vial mode. The only difference is that, in
open-vial mode, it is the 2.5mL syringe (PUMP_SYR) aspirating 150uL sample, while in micro
mode, it is the 100uL syringe (DROP_SYR) aspirating 20uL sample. Therefore, the micro
mode sequence flow is not introduced here.
4-67
Subsystem Functions
4.3.11 Analyzing the Blood Sample State
4.3.12 Viscosity Measurement and Calculation

Measurement principle:
When aspirating the same volume of sample, the higher the viscosity of the
sample is, the higher the pressure needed for the aspiration
The pressure is in proportion to the viscosity under specified conditions.
Therefore, the viscosity measurement procedure is designed to be as follows:
1.At the Calibration screen, measure the pressure when aspirating air
(viscosity=0)
P1 ;
2.At the Calibration screen, measure the pressure when aspirating diluent
(temperature: 20, viscosity

D =1); P2
3.In the sampling & dispensing process, measure the pressure when aspirating
blood sample (viscosity:

D ); P3
therefore:
B P3 P1

D P2 P1
Since the ambient pressure and temperature, as well as the temperature of the diluent vary,
to get rid of the influence of these factors, the following values should be recorded:
P0 _ C
Atmospheric pressure: (the atmospheric pressure in the sampling &
P0 _ J
dispensing process), (the atmospheric pressure in the calibration process)
TD _ C
Diluent temperature: (the diluent temperature in the sampling & dispensing
TD _ J
process), (the diluent temperature in the calibration process)
TE _ C
Ambient temperature: (the ambient temperature in the sampling &
TE _ J
dispensing process), (the ambient temperature in the calibration process)
Considering the values above, and the viscosity values of the diluent in different temperature,
the viscosity of the blood sample is attained. Calculation formula:
D _ J ( P3 _ C P0 _ C ) D _ C ( P1_ J P0 _ J )
B _ C
( P2 _ J P1_ J )
4-68
Subsystem Functions
4.3.13 Calibration Process

Purpose of calibration:
TD _ J P0 _ J P2 _ J P2 _ j
Attain the fiducial values of the viscosity: , , ,
Ensure the correlation between the viscosity in open-vial mode and in the auto
loading mode
Note: the correlation here is not equal to consistency. Since the blood sample is diluted in
auto loading mode, and the viscosity measurement is to measure the viscosity of the sample
dispensed from the probe (the viscosity after dilution), so for the same vial of sample, the
viscosity value attained in open-vial mode is higher than that attained in auto loading mode.
The specific ratio between the two values depends on the viscosity of the sample.
Operation procedure: TBD
Note: to ensure the effectiveness of the calibration, be aware of the following:
1.The ambient temperature should be stable: from 1 hour before the calibration to
the time when the calibration is finished, the temperature change should be no
larger than 2
2.The diluent should be equilibrated at the current temperature for more than 12
hours

Tools
1 107 cross-head screwdriver
Inner hexagon spanner (1 suite)
4.3.15 Removing the Blood Dispensing Assembly

Open the front cover assembly, right cover, and top cover;
Unplug the cables and tubes connected to the blood dispensing assembly;
Loosen the 4 M4x8 screws fixing the blood dispensing probe using the cross-head
screwdriver, where the 2 screws above should be loosened but not dismounted, while the 2
below should be dismounted. Pull the blood dispensing assembly away from the plate where
it is fixed and lift it to move it out from the instrument.

You don't need to dismount the blood dispensing assembly from the instrument before
replacing sensors. There are 3 sensors in the blood dispensing assembly: X-direction sensor,
Y-direction upper sensor, and Y-direction lower sensor. The 3 sensors are the same, so the
replacing procedures are also the same. Therefore, the steps below are applicable to all the 3
sensors.
1Unplug the connected cables of the sensor;
4-69
Subsystem Functions
2Remove the M4x12 cross-recessed panhead screw fixing the sensor, and then
dismount the sensor;
3Mount the new sensor;
4Connect the sensor cables;
5Readjust the sensors after replacement. See ..... for the procedure.
4.3.17 Replacing the Horizontal Motor

Horizontal motor replacement can be done without dismounting other components. Do as
follows:
1Unplug the cables connected to the motor;
2Remove the 4 M3x8 screws (with big washer) using the cross-head screwdriver,
and then dismount the motor and the synchronous pulley;
3Mount and pre-tighten the new motor (with synchronous pulley), strain the
synchronous belt manually, and then tighten the retaining screws;
4Plug the cables connected to the motor.
Figure 4-66 Replacing the FRU of the horizontal motor of the blood dispensing
assembly
1 M4X8 screw / 4 Stepping motor TBD
4-70
Subsystem Functions
3.7V 1.8 degree

3.2kgfcm single
shaft, with
synchronous
pulley
2 Y-direction upper 011-000021-00 5 Y-direction lower 011-000021-00
sensor sensor
PHOTOELEC PHOTOELEC
Optical Sensor Optical Sensor
IP55 940nm IP55 940nm 15cm
15cm
3 M3x8 with big / 6 XX-direction 011-000021-00
washer sensor
PHOTOELEC
Optical Sensor
IP55 940nm 15cm
4.3.18 Replacing the Vertical Motor

The vertical motor is a linear motor. Before replacing the motor, you need to dismount the
blood dispensing assembly from the instrument.
1Dismount the blood dispensing assembly from the instrument;
2Remove the 3 M3x12 inner hexagon screws (with spring washer and flat washer)
fixing the linear motor using the inner hexagon spanner;
3Remove the 2 M3x12 inner hexagon screws (with spring washer) fixing the motor
pedestal using the inner hexagon spanner;
4Lift up the linear motor (with the pedestal), remove the nuts from the motor, and
then dismount the motor (with the pedestal).
5Remove the 4 M3x8 inner hexagon screws fixing the linear motor to the pedestal
using the inner hexagon spanner, and then dismount the linear motor.
6Mount the linear motor in the reverse order of the steps above.
4-71
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-67 Replacing the FRU of the vertical motor of the blood dispensing assembly
1 Motor linear 024-000462-00 4 M3x12 inner /
stepping 5V hexagon screw
0.0635mm/step (with spring
bipolar washer and flat
washer)
2 M3X8 inner / 5 M3x12 inner /
hexagon screw hexagon screw
(with spring
washer)
3 Nuts in the linear / 6 Motor pedestal /
stepping motor
4.3.19 Replacing the Dispensing Probe

1Unplug the rubber tube connected to the dispensing probe;
2Hold the cylindrical shell fixing the dispensing probe by one hand, and twist the
pressing ring of the dispensing probe counterclockwise to remove the ring;
3Lift up the dispensing probe to dismount it;
4Insert the new dispensing probe into the cylindrical shell (note the direction
4-72
Subsystem Functions
requirement), and twist the pressing ring clockwise to fix the dispensing probe;
Connect the rubber tube to the dispensing probe.
4.4 Smearing Unit

4.4.1 Smearing Subsystem Function Introduction
The smearing subsystem consists of the slide transportation, smearing, spreader slide
cleaning, and slide levering parts. To make a blood smear, the instrument needs to load the
slide to the shuttle truck by which it can be transported to each position for blood dispensing,
scraping, smearing, being levered for drying, and then being stained in the staining unit.
The spreading of blood film (smearing) is to make smeared slide by actions of smearing
mechanism after getting the smear parameters from the "Table of smearing parameters"
based on the properties of the blood sample.
Properties of the blood sample need to be taken into consideration include: viscosity, and
HCT value;
The smearing parameters include: blood dispensing volume, angle of scraping, blood drop
spread time, speed of smearing, and angle of smearing.
Sample
Viscosity Level Dispensing
Measurement Volume
Smearing Parameters
Blood
Enter HCT Speed of
Action Dispensing &
Value Smearing
Smearing
Enter the Angle of

Level Directly Smearing
4-73
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-70 Table of smearing parameters
Smearing Control
Part of the smearing function is to dispense the blood sample onto the slide, and then make
the blood drop spread to a film qualified in both appearance (total area of the film, width,
length, and shape) and cell distribution. Therefore, the key smearing parameters (including
blood dispensing volume, speed of smearing and angle of smearing) need to be determined
based on the properties of the blood sample.
Dispensing in drop
Scraping and spreading
4-74
Subsystem Functions
Smearing
Figure 4-71Smearing actions
4.4.2 Checking and Adjusting the Appearance of the Blood
Film
4.4.3 Appearance Requirements of Blood Film
Dimensions of the blood film:

Length A: 25mm;
Width B: 19-22mm;
Distance from the end of the blood film to edge of the slide C: 5mm;
Distance from the side of the blood film to the edge of slide D: 1.5mm
Appearance of the blood film:
The surface of the blood film is smooth, symmetrical in left and right;
The blood cells scattered from the thick area to the thin area evenly with a narrowing tail
in square or feathery shape.
4.4.4 Adjusting the Appearance of Blood Film
4.4.5 Adjusting the Shape of the Blood Film

For a blood film in standard shape, the dispensing point, center of the blood film, and the
center of the slide should be in the same line.
4-75
Subsystem Functions
48mm 50mm
Blood drop
spreading line
Standard Shape
Abnormal Shape A Abnormal Shape B Abnormal Shape C
1. In the figure of "Abnormal shape A", the tail of the blood film is tilted, and the blood
dispensing position is abnormal.
To adjust: go to the blood dispensing position adjusting screen ("Service"->"Position
Adjust"->"Blood Dispensing Pos.", and run "Motor Initialization" of the horizontal motor of
blood dispensing. After the initialization is completed, select "Horizontal Start Pos.", and
adjust the dispensing position forward or backward according to the actual deviation (1 step
equals to 0.162mm). Tap "Save" when the adjustment completes. (See Section xxx for
4-76
Subsystem Functions
details)
2. In the figure of "Abnormal shape B", the tail of the blood film is tilted, and the position of the
sapphire spreader slide is abnormal.
Adjust"->"Smearing Pos.", and run "Motor Initialization" of the horizontal motor of smearing
module. After the initialization is completed, select "Horizontal Start Pos.", and adjust the
spreader slide position in relation to the shuttle truck forward or backward according to the
actual deviation (1 step equals to 0.162mm). (See Section xxx for details)
4-77
Subsystem Functions
3. In the figure of "Abnormal shape C", the blood film position and the blood dispensing
position are deviated in general. Not caused by the two reasons above.
Adjust"->"Slide Loading Pos.", and run "Motor Initialization" of the slide loading motor. After
the initialization is completed, select "End Pos.", and adjust the slide position in relation to the
shuttle truck leftward or rightward according to the actual deviation. (See Section xxx for
details)
4-78
Subsystem Functions
4.4.6 Length of the Blood Film

If most blood films are too short (30mm) or too long (45mm), it will be regarded as
abnormal.
Note: samples with special properties may lead to short blood films. Make sure the sample is
normal.
1.Fine adjustment of blood films in normal cases:
At the service access level, tap MENU->"Setup"->"Smear", to go to the smear setup screen.
Adjust the blood dispensing volume for different levels appropriately.
2.Troubleshooting for Abnormal Blood Film Length

Possible cause 1: viscosity measurement abnormal.
Solution: check whether the viscosity level measurement is abnormal (See Section xxx for
details). If it is abnormal, adjust the viscosity level measurement (See Section xxx for details);
Possible cause 2: temperature measurement abnormal.
Solution: go to the temperature status screen (Status->Temp.&Humidity&Pressure), and
check whether the "Diluent Temperature" and "Smear Pos. Temperature" values are
abnormal. If abnormality is found, See Section xxx for solution.
4-79
Subsystem Functions
4.4.7 Adjusting the Width of the Blood film

The width of the blood film (about 20mm) is determined by that of the spreader slide. So
when the blood film is too narrow, possible causes may be related to the glass slide or the
spreader slide;
Possible cause 1: to many blood residues on the sapphire spreader slide;
Solution: run probe cleanser maintenance of the fluidics;
Possible cause 2: the slide is not clean or contaminated by unexpected substances or

grease;
Solution: eliminate the unclean slides;
Possible cause 3: the slides are not well hydrophil;

Solution: use slides specified by Mindray, or clean the surfaces of the slides.
4.4.8 Adjusting the Thickness of the Blood Film

Log in at the administrator access level, tap "Setup"->"Smear". Define the thickness of the
blood film (Thin, Slightly Thin, Moderate, Slightly Thick, Thick).
4-80
Subsystem Functions
4.4.9 Sensor Layout
Figure 4-72 Sensor layout of smearing assembly 1
4-81
Subsystem Functions
4-82
Subsystem Functions
Mechanical
Name of the sensor Cable Labeling Function FRU code
ID
Shuttle truck loading
SEN5_TRNS_LD SEN5 2800-21-28878
position sensor
Shuttle truck printing
SEN6_TRNS_PRT SEN6 2800-21-28878
position sensor
Shuttle truck blood
dispensing position SEN7_TRNS_DRP SEN7 2800-21-28878
sensor
Shuttle truck start
SEN9_TRNS_SM_S SEN9 2800-21-28878
position sensor
Shuttle truck end
SEN8_TRNS_SM_E SEN8 2800-21-28878
position sensor
Shuttle truck slide
levering position SEN10_TRNS_ROL SEN10 2800-21-28878
sensor
Spreader slide
horizontal cleaning SEN11_SMR_H_CLN SEN11 011-000021-00
position sensor
Spreader slide
horizontal smearing SEN12_SMR_H_SMR SEN12 011-000021-00
position sensor
Spreader slide
vertical start position SEN13_SMR_V_S SEN13 011-000021-00
sensor
Spreader slide
vertical smearing SEN14_SMR_V_SMR SEN14 011-000021-00
position sensor
Levering module
horizontal position SEN15_ROL_H SEN15 011-000021-00
sensor
Slide levering
in-position detection OP5_ROL OP5 115-005375-00
sensor
The slide shuttle truck transports slides to different positions, and the spreader slide spreads
the blood drop to make the smear. The key positions are shown below:
4-83
Subsystem Functions
4.4.10 Key Components of the Subsystem
Figure4-75 Slide making subsystem

1 Shuttle truck X-direction / 4 Spreader slide /
movement assembly assembly
2 Shuttle truck assembly / 5 Cleaning and levering
/
assembly
3 Spreader slide / 6 Shuttle truck vibration
Y/Z-direction moving absorber /
assembly
4.4.11 Shuttle Truck Assembly

The structure of the shuttle truck assembly is shown in the figure below. It functions mainly to
transport, load and unload the slides.
4-84
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-76 The structure of the shuttle truck assembly
4.4.12 Shuttle truck X-direction movement assembly

The structure of the shuttle truck X-direction movement assembly is shown in the figure below.
It functions mainly to provide motive power and track to the X-direction linear movement of
the shuttle truck.
Figure 4-77 The structure of the shuttle truck X-direction movement assembly
4-85
Subsystem Functions
4.4.13 Spreader Slide Assembly

The structure of the spreader slide assembly is shown in the figure below. It functions mainly
to carry the spreader slide, and supports the actions of smearing and spreader slide cleaning.
Figure4-78 The structure of the spreader slide assembly
4.4.14 Spreader slide Y/Z-direction moving assembly

The structure of the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly is shown in the figure
below. It functions mainly to provide motive power and track to the Y/Z-direction linear
movement of the spreader slide.
4-86
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-79 The structure of the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly
4.4.15 Cleaning and Levering Assembly

The structure of the cleaning and levering assembly is shown in the figure below. It functions
mainly to support the actions of spreader slide cleaning and vertical levering.
Figure4-80 The structure of the cleaning and levering assembly
4-87
Subsystem Functions
4.4.16 Shuttle Truck Vibration Absorber

The structure of the shuttle truck absorber is shown in the figure below. It functions mainly to
absorb and restrain the vibration of the shuttle truck in the smearing process.
Figure4-81 The structure of the shuttle truck vibration absorber
4.4.17 Slide Levering Assembly

The structure of the slide levering is shown in the figure below. It functions mainly to unload
the slide from the shuttle truck and lever it to be vertical.
Figure4-82 The structure of the slide levering assembly
4-88
Subsystem Functions
4.4.18 Replacing and Adjusting the FRU
4.4.19 Spreader Slide Assembly
Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon screwdriver, 3202-J09 slide loading adjusting fixture
Procedure
Removal:
1 Open the front cover assembly, fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2 Pull the spreader slide assembly manually to to the position shown in the figure
below.
3 Remove the 3 M3X12 inner hexagon screws and the flat washers fixing the spreader
slide assembly and the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly, and then
dismount the spreader slide assembly.
4 Mount the new spreader slide assembly, and pre-tighten the screws (do not fix
them).
4-89
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-83 Replacing the spreader slide assembly

1 Spreader Slide / 4 Shuttle Truck /
Assembly Assembly
2 Spreader slide / 5 Slide loading /
Y/Z-direction moving adjusting fixture
assembly
3 M3x12 inner hexagon /
screw (with spring
washer and flat
washer)
Adjustment:
1Place the slide loading adjusting fixture on the slide shuttle truck, and pull the
truck to the position shown in the figure.
2Adjust the position and angle of the spreader slide slightly, making the spreading
edge falling into the groove of the slide loading adjusting fixture. Fix the screws
(keep the spreading edge inside the groove while fixing the screws).
Figure4-84 Adjusting the spreader slide assembly
Validation
1 After replacing the spreader slide, run a slide making cycle, and check whether the
blood film on the finished slide is symmetrical at the center.
4-90
Subsystem Functions
4.4.20 Shuttle Truck Assembly
Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon screwdriver
Procedure
Removal:
1Open the left cover assembly, fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2Place the slide levering assembly to the vertical position shown in the figure
below.
3Pull the synchronous belt of the shuttle truck manually, to make the truck move to
the position shown in the figure.
4Remove the 8 M3X16 inner hexagon screws fixing the shuttle truck assembly
and the anterior and posterior sliders of the truck driving rail.
5Move the shuttle truck to the belt clamp retaining screw to reveal the protective
board of the sensor, as shown in the figure below
6Remove the 2 M3X8 inner hexagon screws fixing the synchronous belt of the
shuttle truck using the inner hexagon screwdriver, and then remove the truck.
7Mount the new spreader slide assembly, and tighten the screws.
Figure4-85 Replacing the shuttle truck assembly
4-91
Subsystem Functions

1 Shuttle truck assembly / 5 Protective board of /
sensor
2 Slide levering / 6 Synchronous belt /
assembly driving the shuttle
truck
3 Guide rail sliders / 7 Belt clamp retaining /
screws
4 M3X16 inner hexagon /
screws
Adjustment:
1)Tap "Service""Position Adjust" to go to the position adjusting screw. Tap the
"Motor Initialization" buttons of the "Slide Loading Pos." and "Slide Loading End
Pos." in turn.
Figure4-86 Adjusting the slide shuttle truck 1
2) Place the "3202-J27 slide shuttle truck loading position adjusting fixture" at the
position shown in the figure below, and adjust the fixture position in relation to the
shuttle truck using the "Leftward" and "Rightward" buttons, to make the fixture in
contact with the shuttle truck. The area shown in the figure below is the qualified
contacting area. Remove the fixture
4-92
Subsystem Functions
PASS when
the two contact
like this
Figure4-87 Adjusting the slide shuttle truck 1
Validation
1 After replacing the spreader slide, run a slide making cycle, and check whether the
blood film is normal.
4.4.21 Spreader slide Y/Z-direction moving assembly
Tools
M3 inner hexagon screwdriver
Procedure
Note: the location of the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly
is shown in the figure below.
4-93
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-88 Location of the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly
Removal:
1Open the front cover assembly, fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2Unplug the connecting cables and the slots J4/J5/J38 on the circuit board shown
in the figure below. Take out the connecting cables from the cable accommodation
slot.
C-009-003512-00 Ultrasonic power supply socket
J9
J9
051-001438-00
051-001438-00
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic cleaning
cleaning drive
drive
051-001356-00
051-001356-00 Print
Print driving
driving board
board
control
control board
board (B)
(B) [K]
[K]
J1
J1 J13
J13 J5
J5
C-009-003468-00 Printer drive board power cord C-009-003469-00

Printer drive
board C-009-003510-00 Ultrasonic serial port cable 3101-30-68519
3101-30-68519
communication Keyboard[M]
Keyboard[M]
cable J1
J1
C-009-003858-00 Digital 5V and 12V board card power cord
J10
J10 A3
A3 A10
A10
J9
J9 J6
J6 J11
J11
A23
A23 C-009-004101-00 3204 keyboard cable
A40
J5
A40
J5
C-009-003467-00 Analog 12V output cable A26
A26 C-009-003516-00 Fluid pressure detection board cable
051-001508-00
051-001508-00 3204
3204 SM&S
SM&S data
data board
board
J1 051-001543-00
051-001543-00 SM&S
SM&S power
power distributor[D]
distributor[D] [A]
[A]
J1
A41
A41
C-009-003464-00 Digital 5V and 12V output cable

J1
J1
J3
J3
051-000218-00
051-000218-00 Clog
Clog
C-009-003465-00 Power 12V and 24V output cable A6 A5 detection
detection board
board [R]
[R]
A6 A5
J8
J8 J7
J7 J4
J4 J2
J2
C-009-003960-00 Drive board A communication cable

C-009-003857-00 Board card analog 12V power cord J21
J21
J2
J2
Power
Power assembly
assembly C-009-003859-00 Drive board digital and power cables
J30
J30 J4 051-000329-00
J4 051-000329-00 Valve
Valve drive
drive board
board A(J-A)
A(J-A) J5
J5
051-001515-00
051-001515-00 3204
3204 power
power drive
drive board
board (A)
(A)
[C-A
[C-A ]]
J1
J1
C-009-003857-00 Board card analog 12V power cord
009-004202-00 SM&S protective earth C-009-003961-00 Drive board B communication cable
wire C-009-003859-00 Drive board digital and power cables J28
J28
Transformer
Transformer
J21 051-000507-00
051-000507-00 Air-pressure
Air-pressure
J21 detection
J2
J2 detection board
board [P]
[P]
J1
J1
051-001515-00
051-001515-00 3204
3204 Power
Power drive
drive board
board
J1
J1 cable
cable (B)
(B) J40 C-009-003514-00 Air-pressure detection board cable
J7 Heating
Heating control
control board
board PCBA
PCBA [E] J6 [C-B J40
C-009-003479-00 Heating drive board J7 [E] J6 [C-B ]]
power cord
J30
J30 J4
J4 051-000329-00
051-000329-00 Valve
Valve drive
drive board
board B(J-B)
B(J-B) J5
J5
C-009-003461-00 Transformer output cable
C-009-003482-00 Heating drive board control signal cables
4-94
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-89 Cable connection of the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly
3Remove the 4 M4X8 inner hexagon screws fixing the spreader slide
Y/Z-direction movement assembly to the basal plate using the inner hexagon
screwdriver.
Figure4-90 Removing the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly
4Open the back cover.

5Pull out the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly from the right side,
and then remove it from the front (the path forms a right angle), as shown in the
figure below.
4-95
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-91 Taking out the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement assembly
6Dismount the spreader slide from the spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement
assembly. See Section1.3.1 for how to dismount it.
7Mount the new spreader slide assembly, and tighten the screws.
8Mount the spreader slide to the new spreader slide Y/Z-direction movement
assembly. See Section 1.3.1 for how to mount it.
9Re-connect the cables of the assembly and those of the circuit board slots.
Validation
2 After replacing the assembly, run a slide making cycle, and check whether the blood
film is normal.
4.4.22 Driven Wheel Assembly
Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon screwdriver, M4 inner hexagon screwdriver, tensiometer
Procedure
Note: the location of the driven wheel assembly is shown in the figure below.
4-96
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-92 The location of the driven wheel assembly
Removal:
1Open the left cover assembly, fix the cover firmly with the stop bar.
2Remove the 3 M4X8 inner hexagon screws fixing the shuttle truck driven wheel
assembly to the basal plate.
3Put away the synchronous belt driving the shuttle truck to take out the shuttle
truck driven wheel assembly, as shown in the figure below.
4Mount the new shuttle truck driven wheel assembly, and tighten the screws.
4-97
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-93 Replacing the shuttle truck driven wheel assembly
Adjustment:
1Loosen the 2 M3X12 inner hexagon screws (driven wheel retaining screws) and
1 M5X20 inner hexagon screws (driven wheel tensioning screw) using the inner
hexagon screwdriver, as shown in the figure below.
2Twin the synchronous belt driving the shuttle truck around the driven wheel.
3Tighten the M5X20 inner hexagon screw (driven wheel tensioning screw), and
measure the tensile force of the shuttle truck synchronous belt using the tensiometer.
Make sure the measured value is between 35N and 45N.
4Tighten the 2 M3X12 inner hexagon screws (driven wheel retaining screws)
using the inner hexagon screwdriver.
Figure4-94 Adjusting the shuttle truck driven wheel assembly
Validation
film is normal.
4.4.23 Shuttle Truck Driving Wheel Assembly
Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon screwdriver, M4 inner hexagon screwdriver, tensiometer
4-98
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
Note: the location of the driving wheel assembly is shown in the figure below.
Figure4-95 The location of the driving wheel assembly
Removal:
2Disconnect the wire coming out of the shuttle truck motor from the connector.
3Remove the 4 M4X8 inner hexagon screws fixing the shuttle truck driving wheel
assembly to the basal plate.
4Put away the synchronous belt driving the shuttle truck to take out the shuttle
truck driving wheel assembly, as shown in the figure below.
5Mount the new shuttle truck driven wheel assembly, and tighten the screws.
6Re-connect the wire coming out of the shuttle truck motor to the connector.
4-99
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-96 Replacing the shuttle truck driving wheel assembly
Adjustment:
1 Loosen the 2 M3X12 inner hexagon screws (driven wheel retaining screws) and 1
M5X20 inner hexagon screws (driven wheel tensioning screw) using the inner
hexagon screwdriver, as shown in the figure below.
2 Twin the synchronous belt driving the shuttle truck around the driving wheel.
3 Tighten the M5X20 inner hexagon screw (driven wheel tensioning screw), and
measure the tensile force of the shuttle truck synchronous belt using the tensiometer.
Make sure the measured value is between 35N and 45N.
4 Tighten the 2 M3X12 inner hexagon screws (driven wheel retaining screws) using
the inner hexagon screwdriver.
4-100
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-97 Adjusting the shuttle truck driving wheel assembly
Validation
film is normal.
4.4.24 Long Guide Rail of the Shuttle Truck

Tools
Procedure
Note: the location of the long guide rail of the shuttle truck is shown in the figure
below.
4-101
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-98 The location of the long guide rail of the shuttle truck
1Open the front cover, left cover, and right cover, and secure them using the
corresponding stop bars.
2Remove the slide shuttle truck assembly as instructed in Section 1.3.2.
3Remove the 6 M3X8 inner hexagon screws fixing the long guide rail of the shuttle
truck to the basal plate of the guide rail using the inner hexagon screwdriver, and
then take out the long guide rail from the right side of the instrument.
Figure4-99 Removing and replacing the long guide rail of the shuttle truck
4Mount the new long guide rail, and tighten the screws.
4-102
Subsystem Functions
5Mount the shuttle truck as instructed in Section 1.3.2.
Validation
film is normal.
4.4.25 Shuttle Truck Positioning Sensors
Tools
Procedure
Note: the locations of the shuttle truck positioning sensors are shown in the
figure below.
Figure4-100 The locations of shuttle truck positioning sensors
Taking the positioning sensor of the blood dispensing position as an example:

Removal:
1Open the front cover and right cover, and secure them using the corresponding
stop bars.
2Disconnect the wire coming out of the sensor from the connector.
3Remove the 1 M3X8 inner hexagon screws fixing the positioning sensor of the
blood dispensing position to the basal plate of the guide rail using the inner hexagon
screwdriver, and then take out the sensor.
4Mount the new sensor, and tighten the screws.
5Re-connect the wire coming out of the sensor to the connector.
4-103
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-101 Removing and replacing the positioning sensor of the blood dispensing
position
Adjustment:
1Go to the blood dispensing position adjusting screen shown in the figure below,
and place the 3204-J33 blood dispensing position adjusting fixture at the loading
position. Tap the "Motor Initialization" buttons of the "Shuttle Truck Motor",
"Dispensing Module Horizontal Movement" and "Dispensing Module Vertical
Movement" in turn.
Figure 4-102 Adjusting the positioning sensor of the blood dispensing position 1
4-104
Subsystem Functions
2Make the blood dispensing probe tip align with the dispensing position of the
fixture using the "Leftward" and "Rightward" buttons of the "Blood Dispensing Pos."
(as shown in the figure below). Tap the "Save" button of "Blood Dispensing Pos." to
save and exit.
Blood
dispensing
position aligns
with dispensing
probe tip
position
Figure4-103 Adjusting the positioning sensor of the blood dispensing position 2
Validation
After replacing the assembly, run a slide making cycle, and check whether the blood film is
normal.
4.5 Spreader Slide Cleaning Unit

The spreader slide used in the auto slide maker & stainer is a specialized component which is
durable, and do not need to be replaced. The spreader slide cleaning subsystem is designed
to clean, dry and maintain the spreader slide.
1) Cleaning the spreader slide
The spreader slide goes into the cleaning bath, where it is cleaned by ultrasonic vibration to
get rid of the contaminants on the surface.
2) Drying the spreader slide
After the cleaning is finished, the spreader slide is dried by air flow.
4-105
Subsystem Functions
3) Maintaining the spreader slide

Perform probe cleanser maintenance to the spreader slide periodically in the cleaning bath,
to prevent from accumulated contaminants on the slide surface.
4.5.2 Overview of Spreader Slide Cleaning Subsystem
Figure 4-104Spreader slide cleaning subsystem

No. Module Name FRU Code No. Module Name FRU Code
1 Cleaning bath / 7 Ultrasonic transducer /
2 Staking / 8 Volumetric tube /
connector
3 O seal ring / 9 M2X5 stainless steel /
screw
4 Waste tube / 10 Washer /
connector
5 Overflow tube / 11 Overflow bath /
connector
6 Spillage shield / 12 M3X8 stainless steel /
screw
4.5.3 Replacing the FRU of the Spreader Slide Cleaning Bath
Assembly
Material Name ID
Cleaning bath assembly 115-018089-00
Dismounting/Mounting the Cleaning Bath Assembly
Tools
4-106
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
Note:
When unplugging the inlet tube of the cleaning bath, there will be a diluent outflow of
about 50ul. Use tissues or a dry cloth to hold the diluent.
2.Remove the screws fixing the back plate of the main unit using the screwdriver,
and then dismount the back plate (the green plate in the figure below is the back
plate).
3.Remove the M4 cross-recessed screw (circled in red in the figure below) using the
cross-head screwdriver, and then open the plate highlighted in light blue in the figure
below.
4-107
Subsystem Functions
4.The location of the cleaning bath assembly is shown in the figure below.
M3 inner
M3
hexagon

screw
Cable

connector
Y
Y-shape
inlet
3-way
tube
Y
Y-shape
Overflow
Waste tube

3-way air flow tube
tube
Figure 4-105 Cleaning bath assembly
5.Disconnect the black connectors of the transducer cable and the ultrasound drive
board cable.
6.Unplug the waste tube and the overflow tube of the overflow bath from the
cleaning bath, and the inlet tube and air flow tube from the Y connector. Note: when
unplugging the inlet tube of the cleaning bath, there will be a diluent outflow of about
4-108
Subsystem Functions
50ul. Use tissues or a dry cloth to hold the diluent.

7.Loosen the 2 M3X6 inner hexagon screws fixing the staking of the cleaning bath
assembly using the inner hexagon spanner (do not remove the screws from the
staking). After both screws are loosened, dismount the cleaning bath from the
instrument through the hardy holes.
8.Mount the new cleaning bath assembly, tighten the inner hexagon screws, and
then plug the cable connectors and pneumatic/fluidic tubes.
9.Adjust the installation position and the spreader slide cleaning position of the
cleaning bath assembly according to F-3204-CTO-01 Instrument Adjusting Process,
and verifies that the ultrasonic transducer can work properly.
Validation
1Check if the screws are in-place and tightened;
2Check if all power cables and communication cables are properly connected,
and the power cord is fixed by the wire harness retainer.
3Check whether the positive and negative electrodes of the transducer are
properly connected (the pink wire should be connected to the transducer), and
whether the joint of the wire and transducer electrode is loose.

Transducer positive electrode

Pink line

White line

Transducer negative electrode
Figure4-106 Transducer assembly
4.6 Blood film drying unit

4.6.1 Staining Subsystem Introduction
Diagram of the staining subsystem
4-109
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-107 Staining subsystem

1 Staining tray assembly / 5 Position 4 blocking /
assembly
2 Position 1 blocking / 6 Staining cassette
/
assembly assembly
3 Position 2 blocking / 7 Position 1 slide
/
assembly detecting mechanism
4 Position 3 blocking 8 Stain pipette set
assembly assembly
Introduction to Subsystem Functions

The staining subsystem mainly works for the automatic staining of smeared slides. After an
unstained slide comes into the staining subsystem, it goes to each position in turn, and a
stained slide will be output from position 4.
The staining subsystem consists of 8 parts: the staining tray assembly which transports
smeared slides to each position; 4 blocking assemblies from position 1 to 4 which help make
the staining tray cleaned; stain pipette set assembly which adds stains and cleanser for the
4-110
Subsystem Functions
smeared slides at different positions; staining cassette assembly which accommodates the
smeared slides; position 1 slide detection mechanism which detect the moving status of the
staining cassette assembly.
4.6.2 Blood Film Drying Subsystem

Diagram of the Subsystem
Figure 4-108 Blood film drying subsystem

1 Pedestal / 3 Blood film spread /
detecting assembly
2 Drying cavity /
Introduction to Subsystem Functions

The blood film drying subsystem mainly works for the automatic drying of the blood film on
the slide. After a wet smear is sent to the drying cavity, it is dried in a drying cycle, and then a
dry smear will be sent out.
4-111
Subsystem Functions
The blood film drying subsystem consists of 3 components: pedestal (supporting the whole
assembly), drying cavity (accommodating the smeared slides), blood film spread detecting
assembly (detecting whether the blood film is fully spread).
4.6.4 Connecting Fitting of Outer Block (with Magnet)
Tools
Inner hexagon spanner (1suite), 3204 inner/outer blocking assembly position
setting fixture (3204-J09)
Procedure
Note: when locking the new assembly, make sure that the 4 blocking
assemblies are appressed to the surfaces of the fixture with no gap in
between or bending.
1 Remove the screw(s) fixing the assembly to be replaced. Replace the assembly
without locking the screw(s);
2 Set the position of the inner and outer blocking assemblies using the fixture, and
make sure that the assemblies are appressed to the surfaces of the fixture, as
shown in Figure 2-1;
3 Lock the retaining screw fixing the assembly;
4 Remove the fixture.
2 1
Figure4-109 Replacing the connecting fitting of the outer block (with magnet)

1 Connecting fitting / 2 M3X5 inner /
of outer block hexagon
(with magnet) screws
4-112
Subsystem Functions
Validation
1 Start the instrument. Check whether it is able to switch to the service blocking
position, and whether the staining cassette can pass through the service blocking
position;
2 Make sure that there is no collision when switching to the service blocking position.
4.6.5 Connecting Fitting of Inner Block (with Magnet)

Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
2 1
Figure4-110 Replacing the connecting fitting of the inner block (with magnet)

1 Connecting fitting / 2 M3X5 inner /
of outer block hexagon
(with magnet) screws
4-113
Subsystem Functions
Validation
position;
4.6.6 Connecting Fitting of the Outer Blocking Pin

Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
1 2
Figure4-111 Replacing the connecting fitting of the outer blocking pin

1 Connecting fitting 041-007790-00 2 M3X5 inner /
of outer blocking hexagon
pin (with magnet) screws
4-114
Subsystem Functions
Validation
position;
4.6.7 Connecting Fitting of the Inner Blocking Pin

Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
2 1
Figure4-112 Replacing the connecting fitting of the inner blocking pin

of inner blocking hexagon
4-115
Subsystem Functions
Validation
position;
4.6.8 Position 1 Outer Detection Assembly
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, metal tube. 1.6X0.52X150 ANSI316L (082-001052-00)
Procedure
Note:
2 Connect the transmitting end and the receiving end with the metal tube, and then
lock the fixing screws of the new assembly (as shown in Figure2-5;
3 After the screws are locked, the metal tube should be able to move forward and
backward smoothly between the mounting holes in the outer and inner detection
assemblies;
4 Remove the metal tube.
1
Figure4-113 Replacing the position 1 outer detection assembly

1 Position 1 outer 115-023262-00 2 M3X10 /
detection cross-recess
assembly ed panhead
screw with
washer
Validation
1) Make sure that the voltage of position 1 detection sensor does not exceed the
thresholds.
4-116
Subsystem Functions
4.6.9 Position 1 Inner Detection Assembly
Tools
Procedure
lock the fixing screws of the new assembly (as shown in Figure2-6;
assemblies;
Figure4-114 Replacing the position 1 inner detection assembly

1 Position 1 Inner 115-023263-00 2 M3X10 /
Detection cross-recess
Assembly ed panhead
screw with
washer
Validation
thresholds.
4.6.10 Stain Pipette Set Motor
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, inner hexagon spanner (1 suite), monkey spanner.
4-117
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
Note: after taking out the stain pipette set, place it aside carefully and properly.
Be careful not to warp the four pipettes.
1 Unplug the fluid tubes from each pipette at the 4 positions (for details, please refer to
the FRUs of the 4 pipettes);
2 Remove the stain pipette set upper sensor assembly (no need to unplug the cables)
and place it aside (as shown in Figure2-7);
3 Remove the M10 screws on the 2 leaders with a monkey spanner (as shown in
Figure 2-8);
4 Remove the 8 M4X10 inner hexagon screws on the two sliding bushes, and then
remove the locking caps from the screw rods (as shown in Figure2-9);
5 Take out and put aside the stain pipette set with the 4 pipettes on it. Be careful not to
warp the 4 pipettes;
6 Replace the stain pipette set motor, and fasten the 4 M5X12 inner hexagon screws
(as shown in Figure 2-10);
7 Place back the stain pipette set, fasten the two sliding bushes and then the locking
caps for the screw rods;
8 Fasten the 2 M10 screws on the 2 leaders, and fix the stain pipette upper sensor
assembly;
9 Re-connect the fluid tubes to the 4 pipettes

Stain pipette set upper sensor
Figure4-115 Stain pipette set upper sensor
Figure4-116 M10 screws
4-118
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-117 Screws fixing the sliding bushes and screw rod locking caps
Figure4-118 Replacing the stain pipette set motor

1 MOTOR step 024-000374-00 2 M5X12 inner /
linear 3.25V 1.8 hexagon
0.0508mm screws
132mm
Validation
1) Start up the instrument, and make sure the stain pipette set is able to move up
and down properly.
4.6.11 Staining Tray Motor
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, tensiometer
Procedure
Note: ensure that the tension of the synchronous belt is between20N and 40N.
4-119
Subsystem Functions
1 Remove the 4 M4X8cross-head screws fixing the motor pedestal (as shown in
Figure 2-11);
2 Remove the motor from the motor pedestal;
3 Fix the small pulley to the new motor with 2 M4X8 retaining screws, to make sure
that the distance from the pulley to the motor surface is 0.5mm. The retaining screw
should be placed at the slot in the motor shaft (as shown in Figure 2-12);
4 Lock the new motor to the motor pedestal, and then temporarily lock the motor
pedestal to the stain mother board;
5 5Straighten the synchronous belt, with the belt tension of 20-40N.
6 The parameters of the belt tension meter are set to: SPAN=183M=2.1; W=10.
2 1
Figure 4-119 Staining tray motor pedestal
Figure4-120 Small pulley

1 MOTOR STEP 801-BA38-00022-00 2 M4x8 /
3.6V 1.8 degree cross-recess
1.57Nm ed screws
Validation
1) Start up the instrument, and make sure that the staining tray is able to rotate
properly.
4-120
Subsystem Functions
4.6.12 Inner Blocking Assembly
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, 3204 ready-for-stain position setting fixture (3204-J10),
3204 inner/outer blocking assembly position setting fixture (3204-J09)
Procedure
1 Remove the stain pipette set (See stain pipette set motor FRU for details);
2 Remove the 2 M3X12cross-recessed panhead screws fixing the inner blocking
assembly, and replace it with a new one. Install the synchronous belt and lock the
assembly tightly (as shown in Figure 2-13);
3 Loosen the screws fixing the 4 connecting fittings of the blocking assemblies, and
run the serviced blocking mechanism to its start position;
4 Place the 3204 ready-for-stain position setting fixture between the inner blocking pin
and outer blocking pin, and then lock the connecting fitting of the inner blocking pin;
5 Adjust the positions of the 4 connecting fittings using the inner/outer blocking
assembly position setting fixture. Make sure the inner and outer blocking assemblies
are all appressed to the surfaces of the fixture, and then fix the connecting fittings of
the other three assemblies.
2
Figure 4-121 Inner blocking assembly
Figure 4-122 Determining the position of the inner blocking pin

1 Inner blocking 115-018125-00 2 M3X12 /
assemblies cross-recess
ed panhead
4-121
Subsystem Functions
screws
Validation
position;
4.6.13 Blocking Synchronous Belt

Tools
Procedure
2 Remove the connecting fittings of the 4 inner/outer blocking assemblies (as shown
in Figure 2-15);
3 Remove the 2 M3X12 cross-recessed panhead screws fixing the inner blocking
assemblies, mount the new synchronous belt and lock the assemblies. See the inner
blocking assembly FRU for details;
4 Pre-tighten the screws fixing the connecting fittings of the 4 blocking assemblies to
the synchronous belt, and run the serviced blocking mechanism to its start position;
the other three assemblies. See inner blocking assembly FRU for details of Step 3, 4,
and 5.
4-122
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-123 Blocking synchronous belt

1 Synchronous 031-000265-00
flat-toothed
belt.165MXL019
rubber
Validation
position;
4.6.14 Outer Blocking Assembly 1
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, inner hexagon (1 suite), 3204 ready-for-stain position
setting fixture (3204-J10), 3204 stain position 1 and position 4 alignment fixture
(3202-J08), 3204 inner/outer blocking assembly position setting fixture (3204-J09),
permanent magnet (3101-10-69302), staining cassette fixture
Procedure
Note: 1. the inner and outer blocks with magnet must stay appressed to the
fixture; 2. The tensile force of the synchronous belt is ensured by the 3204
staining subsystem synchronous belt span fixture, so use this fixture to
determine the distance between the inner and outer blocking assemblies;
1 Remove the staining unit (see staining unit FRU for details);
4-123
Subsystem Functions
2 Remove the outer blocking assembly 1 and install a new one. Pre-tighten the 3
retaining screws of the assembly (as shown in Figure 2-16);
3 Remove the connecting fittings of the inner and outer blocking pins (do not dismount
those of the inner and outer blocks), as shown in Figure 2-15;
5 Place the 3204 stain position 1 and position 4 alignment fixture on the staining tray,
and place the 3204 ready-for-stain position setting fixture between the inner blocking
pin and the inner blocking assembly (as shown in Figure 2-17);
6 Move the outer blocking assembly 1, to ensure the inner and outer blocks is
appressed to the 3204 stain position 1 and position 4 alignment fixture, and then
lock the outer blocking assembly 1.
7 Move the service blocking mechanism to its start position;
and outer blocking pin, and then lock the connecting fitting of the inner blocking pin
(See the FRU of the inner blocking assembly for details);
9 Mount the connecting fittings of the inner and outer blocking pin. Adjust the positions
of the 4 connecting fittings using the inner/outer blocking assembly position setting
fixture. Make sure the inner and outer blocking assemblies are all appressed to the
surfaces of the fixture, and then fix the connecting fittings of two connecting fittings
(of the inner and outer blocking pins) in turn.
10Place the 3202 staining tray fixture on the tray, making the fixture sink into the gap
between the two ends of the sensor. Adjust the position of the sensor, leaving some
space between each end and the fixture (as shown in Figure 2-18);
11Tighten the 2 screws of the outer blocking assembly to fix the sensor (as shown in
Figure 2-19);
12Mount the stain pipette set (See stain pipette set motor FRU for details);
13Install the staining unit (see staining unit FRU for details);
Figure4-124 Outer Blocking assembly 1
4-124
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-125 Adjusting the position of the outer blocking assembly 1
Figure4-126 Adjusting the sensor position
Figure4-127 Locking the sensor
4-125
Subsystem Functions

1 Outer blocking 115-018126-00 2 M4X12 /
assembly 1 cross-recess
ed panhead
screws
Validation
position;
4.6.15 Outer blocking assembly 2
Tools
Procedure
pin and the inner blocking assembly;
4-126
Subsystem Functions
Figure 2-19);
13Install the staining unit (see staining unit FRU for details);

ed panhead
screws
Validation
4-127
Subsystem Functions
position;
4.6.16 Blood Film Detection Assembly
Tools
Inner hexagon spanner (1suite)
Procedure
1 Unplug the connecting wire(s) of the target assembly;
2 Remove the screw(s) fixing the assembly. Install the new one, and fix it (as shown in
Figure 2-22).
1 2
Figure 4-130 Blood film detection assembly

1 Blood Film 115-022774-00 2 M3X10 inner /
Detection hexagon
Assembly screws
Validation
1 Move the manipulator manually, and it should be able to pass through the blood film
detection assembly smoothly.
4.7 Vertical Transportation Unit

4.7.1 Functions
In the SM&S, the slide vertical transportation subsystem functions to transport the slide in
vertical state to different positions, and support the film spread film spread detection. The
slide vertical transportation unit is referred to as the manipulator hereinafter.
4-128
Subsystem Functions
4.7.2 Structure
Figure 4-131 Structure of the slide vertical transportation subsystem

1 Horizontal driving 115-020866-0 6 Stainless steel inner
assembly 0 hexagon socket cap
/
screw GB/T70.1-2000
M3X6 passivated
2 Vertical moving assembly 115-018137-0 7 S-Manipulator finger 049-000585-00
0
3 Cross-recessed sunk / 8 R-Manipulator finger 049-000586-00
screw GB/T819.1-2000
M3X8
4 Flat washer - Grade A / 9 Cross-recessed /
GB/T97.1-2002 3 panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M2X6
5 Standard spring washer / 10 Cylinder. Pincher, 082-001867-00
GB/T93-1987 3 double-acting
MHZ2-6D2
The working positions of the instrument are lined up linearly from the front to the back, so
horizontal movement and vertical movement could be adequate for the slide vertical
transportation subsystem to finish its work. To grab and release the slide which is in vertical
state, a mechanical paw is needed. Therefore, the slide vertical transportation subsystem
consists of the three assemblies below:
1Horizontal driving assembly: enables the manipulator to move horizontally to different
positions;
4-129
Subsystem Functions
2Vertical moving assembly: enables the manipulator to move vertically, and works with
the mechanical paw to insert a slide into the working position or take it out;
3Mechanical paw assembly (consists of the cylinder and the mechanical fingers):
enables the manipulator to grab or release a slide.
In a SM&S, the working positions are lined up linearly (as shown in Figure 4-44).
Pos.1
Stain
Pos. 2
Slide Levering Pos.
Collection
Blood film spread
detecting
Drying Pos.1
Drying Pos.2
Figure4-132 Working positions of a SM&S
There are 6 working positions in all: drying position 2, drying position 1, slide output position,
slide levering position, stain position 4 and stain position 1. Blood film spread detection is
performed in the process of manipulator horizontal movement, and do not need the slide to
stay, so it is not defined as a working position. Since the 6 working positions of the instrument
are lined up linearly, technically the manipulator can reach all the positions just by moving in 2
dimensions (horizontally and vertically).
4-130
Subsystem Functions
4.7.3 Horizontal Driving Assembly
Figure 4-133 Structure of the horizontal driving assembly of the slide vertical transportation
subsystem
1 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor 011-000021 11 Motor Step 024-000524-
IP55 940nm 15cm -00 0.25reduction ratio 7.2 00
2 Sensor bracket 1 / 12 High torque 049-000585-
synchronous pulley. 00
HTPA20S3M100-A-P6
3 Welded piece of the beam / 13 Bearing pedestal
4 Linear guide rail set. 032-00024 14 Horizontal moving /
MGW12H1R670Z1CM 5-00 pulley pedestal
5 Belt clamp 15 Toothed belt. S3M 009-003966-
tooth shape, 434 teeth 00
width: 10mm,
polyurethane
6 Belt press plate 1 16 Cross-recessed sunk
M3X8 with
color-zinc coating
7 Stainless steel inner hexagon 17 Sensor shielding bar 1
socket cap screw
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8
passivated
8 Belt supporting board 18 Cable arranging plate 1
9 High torque synchronous 19 Adjusting block of the
4-131
Subsystem Functions
pulley. HTPA20S3M100-A-P6 beam

10 Motor pedestal
4.7.4 Vertical Moving Assembly
Figure4-134 Structure of the vertical moving assembly of the slide vertical transportation
subsystem

1 Cable arranging plate 2 18 Sensor shielding bar
/ /
2
2 PHOTOELEC Optical 19 Tow chain. Model /
Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm 0130 inside groove
011-000021-00 width 10mm 16
segments with 2 fixing
pedestals
3 Connecting block of the / 20 Towline connecting /
pincher (with printing) block 1
4 Sensor baffle plate 2 / 21 Valve supporting plate /
(with printing)
5 PHOTOELEC Optical 22 Gas valve. /
Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm Electromagnetic valve
011-000021-00 0104E1-21-PLL-DC1
2V (connectors and
cables excluded)
6 Sensor bracket 2 / 23 Electromagnetic /
valve, 2-way, N.C.,
DC12V 0.7MPa
terminal wire length:
4-132
Subsystem Functions
1m
7 Linear guide rail set. 032-000212-00 24 Stainless steel /
MGN9H1R215Z1CM cross-recessed
panhead screw
M2X20 passivated
8 Tightening block / 25 Sensor baffle plate /
9 Stainless steel inner / 26 PHOTOELEC Optical
hexagon socket cap screw Sensor IP55 940nm
011-000021-00
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8 15cm
passivated
10 Flat washer - Grade A / 27 MOTOR STEP 3.7V 024-000149-00
GB/T97.1-2002 3 with 1.8 Degree 3.2kgfcm
environment-friendly Single Shaft
color-zinc coating
11 Synchronous flat-toothed 031-000234-00 28 Vertical moving motor /
belt.210MXL025 pedestal
polyurethane
12 Vertical plate assembly / 29 Synchronous belt. BA30-10-06611
(with printing) B63MXL6.4
13 Driven belt shaft / 30 PHOTOELEC Optical
Sensor IP55 940nm 011-000021-00
15cm
14 Synchronous pulley. 16 M6C-010002--- 31 Synchronous pulley. /
teeth MXL width 6.4 P32MXL6.4BF
double-baffle (customized
copper)
15 Split baffle ring / 32 Synchronous belt, /
GB/T896-1986 4 coated 16teeth, MXL6.4DF
with anti-rust nickel
16 Tray / 33 High-speed long-life A90-000055---
grease
MI-SETRAL-LI/PD1
5KG/EA (barrel)
17 Stainless steel inner / 34
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8
passivated
4-133
Subsystem Functions
4.7.5 Manipulator Assembly
Figure 4-135 Structure of the manipulator of the slide vertical transportation subsystem

1 Flat washer - Grade A 6 Rotating block
/ /
GB/T97.1-2002 3
2 Standard spring washer / 7 R-Manipulator finger 049-000586-00
GB/T93-1987 3
3 Stainless steel inner / 8 S-Manipulator finger 049-000585-00
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X6
passivated
4 Connecting block of the / 9 Cross-recessed /
pincher (with printing) panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M2X6
5 Cross-recessed sunk 10 Cylinder. Pincher, 082-001867-00
screw GB/T819.1-2000 double-acting
M3X8 MHZ2-6D2
4-134
Subsystem Functions
4.7.6 Hardware Introduction
4.7.7 Sensor Location
Figure 4-136 Sensor locations of the slide vertical transportation subsystem

No. Name No. Name
1 Vertical movement start position 3 Horizontal movement start position
sensor sensor
2 Horizontal movement 4 Vertical movement positioning sensor
positioning sensor
List of sensors and their functions is shown below.

Table 3 List of sensors in slide vertical transportation subsystem and their functions
Sensor Function
Sensors Wire Label Printing
Slide vertical Type
transportation Horizontal movement SEN_VER_HP Position fixing in
subsystem positioning sensor SE1 Digital the horizontal
movement
4-135
Subsystem Functions
process.
Horizontal movement SEN_VER_HR Used in the
start position sensor initialization of the
SE37 Digital
horizontal
movement.
Vertical movement SEN_VER_VP Position fixing in
positioning sensor the vertical
SE38 Digital
movement
process.
Vertical movement SEN_VER_VR Used in the
start position sensor SE2 Digital initialization of the
vertical movement.
Manipulator magnetic SEN_VER_SSW1 SE39 Digital Detect whether the
switch 1 state of the
manipulator paw is
open or close.
4.7.8 Work Flow and Verification

The SM&S provides three modes:
1Smear+Stain
2Smear
3Stain
In the three modes, the manipulator interacts with other working positions in fixed time points
by executing the grabbing or inserting action at the corresponding position, as shown in
Figure 4-48;
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Slide Output
Blood film
Levering
Staining
Staining
Pos.1/2
Pos.1/2
spread
Drying
Drying
Pos.1
Pos.4
Slide
Pos.
Pos.
Smear+Stain
G2 Blood film F
G2 down J spread Up Blood film spread-R1 R1 down S R1 up R1R4 R4 down J R4 up R4S S down S S up SF F down J FG2 G2 down S G2 up G2G1 Waiting
up detection up
Figure 4-137 Time points when the manipulator interacts with different working positions
Among the three modes, the actions in "Smear+Stain" covers all the actions in the other two
modes. Therefore, the design of the manipulator work flow focuses on the whole process of
smear and stain. When the instrument works in either of the other two modes, the system just
pick up the actions corresponding to that mode. In this way, the manipulator interacts with
involved positions at the specified time points, and wait at the other time points.
4.7.9 Smear+Stain Mode

There are two drying position in the SM&S. In each cycle of the slide vertical transportation
subsystem movement, it only interacts with one drying position. The cycle when the
4-136
Subsystem Functions
subsystem interacts with drying position 2 is defined as cycle 1, and that with drying position
1 is defined as cycle 2. When samples are fed continuously, the cycle 1 and 2 are performed
alternately. When the samples are not fed continuously, you can select to use only one drying
position or use the two alternately (eliminate the switching between the two position if you
choose to use only one drying position). The work flows of cycle 1 and two are defined as
follows:
Cycle 1:
1) Grabbing slide from drying position 2>blood film spread detection>inserting slide
at position 2
2) Grabbing slide from position 4>inserting slide at drying position 2
3) Grabbing slide at levering position>inserting slide at drying position 2
Note: the horizontal among different positions are omitted here.
Cycle 2:
1) Grabbing slide at drying position 1>blood film spread detection>inserting slide at
position 2
2) Grabbing slide at position 4>inserting slide at drying position 2
3) Grabbing slide at levering position>inserting slide at drying position 1
4.7.10 Smear Mode
Work flow of the Smear mode:

1) Grabbing slide at levering position>inserting slide at slide output position
4.7.11 Stain Mode
Work flow of the Stain mode

1) Grabbing slide from drying position 2>inserting slide at position 2
2) Grabbing slide at position 4>inserting slide at drying position 2
4-137
Subsystem Functions
4.7.12 Horizontal Movement Verification
Manipulator Horizontal Movement

Detection
Start Enter condition

manipulator performs
horizontal movement
Are horizontal
positioning sensors YES
blocked?
NO
Start horizontal movement,

and count the notches.
Are horizontal
positioning sensors
blocked? YES Report horizontal
movement abnormal
NO
End
Figure4-138 Manipulator horizontal movement verification work flow
1Check whether the horizontal positioning sensor is not blocked before and
after the manipulator horizontal movement.
2When the manipulator moves from any horizontal position to position 1,
you need to confirm the position of the stain pipette set according to the table
below.
Table 4 Stain pipette set upper position and lower position sensor status of the staining
subsystem
Sensor Status
Stain pipette set upper position sensor Not blocked
Stain pipette set lower position sensor Blocked
Only when the status of both sensors conforms to the table above, the manipulator can
perform horizontal movement.
4-138
Subsystem Functions
4.7.13 Vertical Movement Verification
Manipulator Vertical Movement Detection Process
Start Enter condition:

manipulator performs
vertical movement
Does manipulator
NO
move downwards?
YES
Are vertical
initialization sensors Manipulator
blocked? move up to
original position
NO
YES
Is it insert and
Are vertical
move down (the other
NO positioning sensors
case is grab and move blocked?
down)
NO
YES
Perform vertical
Perform vertical
downwards movement
downwards movement
and count notches
Is notch count Is notch count

correct? NO correct? NO
YES YES
Are vertical Are vertical

positioning sensors NO positioning sensors NO
blocked? blocked?
Record the target Record the target

vertical position, and vertical position, and YES
NO report inserting vertical report non-inserting
movement abnormal vertical movement
abnormal
NO
End
Figure4-139 Manipulator vertical movement verification work flow
4-139
Subsystem Functions
Perform manipulator vertical movement verification, and vertical movement abnormal can be
inserting abnormal or non-inserting abnormal The verification of the vertical positioning
sensor of the downward movement means to verify after the vertical positioning sensor
triggers the compensation stepping.
Note: after fixing the stain position 1 and slide output position, the manipulator will move
down to make the slide get out, and the sensor verification should be done before this
movement.
4.7.14 Verifying the Gripper Status

The manipulator grabs and releases the slides through closing and opening the cylinder. The
closed and open status of the cylinder can be detected using the magnetic switch. Each time
the manipulator execute the close or open action (400mS after the valve command is sent),
you need to check the magnetic switch to make sure that the cylinder is in correct status. See
Figure 4-51 for magnetic switch installation.
Figure4-140 Installing the magnetic switch of the manipulator
The magnetic switch status is shown in the figure below:
Table 5 Manipulator magnetic switch status
Manipulator pincher Status of the magnetic Magnetic switch

status switch indicator
Open Not blocked On
Close Blocked Off
The verification work flow is shown as follows:
4-140
Subsystem Functions
Pincher Close/Open Status Detection

Process
Enter condition:
Start pincher performs
open/close
command
Does
manipulator
perform the NO
Open
command?
YES
Pincher opens Pincher closes
Is magnetic switch Is magnetic switch

YES blocked? NO
blocked?
Report pincher Report pincher

open open
NO YES
abnormal abnormal
End
Figure4-141 Verifying the magnetic switch status of the manipulator
Check the open/closed status of the manipulator according to the work flow shown above.
4.7.15 Replacing the Assembly
4.7.16 Adjusting the Tensile Force of the Horizontal Belt
Tools
Procedure
1Open the front cover;
2Loosen the 2 M4 inner hexagon screws marked as No. 2 in the figure;
3Loosen the M3 inner hexagon screw marked as No. 3 in the figure;
4When re-tighten the belt, make sure that the belt is fully stretched;
4-141
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-142 Adjusting the tensile force of the horizontal belt

1 Toothed belt. S3M tooth 3 Stainless steel inner
shape, 434 teeth width: 031-000251- hexagon socket cap
/
10mm, polyurethane 00 screw GB/T70.1-2000
M3X12 passivated
2 Stainless steel inner /
GB/T70.1-2000 M4X16
passivated
4.7.17 Removing and Installing the Manipulator Horizontal

Synchronous Belt
Tools
Procedure
1Loosen the synchronous belt according to the procedure in 4.7.16 ;
2Move the vertical moving assembly to the front of the instrument;
3Loosen the 2 M3 inner hexagon screws (No. 2 in the figure) in the belt press
plate (No. 2), and then remove the synchronous belt (No. 1) from the plate; then
take out the belt from the welded piece of the beam;
4-142
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-143 Removing and installing the manipulator horizontal synchronous belt

shape, 434 teeth width: hexagon socket cap
10mm, polyurethane 031-000251- screw GB/T70.1-2000
/
00 M3X8 passivated
(retaining screw of the
belt press plate)
2 Belt press plate /
4When mount back the synchronous belt (No. 1), make the belt run through the
welded piece of the beam (No. 5), and twine it around the two synchronous pulleys;
Note: the two ends of the synchronous belt are fixed by the belt clamp and the press
plate respectively, with 3 teeth seized up;
5after the synchronous belt is fixed, stretch it as instructed by 4.7.16 ;
4-143
Subsystem Functions

shape, 434 teeth width: hexagon socket cap
10mm, polyurethane 031-000251- screw GB/T70.1-2000
/
00 M3X8 passivated
(retaining screw of the
belt press plate)
2 Belt clamp / 5 Welded piece of the
beam
3 Belt press plate
4.7.18 Validation
1Check whether there are 3 teeth seized up at the two ends of the synchronous belt,
and the edges of the belt are aligned with those of the belt clamp;
2Check whether the synchronous belt is fully stretched;
3Push the vertical moving assembly, to see whether the horizontal movement is
smooth.
4-144
Subsystem Functions
4.7.19 Removing and Installing the Manipulator Horizontal
Movement Motor
Tools
Procedure
1Remove the back plate from the back of the instrument;
2Unplug the motor cable connector (No. 1);
3Remove the 4 M3cross-recessed screws (No. 2), and then take them out with the
motor pedestal;
4Loosen the 2 M4x3 fastening screws (No. 4) of the synchronous belt, and
remove it from the motor shaft. Note: keep the fastening screws properly;
5Loosen the 3 M3 inner hexagon screws (No. 3), and take out the motor;
6Install the new motor following the steps above in the reversed order. Note: the
space between the synchronous pulley and the motor pedestal is 1mm, and one of
the fastening screws should be trained on the flat position of the motor shaft; apply
thread locker on to the fastening screws and fix them;

1 Motor Step 0.25reduction 4 High torque
ratio 7.2 024-000524- synchronous pulley.
/
00 HTPA20S3M100-A-P
6
2 Stainless steel inner / 5 Motor pedestal /
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8
passivated
4-145
Subsystem Functions
3 Stainless steel inner / 6 Welded piece of the /

hexagon socket cap screw beam
GB/T70.1-2000 M4X8
passivated
4.7.20 Removing and Installing the Vertical Moving Assembly

Tools
Procedure
1Remove the left door;
2Remove the sensor shielding bar 1 (No. 1);
3Remove the 6 screws (No. 2). Note: there are 2 screws under the towline. You
need to move the towline slightly to remove the screws.

1 Sensor shielding bar 2 3 Vertical Moving
/ 115-018137-00
Assembly
2 Cross-recessed sunk /
M3X8 with
color-zinc coating
4-146
Subsystem Functions
4.7.21 Removing and Installing the Long Belt of the Vertical
Moving Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1Open the front cover, and remove the left door;
2Loosen the 2 M3 inner hexagon screws (No. 3);
3Adjust the M3 inner hexagon screw (No. 1), and raise up the tightening block (No.
4) to loosen the belt;
4Remove the screw (No. 5) to take out the belt clamp; and then take out the belt;
5When install the belt, be sure to adjust the screw (No. 1) and stretch the
synchronous bet before fixing with the belt clamp;

1 Stainless steel inner 4 Tightening block
/
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8
passivated
2 Synchronous flat-toothed 031-000234 5 Stainless steel inner
belt.210MXL025 -00 hexagon socket cap
4-147
Subsystem Functions
polyurethane screw GB/T70.1-2000

M3X6 passivated
3 Stainless steel inner 6 Belt clamp
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X8
passivated
Validation
1Check whether the belt is fully stretched;
2Check whether the belt is fully clamped by the belt clamp, not partly.
4.7.22 Removing and Installing the Motor of the Vertical
Moving Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1Open the front cover and the right door;
2Remove the 4 M3 inner hexagon screw (No. 1);
3Remove the motor (No. 6) together with the vertical moving motor pedestal (No.
5) from the back of the vertical board (No. 1);
4Before installing the new motor, dismount the synchronous pulley (No. 4) and
mount it on to the new motor. Note: the surface of the pulley should be aligned with
that of the motor; one of the fastening screws is placed against the flat position;
secure the screw by apply thread locker again;3mm
tension;
4-148
Subsystem Functions

1 Stainless steel inner 4 Synchronous pulley
/
GB/T70.1-2000 M3X6
passivated
2 Vertical board 5 Vertical moving motor
pedestal
3 Synchronous belt. BA30-10-06 6 MOTOR STEP 3.7V 024-000149-00
B63MXL6.4 611 1.8 Degree 3.2kgfcm
Single Shaft
Validation
1Check whether the belt is fully stretched;
4.7.23 Removing and Installing the Short Belt of the Vertical
Moving Assembly
Similar to that of replacing the motor of the vertical moving assembly in 4.7.22 .
Procedure
1Remove the 4 M3 inner hexagon screw (No. 1);
4-149
Subsystem Functions
2Remove the motor (No. 6) together with the vertical moving motor pedestal (No.
5) from the back of the vertical board (No. 1);
3Take out the synchronous belt (No. 3);
4While installing the new synchronous belt, stretch the belt (No. 3) to retain proper
tension.
Validation
Check whether the belt is fully stretched;
4.7.24 Removing and Installing the Vertical Movement Start
Position Sensor
Tools
Procedure
1Open the top cover;
3Remove the M4 screw (No. 3);
4Remove the sensor from the vertical board (No. 2);
5Install the new sensor following the steps above in the reversed order.

1 PHOTOELEC Optical 011-000021- 4 Stainless steel
4-150
Subsystem Functions
Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm 00 cross-recessed

panhead screw
GB/T818-2000 M3X5
passivated
2 Cross-recessed panhead 5
screw GB/T818-2000
M4X10 with Sensor bracket 1
color-zinc coating
3 Vertical board 6 PHOTOELEC Optical
Sensor IP55 940nm 011-000021-00
15cm
Validation
1Start up the instrument, and check whether the manipulator vertical movement is
initialized successfully.
4.7.25 Removing and Installing the Horizontal Movement
Positioning Sensor
Tools
Procedure
1Open the top cover;

3See the figure in 4.7.24 . Remove the 2 M3 cross-recessed screws (No. 4), and
then remove the sensor (No. 6) together with its bracket (No. 5);
4Dismount the sensor from the bracket;
Validation
TBD.
4.7.26 Removing and Installing the Horizontal Movement Start
Position Sensor
Tools
4-151
Subsystem Functions
Procedure

3Remove the 2 M3 cross-recessed screws (No. 3), and then remove the sensor
(No. 1) together with its bracket (No. 2);
4Dismount the sensor from the bracket;

1 4 PHOTOELEC Optical
PHOTOELEC Optical 011-000021-
Sensor IP55 940nm 011-000021-00
Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm 00
15cm
2 Sensor bracket 5 Cross-recessed 2000 M4X10
panhead screw with
GB/T818 environment-frie
ndly color-zinc
coating
3 Cross-recessed small
panhead screw
combination GB/T9074.8
M3X8 with
color-zinc coating
4-152
Subsystem Functions
Validation
1Start up the instrument, and check whether the manipulator vertical movement is
initialized successfully.
4.7.27 Removing and Installing the Vertical Movement
Positioning Sensor
Tools
Procedure
3Remove the M4 screw (No. 5);
Validation
TBD.
4.7.28 Adjustment and Validation
4.7.29 Adjusting and Validating the Horizontal Position
Step 1: place the adjusting/aligning fixture at the position to be adjusted;
4-153
Subsystem Functions
Step 2: tap "Service">"Position Adjust">"13 Manipulator Assembly";
4-154
Subsystem Functions
Step 3: tap the "Motor Initialization" button of the "Manipulator Horizontal Movement Motor";
Step 4: find the position to be adjusted according to the figure below.
Pos.1
Stain
Pos.4
Levering Pos
Positive Slide Reclaiming
direction Blood film spread

detection
Dry Pos.1
Dry Pos.2
4-155
Subsystem Functions
Step 5: enter the position to be adjusted from the previous position along the forward
direction. Tap "Forward"/"Backward" to adjust the compensation steps of the position in
the forward direction until the two exterior surfaces of the manipulator align with those of
the two interior surfaces, as shown in Figure xxx. Tap "Save". (If it is the"Levering Pos."
to be adjusted, the previous position along the forward direction is the "Slide Reclaiming
Pos.". Omit this step if it is the "Drying Pos.2" to be adjusted.)
2 outer surfaces of
the manipulator
2 inner surfaces
of the fixture
Figure4-144 Alignment in manipulator horizontal position adjusting
Step 6: enter the position to be adjusted from the next position along the forward
direction. Adjust the compensation steps of the position in the backward direction. Tap
"Forward"/"Backward" to adjust the compensation steps of the position in the forward
position until the two exterior surfaces of the manipulator align with those of the two
interior surfaces, as shown in Figure xxx. Tap "Save". (If it is the"Levering Pos." to be
adjusted, the next position along the forward direction is the "Staining Pos.4". Omit this
step if it is the "Staining Pos.1" to be adjusted.)
4.7.30 Adjusting and Validating the Vertical Position
Step 1: place the adjusting/aligning fixture at the position to be adjusted;
4-156
Subsystem Functions
Step 2: tap "Service">"Position Adjust">"13 Manipulator Assembly";
4-157
Subsystem Functions
Step 3: tap the "Motor Initialization" button of the "Manipulator Horizontal Movement
Motor"; Tap the position to be adjusted in the "Manipulator Horizontal Movement Motor"
area, to make the manipulator moves horizontally to this position.
Step 4: tap "To Vertical Adjusting Pos.", and then tap the "Motor Initialization" button of
the "Manipulator Vertical Movement Motor Adjusting Pos.".
4-158
Subsystem Functions
Step 5: tap "S Vertical Pos.", and then "Downward"/"Upward" to adjust the vertical
position of the manipulator, until the bottom of the manipulator aligns with that of the
fixture, as shown in Figure 4-145. Tap "Save".
Bottom of the
manipulator
Surface of the
fixture
Figure4-145 Alignment in manipulator vertical position adjusting
4.7.31 Adjusting and Validating the Slide Gripping of the Manipulator
TBD.
4.7.32 Manual Maintenance

TBD.
4-159
Subsystem Functions
4.7.33 Troubleshooting
TBD.
4.8 Staining unit

4.8.1 Staining subsystem
Figure 4-146 Staining subsystem

1 Staining tray assembly / 5 Position 4 blocking /
assembly
2 Position 1 blocking / 6 Staining cassette
/
assembly assembly
3 Position 2 blocking / 7 Position 1 slide
/
assembly detecting mechanism
4 Position 3 blocking 8 Stain pipette set
assembly assembly
4-160
Subsystem Functions

The staining subsystem mainly works for the automatic staining of smeared slides. After an
unstained slide comes into the staining subsystem, it goes to each position in turn, and a
stained slide will be output from position 4.
The staining subsystem consists of 8 parts: the staining tray assembly which transports
smeared slides to each position; 4 blocking assemblies from position 1 to 4 which help make
the staining tray cleaned; stain pipette set assembly which adds stains and cleanser for the
smeared slides at different positions; staining cassette assembly which accommodates the
smeared slides; position 1 slide detection mechanism which detect the moving status of the
staining cassette assembly.
4.8.3 Blood Film Drying Subsystem
Figure 4-147 Blood film drying subsystem
4-161
Subsystem Functions

1 Pedestal / 3 Blood film spread /
detecting assembly
2 Drying cavity /

The blood film drying subsystem mainly works for the automatic drying of the blood film on
the slide. After a wet smear is sent to the drying cavity, it is dried in a drying cycle, and then a
dry smear will be sent out.
The blood film drying subsystem consists of 3 components: pedestal (supporting the whole
assembly), drying cavity (accommodating the smeared slides), blood film spread detecting
assembly (detecting whether the blood film is fully spread).
4.8.6 Connecting Fitting of Outer Block (with Magnet)
Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
4-162
Subsystem Functions
2 1
Figure 4-148 Replacing the connecting fitting of the outer block (with magnet)

1 Connecting / 2 M3X5 inner /
Fitting of Outer hexagon
Block (with screws
Magnet)
Validation
position;
4.8.7 Connecting Fitting of Inner Block (with Magnet)
Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
4-163
Subsystem Functions
2 1
Figure4-149 Replacing the connecting fitting of the inner block (with magnet)

1 Connecting / 2 M3X5 inner /
Fitting of Outer hexagon
Block (with screws
Magnet)
Validation
1) Start the instrument. Check whether it is able to switch to the service blocking position, and
whether the staining cassette can pass through the service blocking position;
2) Make sure that there is no collision when switching to the blocking position.
4.8.8 Connecting Fitting of the Outer Blocking Pin
Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
4-164
Subsystem Functions
1 2
Figure4-150 Replacing the connecting fitting of the outer blocking pin

of outer blocking hexagon
Validation
position;
4.8.9 Connecting Fitting of the Inner Blocking Pin
Tools
Procedure
between or bending.
4-165
Subsystem Functions
2 1
Figure4-151 Replacing the connecting fitting of the inner blocking pin

of inner blocking hexagon
Validation
position;
4.8.10 Position 1 outer detection assembly
Tools
Procedure
Note:
lock the fixing screws of the new assembly (as shown in Figure2-5);
assemblies;
4-166
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-152 Replacing the position 1 outer detection assembly

1 Position 1 outer 115-023262-00 2 M3X10 /
detection cross-recess
assembly ed panhead
screw with
washer
Validation
thresholds.
4.8.11 Position 1 Inner Detection Assembly
Tools
Procedure
lock the fixing screws of the new assembly (as shown in Figure2-6);
assemblies;
4-167
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-153 Replacing the position 1 inner detection assembly

1 Position 1 Inner 115-023263-00 2 M3X10 /
Detection cross-recess
Assembly ed panhead
screw with
washer
Validation
thresholds.
4.8.12 Stain Pipette Set Motor
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, inner hexagon spanner (1 suite), monkey spanner.
Procedure
Note: after taking out the stain pipette set, place it aside carefully and properly.
Be careful not to warp the four pipettes.
1 Unplug the fluid tubes from each pipette at the 4 positions (for details, please refer to
the FRUs of the 4 pipettes);
2 Remove the stain pipette set upper sensor assembly (no need to unplug the cables)
and place it aside (as shown in Figure2-7);
3 Remove the M10 screws on the 2 leaders with a monkey spanner (as shown in
Figure 2-8);
4 Remove the 8 M4X10 inner hexagon screws on the two sliding bushes, and then
remove the locking caps from the screw rods (as shown in Figure2-9);
5 Take out and put aside the stain pipette set with the 4 pipettes on it. Be careful not to
warp the 4 pipettes;
6 Replace the stain pipette set motor, and fasten the 4 M5X12 inner hexagon screws
(as shown in Figure 2-10);
4-168
Subsystem Functions
7 Place back the stain pipette set, fasten the two sliding bushes and then the locking
caps for the screw rods;
8 Fasten the 2 M10 screws on the 2 leaders, and fix the stain pipette upper sensor
assembly;
9 Re-connect the fluid tubes to the 4 pipettes

Stain pipette set upper sensor
Figure4-154 Stain pipette set upper sensor
Figure4-155 M10 screws
Figure4-156 Screws fixing the sliding bushes and screw rod locking caps
4-169
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-157 Replacing the stain pipette set motor

1 MOTOR step 024-000374-00 2 M5X12 inner /
linear 3.25V 1.8 hexagon
0.0508mm screws
132mm
Validation
1) Start up the instrument, and make sure the stain pipette set is able to move up
and down properly.
4.8.13 Staining Tray Motor
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, tensiometer
Procedure
Note: ensure that the tension of the synchronous belt is between20N and 40N.
1 Remove the 4 M4X8cross-head screws fixing the motor pedestal (as shown in
Figure 2-11);
2 Remove the motor from the motor pedestal;
3 Fix the small pulley to the new motor with 2 M4X8 retaining screws, to make sure
that the distance from the pulley to the motor surface is 0.5mm. The retaining screw
should be placed at the slot in the motor shaft (as shown in Figure 2-12);
4 Lock the new motor to the motor pedestal, and then temporarily lock the motor
pedestal to the stain mother board;
5 Straighten the synchronous belt, with the belt tension of 20-40N.
The parameters of the belt tension meter are set to: SPAN=183M=2.1; W=10.
4-170
Subsystem Functions
2 1
Figure 4-158 Staining tray motor pedestal
Figure 4-159 Small pulley

1 MOTOR STEP 801-BA38-00022-00 2 M4x8 /
3.6V 1.8 degree cross-recess
1.57Nm ed screws
Validation
1) Start up the instrument, and make sure that the staining tray is able to rotate
properly.
4.8.14 Inner blocking assemblies
Tools
Procedure
2 Remove the 2 M3X12cross-recessed panhead screws fixing the inner blocking
assembly, and replace it with a new one. Install the synchronous belt and lock the
4-171
Subsystem Functions
assembly tightly (as shown in Figure 2-13);

3 Loosen the screws fixing the 4 connecting fittings of the blocking assemblies, and
run the serviced blocking mechanism to its start position;
the other three assemblies.
2
Figure4-160 Inner blocking assembly
Figure4-161 Determining the position of the inner blocking pin

1 Inner blocking 115-018125-00 2 M3X12 /
assemblies cross-recess
ed panhead
screws
Validation
position;
4-172
Subsystem Functions
4.8.15 Blocking Synchronous Belt
Tools
Procedure
2 Remove the connecting fittings of the 4 inner/outer blocking assemblies (as shown
in Figure 2-15);
3 Remove the 2 M3X12 cross-recessed panhead screws fixing the inner blocking
assemblies, mount the new synchronous belt and lock the assemblies. See the inner
blocking assembly FRU for details;
4 Pre-tighten the screws fixing the connecting fittings of the 4 blocking assemblies to
the synchronous belt, and run the serviced blocking mechanism to its start position;
the other three assemblies. See inner blocking assembly FRU for details of Step 3, 4,
and 5.
Figure 4-162 Blocking synchronous belt

1 Synchronous 031-000265-00
flat-toothed
belt.165MXL019
rubber
4-173
Subsystem Functions
Validation
position;
Tools
Procedure
pin and the inner blocking assembly (as shown in Figure 2-17);
4-174
Subsystem Functions
Figure 2-19);
13Install the staining unit (see staining unit FRU for details).
4-175
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-165 Adjusting the sensor position
Figure4-166 Locking the sensor

ed panhead
screws
Validation
position;
4-176
Subsystem Functions
Tools
Procedure
pin and the inner blocking assembly;
Figure 2-19);
13Install the staining unit (see staining unit FRU for details).
4-177
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-167 Outer Blocking assembly 2

ed panhead
screws
Validation
position;
4.8.18 Blood Film Detection Assembly
Tools
Inner hexagon spanner (1suite)
4-178
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
1 Unplug the connecting wire(s) of the target assembly;

2 Remove the screw(s) fixing the assembly. Install the new one, and fix it (as shown in
Figure 2-22).
1 2
Figure4-169 Blood film detection assembly

1 Blood Film 115-022774-00 2 M3X10 inner /
Detection hexagon
Assembly screws
Validation
1 Move the manipulator manually, and it should be able to pass through the blood film
detection assembly smoothly.
4.9 Slide Output Unit

4.9.1 Subsystem Structure
In the SM&S, the slide output subsystem is the recycle station of the slides. When the slides
are collected in the slide basket, and ready for the operator to take them away for smear
review or other subsequent processing. The design of this subsystem include the following:
Slide basket: to accommodate the slides to facilitate operator's actions to the slides (not
involved below);
Placing and loading the basket slide: for operators to place the empty slide baskets which are
going to collect the slides;
Slide basket feeding: for a single slide basket to receive slide in different positions;
Slide drying: drying the slides in the slide baskets (not involved below);
Slide basket unloading: sending out the slide basket with dried slides to the unloading tray for
the operator to take away.
4-179
Subsystem Functions
4.9.2 Mechanical Structure
Figure 4-170 Slide output subsystem

As shown in the figure above, the slide output subsystem consists of the loading mechanism,
feeding mechanism, unloading mechanism, slide basket positioning and feedback
mechanism. These mechanisms works to load and store slide baskets, feed the slide basket
broadwise, unload the slide baskets, fix and support the slide basket, and send feedback of
the slide basket position.
4.9.3 Loading Mechanism

To enable the operators to place the slide basket whenever they want, flat belts are used for
slide basket loading. The design is shown below:
4-180
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-171 Loading mechanism
4.9.4 Feeding Mechanism

The mechanism transports empty slide baskets to slide inserting position, and transports the
slide basket loaded with slides to the unloading position, as well as stores empty slide
baskets in the feeding pathway. The broadwise movement of the feeding mechanism is
driven by the synchronous belt. Pneumatic pushers are used in feeding mechanism to
facilitate the movement in forward/backward direction of slide baskets.
Figure 4-172 Feeding mechanism
4.9.5 Unloading Mechanism
To unload the slide basket loaded with slides to specified area for the operator to take.
Figure 4-173 Unloading mechanism
4-181
Subsystem Functions
4.9.6 Slide Baskets Bottom part of slide

accommodation
Side hollow part Fluid accumulation slot
Slide position
Solid part for counting
Inversion proof notches
Position
notches
Hooking groove
Dragging
surface
1Each slide basket can accommodate 10 slides.

2The front, back, left and right are air vents to keep the slides dry.
3The slide basket has position notches.
4There are reversion-proof notches on bottom of the slide basket.
4-182
Subsystem Functions
5There are fluid accumulation slot on bottom inside the slide basket.
6There are grooves on the bottom of the slide basket to facilitate the transportation.
4.9.7 Slide Drying
The structure of the mechanism is the figure shown below:
Thermal
Heating core insulation
assembly sponge
Fan Holder
Temperatur
e detection
at outlet
Welded
piece of the
air passage
Air intaking fan
Air
exhausting
Figure 4-174 Components of the slide basket drying assembly fan
The slide basket drying assembly consists of: air intaking fan, fan holder, heating core
assembly, air exhausting fan, welded piece of the air passage, and thermal insulation
sponge.
4.9.8 Working Principles
4.9.9 Loading Mechanism
4.9.2.1.1 Structure and Components of the Loading Mechanism
4-183
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-175 Structure and components of the loading mechanism

The loading mechanism consists of the driving mechanism, driving wheel mechanism, driven
wheel mechanism, tensioning wheel mechanism, slide quantity feedback mechanism, and
slide loading and supporting mechanism.
4.9.2.1.2 Working Principles of the Loading Mechanism
The slide basket loading mechanism uses flat belts for transportation, and transports the
empty slide baskets in the loading area where the operator places them to slide basket
storage position. Its working principles are as follows:
The driving motor sends the rotation force with reduced speed to the driving wheel, which
rotate to drive the flat belts to move translationally on the platform where the slide basket is
placed and the driven wheel to rotate. When an empty slide basket is placed onto the loading
area, the belts transport it to the inner part of the loading area. To prevent the belts being
over-stretched which leads to trackslip, a tensioning mechanism is designed to compensate
the stretching.
4.9.2.1.3 Components and Working Principles of Loading Mechanism Units
Driving Unit
4-184
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-176 Driving unit

The driving unit consists of the driving motor, supporting board, synchronous belt and driving
wheel.
Transportation Unit
Figure 4-177Transportation unit

The transportation unit transports and stores empty slide baskets. The transportation unit
4-185
Subsystem Functions
consists of driving wheel, driven wheel, transportation belts, loading and supporting board.
The driving wheel, driven wheel, and belts work together to transport slide basket, and the
loading and supporting board supports and guides the slide baskets in the transportation
process.
Tensioning Unit
Figure 4-178Tensioning unit

The tensioning unit consists of mounting pedestal, tensioning spring, tensioning wheel
support, tensioning wheel, where the tensioning wheel support can rotate freely around the
installation pedestal. After the tensioning wheel presses against the belt, the tensile force is
applied to the belt through the spring. When the belt is loose, the spring stretches to make
compensation.
Feedback Unit
Figure 4-179Feedback unit

The feedback unit consists of 7 reflective sensors and their brackets. It sends feedbacks
4-186
Subsystem Functions
about whether there is empty slide basket at the current position, and records the number of
slide baskets in the buffer area.
4.9.10 Feeding Mechanism
4.9.2.2.1 Structure and Components of the Feeding Mechanism
Figure 4-180 Structure and components of the feeding mechanism

The feeding mechanism consist of the driving motor, driving wheel, driven wheel,
synchronous belt, linear guide rail, pneumatic pusher, start position sensor, boundary position
sensor, and mounting plate.
4.9.2.2.2 Working Principles of the Feeding Mechanism
The slide baskets in the feeding mechanism are transported by using the pneumatic pushers.
The empty slide baskets in the loading area are transported to the position for slide inserting
and buffer storage position, and the loaded slide baskets will be transported to the drying
position after slide inserting. Its working principles are as follows:
The drive motor converts the rotary motion into linear motion of the sliders through the
synchronous belt and pulley, and then the sliders move in a linear and reciprocating way with
the pneumatic pushers mounted on it. The lever of the pneumatic pusher is telescopic in the
vertical direction. To get the empty basket, the lever retracts to be under the supporting board,
and the pusher moves to the specified position under the slide basket, after which the lever of
the pusher protrudes. It hooks the bottom of the slide basket and brings it to the specified
position.
The start position sensor finds the start position of the mechanism, and the boundary position
sensor provides protection at the boundary position.
4-187
Subsystem Functions
4.9.11 Unloading Mechanism
4.9.2.3.1 Structure and Components of the Unloading Mechanism
Figure 4-181 Structure and components of the unloading mechanism

The unloading mechanism consist of the driving motor, driving wheel, driven wheel,
synchronous belt, linear guide rail, unloading pusher, start position sensor, and mounting
plate.
4.9.2.3.2 Working Principles of the Unloading Mechanism
The slide basket unloading mechanism uses both synchronous belt and linear guide rail to
unload the slide basket sent by the feeding mechanism to the buffer area. The action flow are
as follows.
The drive motor converts the rotary motion into linear motion of the sliders through the
synchronous belt and pulley, and then the sliders move in a linear and reciprocating way with
the unloading pusher. When the unloading mechanism receives an unloading command, the
unloading pusher moves forward to push the slide basket out of the unloading position.
The start position sensor finds the start position of the unloading mechanism.
4-188
Subsystem Functions
4.9.12 Slide Baskets
Figure 4-182 Slide basket of the SM&S

A slide basket has solid parts and hollow parts. There 9 round cornered rectangles at the front
of the basket, and the parts between adjacent rectangles are solid. The middle of each solid
part is the slide inserting position, and 10 slides can be accommodated in all. There are 10
grooves on bottom of the basket, where the basket can be hooked for slide filling or stepping.
When the slide basket is at the slide position, the sensor aims at the solid part, and the
pusher hooks the groove at the bottom and drags the basket forward by one step. The sensor
status changes in the order of BlockedNot blockedBlocked.
4-189
Subsystem Functions
4.9.13 Slide Drying
Scenario Heating Heating core Air outlet Air intaking Air

core setup alarm alarm fan exhausting
temperature temperature temperature 4930-6670 fan
() range () range () (r/min) 3780-4620
(r/min)
Start-up 30 305 None On when the hearing core
Standby 30 305 None temperature is higher than
4-190
Subsystem Functions
40 ; off when it is lower

than 40
Smear only 30 305 None Off Off
Smear+Stain 95 85-100 6015 On when the hearing core
Stain only 95 85-100 6015 temperature is higher than
Print only 30 305 None 40; off when it is lower
Standby 30 305 None than 40
Exit from 30 305 None
standby
status
Adjustment Configurable None None Configurable Configurable
The drying time is 4.5min in Stain, Stain+Smear modes.
4.9.14 Work Flow

User place
baskets at the User picks up the
entry of the basket and check
loading slides
mechanism
Loading
Dried basket is
mechanism
pushed off to
loads baskets
unloading tray
automatically
Claw moves to When all slides are

loading position loaded or the
and drags the basket is full, the
baskets to working basket is sent to
or waiting areas drying area
Basket takes one

Manipulator inserts
step, and
a slide to basket in
manipulator inserts
waiting area
another slide
4-191
Subsystem Functions
4.9.15 Adjusting Requirements
4.9.16 Adjusting the Guide Block
When dismounting the guide block shown in Figure 7p, do as follows.
Adjusting the Position of the Guide Block

Tool Other
Simulated Slide Basket
material
1 Install the 1.8mm manipulator height adjusting fixture onto the manipulator, and the
move the simulated slide basket to the position shown in the figure. Perform an inserting
action, as shown in Figure 7O.
2 Fix the 2 M3 inner hexagon screws (torque force: 8-11kgf.cm) and 1 M4 inner
hexagon screw (torque force: 20-25kgf.cm), as shown in Figure 7P.
1. The manipulator inserts to the basket together with the fixture to confirm the
Procedure position of the basket;
a. The pinch roller of the guide block and the groove of the basket should be aligned.
b. The slide should be parallel with the manipulator.
2. While fixing the retaining screws, the guide block should not be turned round;
3. After the screws are fixed, the manipulator try inserting again. The fixture should
insert in the basket smoothly, and there should be no interference between the fixture
and basket.
Note 1Note: the fixture here should be changed into the 1.8mm manipulator height
adjusting fixture
4-192
Subsystem Functions
Diagram
4-193
Subsystem Functions
4.9.17 Adjusting the Tension of the Loading Belt
4-194
Subsystem Functions
4.9.18 Calibrating Counter Sensor and the Ready-for-Unloading

Sensor
Analog Sensor Calibration
Scenario Replacing the counter sensor or the ready-for unloading sensor
Fixture N/A
Label NO Procedure
1 Go to the "Analog Sensor Calibration" screen;
2 Tap the "Next Page" button, and then the "Auto Cal." buttons of the
"Basket Counter" and the "Basket Ready-for-Unloading Sensor". Do as
instructed by the prompts, and tap "Save" after the calibration is
completed.
Note: strictly follow the instructions of the prompts on the screen.
4.9.19 Adjusting the Slide Position and Boundary Position
Adjusting the mechanical position of the

basket driver (pusher)
3202-J38 Simulated slide
Note1
Fixtur basket
e 3204-J31 Pusher positioning
Note2
fixture
La N
Procedure
bel O
4-195
Subsystem Functions
Figure A 1 Go to the "Slide Reclaiming

Assembly" adjusting screen. Tap
"Clear out" and then "Motor
Initialization". Select "Loading
Boundary Pos.", and place
3204-J31 as shown in Figure B.
Adjust using the "Leftward" and
"Rightward" buttons, making the
pusher contact the basket. Insert a
0.05mm plug gauge in between. If it
can be inserted in between without
touching the pusher, the adjustment
Figure B will be considered as PASS; then
tap "Slide Pos." button, and wait
until the pusher stops moving. Place
the 3202-J38 into the loading area,
which is then transported to the
slide position;
2 Make the basket loading with
slide(s) "Stepping" until the 2
roller wheel sink into the groove
on bottom of the basket. Move the
basket left and right manually, and
make sure the wheels are kept
Figure C inside the groove. Touch the front of
the basket gently with your left
forefinger, and tap the "Leftward"
button using your right hand (you
can tap the "Rightward" button
before tapping "Leftward" to make
the pusher go away by 5-10 steps
from the contact position on the
bottom). When the basket is fed to
the position where the pusher
contacts the basket, and your finger
feels the force, tap "Rightward"
once, and then "Save". Tap
"Stepping" again, and adjust in the
same way. When your finger feels
the force after it moves to the left for
one step, it means PASS. Do not
save and restore the basket;
4-196
Subsystem Functions
3 When the adjustment PASS, tap

"Stepping" again, and make sure the
current voltage of the right counter
sensor falls in the range of (0,
0.099).
Note: at the slide position, if the pusher raises
the slide basket directly or the roller wheels
are not sunken in the groove normally when
the pusher is at the left side, tap "Rightward"
to move the pusher to the right, and then
adjust to the left.
Note1&Note2: if there is no simulated slide basket in site, use a slide basket instead.
4.9.20 Manual Maintenance

1Cleaning the exterior of the slide basket (especially the part contacting the
interior of the guide block, and the part pinched by the pinch roller);
2Clean the interior of the slide basket guide block;
3Check whether the blank voltage of the ready-for unloading sensor is within the
specified range [clean scraps on the surface or dust accumulation];
4-197
Subsystem Functions
4Monitor the speed of the fan, and clean when necessary;

5Clear the slide falling down on the bottom of the feeding passage, in order not to
affect the movement of the pusher.
4.10 Auto Loading Unit

4.10.1 Overview
Auto loading is the key function of the auto smear maker & stainer, which enables batch
processing of large amount of samples, and reduce the workload of the operator. Therefore,
the auto loading design should meet requirements from the perspective of both the function
and performance, and it should also take into consideration factors like system fault tolerance,
operation convenience, easy troubleshooting. etc. The auto loading subsystem is located in
the front of the instrument, facing the operator. The interactions between the auto loading
subsystem and the main unit are shown in Figure 4-94.
Auto loading subsystem Main unit
Sample to be Sample transportation, mixing and
piercing mechanism
Mixed sample
Analyzed
Aspiration
Pierced and aspirated
Aspirated sample Unloading unit
sample
Sample transportation mechanism
Piercing
mechanism
Main unit
Rotary scanning positioning
Manipulator
mechanism
Tube detection
Circuit
mechanism
boards
Execution parts
Analysis parts
Operation
Software command
Control center
Software
Figure 4-183 Interactions between the auto loading subsystem and the main unit
4-198
Subsystem Functions
Seen from the figure above, the auto loading subsystem interacts with the main unit in three
different occasions: after the sample is transported by the autoloader; after the components in
the auto loading system is adjusted; after a related command is issued through the main unit.
4.10.2 Structure Introduction

The design of the 3204 auto loading subsystem is based on that of the 3201 auto loading
subsystem, including using its designs of sample transportation assembly, automatic mixing
assembly, automatic sampling assembly, rotary scanning assembly, tube detection assembly;
to apply the design, the hardware, software, fluidics, and mechanics need to be work together,
and the relationships among these systems are shown in Figure 4-184 below.
Fluidics (Sequences)
Sequence Command
Software
Drive
Hardware
Drive Circuit+Logic
Pneumatic parts
Mechanics (Moving parts and
Fluidics
components
Figure 4-184 Auto loading information transmission and control
From the figure, we can find that there are 4 layers: fluidics (sequence), software, hardware,
and mechanics.
The sequence is at the top layer, which controls the whole slide making and staining process.
The sequence files are translated into commands by the software, and issued to the
hardware, which executes these commands and controls the mechanical components;
The software is at the second layer under the sequence, which functions as the central
dispatcher. Interactions with users, data and graph processing are completed by the
software;
The hardware drives the moving parts, collects data and transmits them to the user end
software;
Mechanicals involved in the auto loading process include sample transportation assembly,
automatic mixing assembly, rotary scanning assembly, as well as corresponding motors and
valves.
Modules of the auto loading subsystem are shown in the figure below.
4-199
Subsystem Functions
Auto loading subsystem

Tube rack assembly Sample loading
assembly
Sample transportation Sample feeding
assembly assembly
Sample unloading
Rotary scanning assembly
assembly
Tube detection
Auto mixing assembly
assembly
Piercing and aspiration

assembly
Figure 4-185 Modules of the auto loading subsystem
Seen from the figure, the auto loading subsystem consists of tube rack assembly, sample
transportation assembly, rotary scanning assembly, automatic mixing assembly, piercing and
sampling assembly. The tube detection assembly is included in the automatic mixing
assembly, and the sample transportation assembly is composed of the sample loading
assembly, sample feeding assembly, and sample unloading assembly.
Currently, the 3201 auto loading subsystem design protocol is used, so the applicable tubes
are the same as those for 3201. The minimum sample volume for piercing is 200uL, and the
volume in tube should be no less than 600uL.
4.10.3 Basic Functions

The basic functions of the auto loading subsystem include transporting sample from the
loading area to the sampling position in the feeding area, mixing the sample for aspiration,
shown in Figure 4.
4-200
Subsystem Functions
Functions of the Auto Loading Modules
Input Output
Tube detection assembly

Sample to Sample transportation Sample to be
be analyzed assembly analyzed
Loading Barcode scanning assembly Gripping
area area
Sample to Gripping and mixing Sample after

be analyzed module mixing
Gripping Piercing
area area
Sample Sample after

Piercing module
after mixing piercing
Piercing Piercing
area area
Sample after Sample after

Aspiration module
piercing aspiration
Piercing Piercing
area area
Sample after Sample unloading Sample after

aspiration module aspiration
Piercing Unloading
area area
Figure 4-186 Basic functions of the auto loading subsystem

There are requirements to the modules in Figure 4-186. Considering that the product may be
used in the auto sample processing line in the future, interfaces should be reserved for future
use.
1.Sample transportation module: the sample transportation module includes sample
transportation assembly, tube detection assembly, and barcode scanning assembly.
For this module, it is required to detect whether there is a tube, identify sample
barcode information, transport the sample to the sampling position in the feeding
area in an accurate and reliable way in all modes;
2.Gripping and mixing module: this module is required to grip the tube filled with
sample from the tube rack and mix it well in a reliable way;
3.Sample unloading module: this module get the tube where the sample has been
aspirated, and transport this tube to the unloading area.
4-201
Subsystem Functions
4.10.4 Operation Time Flow
4.10.5 Time Flow

To meet the required throughput, each action of the components in the auto loading process
has to be finished in specified time. See the figure below for the time flow design of
component actions.
Time for actions in an auto

loading cycle
First aspiration (6s)
(Sequence
completes in 6s)
Probe withdrawal
(2.5s)
(completed in 2.5s)
Second aspiration (after the

probe withdrawal is
completed)
Putting back the tube (3.4s)

1. Rotate and go back to start
position (0.4s);
2. Cylinder goes down (1.6s);
3. Cylinder goes back (1.1s);
4. Pressing mechanism releases
(0.3s).
Feeding
(TBD. Feeding time differs in
different modes. In the throughput
of 125 samples/hour, feeding
time=2.5s
Gripping, mixing, and piercing

(14.4s)
1. Pressing mechanism presses (0.3s);
2. Cylinder goes forward (0.5s)
2. Cylinder goes up (1.8s);
3. Mixing (7.2s);
4. Piercing (4.6(1.3+1.5+1.8)s)
Next sample
Figure 4-187 Basic functions of the auto loading subsystem

Tube rack feeding position 1 (3.1s)+rotary scanning (12s). Total time15.1s
Tube rack feeding position 1 (3.1s)+mixing (9.5s). Total time: 12.6s.
From putting down the previous tube to the next tube getting ready to be pierced: 15.7s.
If the instrument was shut down according to the standard procedure, the mechanism gets
4-202
Subsystem Functions
ready after power on in 2.5 minutes. The mechanism can restore after unexpected power-fail.
4.10.6 Switching between Modes

In the auto loading process, if the adjacent tubes have different modes, when the previous
sample is being processed, the next sample will be fed to the sampling position and the
gripping position information will be reported. The software waits for the completion of the
previous sample processing, after which it confirms the mode information, and process it
accordingly.
4.10.7 Auto Loading Status Changing Flow
The auto loading subsystem changes from one status to another in the working process. See
Figure 4-188 below.
Tube rack
Tube
Start Loading Feeding Feeding
detection Tube
scanning
No tube rack
Tube
Mixing
Pre- Tube rack
End Unloading & Feeding Feeding
mixing scanning
Piercing
No tube
Figure 4-188 Auto loading status changing flow
4.10.8 Basic Principles

The auto loading subsystem is designed based on the following principles:
Proper combination: the board software of the hardware system uses proper
combination to basic actions to reduce the communication workload of the
software;
Software and hardware interaction principle: the software interacts with the
hardware only when: reporting the tube rack and tube information, the hardware
reports ready-to-aspirate command, the software issues aspiration completed
command;
Control principle: the sequences do not participate in the mechanical component

movement. All actions are managed and controlled by the board software or user
4-203
Subsystem Functions
end software;
Information reporting timing principle: to prevent that the mechanism does not
aspirate after early gripping and mixing which influence the mixing, the software
calculates based on the sequence time base to decide whether to grip the tube, mix
and pierce, while the hardware report the tube position information once the tube is
in place;
Throughput principle: when the throughput does not reach the maximum, to
accelerate the auto loading and increase the throughput, use the following principle:
when the tube is transported in position, report the gripping position information
immediately. The software finds corresponding information from the worklist or user
setup is issued once it receives the information, and then issue the command to the
driven part whether to grip and mix the tube. In this case, the auto loading
subsystem is not operating in the highest speed, but in highest possible speed.
STAT response principle: once the tube gets the mixing and piercing position, start
gripping, mixing and piercing, unless there is an error which makes the system stop.
The "Pause" or "STAT" command should be responded only when the current
mixing and piercing is finished. Therefore, current sample processing should be
finished before dealing with other issues.
4.10.9 Interaction and Communication

The interactions in the auto loading design includes interactions between the mechanics and
the hardware, as well as interactions between the software and the hardware.
The communication in the auto loading processing is mainly about the information
transmission among data board, mother board, and driving and controlling module, which is
between the board software and the user end software (PC software or the software user can
use through the touch screen). The driving and controlling module communication concerns
the control of the moving parts, valves, and pumps, as well as sensor information collection;
the communication with the data board mainly concerns the analysis results.
4.10.10 Interactions between the Mechanics and Hardware

Interactions between the mechanics and hardware refer to the hardware providing driving
circuits according to the motor actions required by the mechanics, or the corresponding
detection driving circuits according to the sensor detection requirements, based on the input
from the mechanics after the mechanical structure design is determined.
4-204
Subsystem Functions
4.10.11 Structure Design
4.10.12 Sample Transportation Assembly

Requirements from the Subsystem to Sample Transportation, Tube Detection, barcode
Scanning Assemblies
1. Considering the failure mode of previous products, tailor dust-proof and spillage-proof
designs to enhance the reliability of the sensors, use preventive measures in the structure
design, or re-select the model of the sensor, to make the failure rate within control;
2. The structure designs of the loading assembly and unloading assembly should meet the
capacity requirement (50 samples);
3. In the structure design, the transportation requirements should be taken into consideration:
do not lay pressure on the autoloader while transporting the main unit, and warning labels for
this should be placed on both sides of the autoloader;
4. Taking the convenience of tube rack taking and placing into consideration;
5. To prevent from omission in sample aspiration, the transmissive tube detection design of
Project 3201 is adopted;
6. Considering the tube barcode scanning omission problem, it is planned to use the rotary
scanning design. Adopting the new design may bring possibilities of new errors, e.g.: barcode
label adhering to the tube rack while being rotated which may influence subsequent actions.
Therefore, trainings are needed to be provided to users concerning barcode specifications
and related notes in operation.
7. Need to consider how to prevent the operator from being hurt by the light emitted by the
scanner, e.g. using shields, placing warning labels, etc.
4.10.13 Sample Transportation Assembly Functions

The major task of the sample transportation assembly is transporting blood samples, which is
sending tubes to specified position where they are gripped, mixed and aspirated, and
removing the tubes which have been processed. For the purpose of modularized control, the
tube detection assembly and barcode scanning assembly (the internal barcode scanner is
optional for products sold in China, but mandatory in products sold out of China) are
considered as sub-modules of this assembly. The barcode scanner can read the barcode
information from the tube or tube rack, and transmit it to the user end software.
4.10.14 Diagram
Diagram of the Sample Transportation Assembly
The whole assembly has of 3 driving modules: X-direction loading driving module for tube
rack loading, Y-direction loading driving module in the feeding area, and X-direction
unloading driving module in the unloading area, as shown in Figure 4-189 below. Positions of
4-205
Subsystem Functions
sensors in the sample transportation assembly are shown in Figure 4-190.
Loading tray
Feeding
Y
Lo
X

adi

ng
X-direction
driving module in
X
unloading
area

Unl

oa
X
Y-direction

din

driving module of
Y

g tube rack feeding

in feeding area
X-direction
X
driving module of

Unloading tube rack loading
tray
Figure 4-189 Sample transportation mechanism working principle
Tube rack unloading reset sensor S8 Tube rack end counter S7 Tube rack start counter S6
Y-direction motor end
S8 S7 position sensor S5 S6 S3 S2
S5 S10 S4 X-direction motor Tube rack
Y-direction motor end position in-position
sensorS3 switch S2
S11 start position
sensor S4
Feeding pusher
Tube detection dog start position
sensor S10 sensor S11
S1
X-direction motor start
position sensor S1
S9
Unloading tray full sensor S9
Figure 4-190 Sample transportation mechanism sensor positions
4.10.15 Interface Design
The dimensions of the interfaces for the connection of the autoloader and the main unit are
4-206
Subsystem Functions
shown in Figure 4-191.
Figure 4-191 Interfaces for the connection of the autoloader and the main unit
4.10.16 Diagram of Tube Detection Assembly

Use the transmissive sensor design of Project 3201, which discriminates whether there is a
tube through detecting the tube cap, as shown in Figure 4-192;
4-207
Subsystem Functions
Tube detection
sensor
Tube
Tube
cap
scanning

path

Tube rack
Figure 4-192 Tube detection sensor design
4.10.17 Diagram of Rotary Scanning Detection Assembly

The barcode scanning assembly has 2 functions: scanning tube rack barcode and tube
barcode. In tube rack barcode scanning, the 3201 strategy of dynamic scanning of the
position between Position 1 and 2 of the tube rack is adopted.
For tube barcode scanning, the rotary scanning design of Project 3201 is adopted, the
principle of which is shown in the figure below.
Synchronous
belt
Rotary
Pressure motor
head
Spring
Tube Cylinder
Figure 4-193 Tube scanning mechanism
In Figure 4-193,when there is a tube under the elastic pressure head, the cylinder drives the
pressure head to move downwards until it presses against the tube cap, and then the motor
drives the tube to rotate, and the instrument scans the barcode at the same time.
To improve the reliability, make sure the pressure head and the tube cap are aligned, and the
motor runs 2 rounds (the tube rotates 1 round). In this case, the barcode can be scanned as
4-208
Subsystem Functions
long as it is placed on the tube properly.
4.10.18 Gripping and Mixing Assembly
4.10.19 Functions of Gripping and Mixing Assembly

The gripping and mixing assembly mainly snatches the tube filled with blood sample after it is
transported to the destined position, and then shake the tube to mix the sample. The gripping
and mixing assembly consists of the gripping assembly and the mixing assembly.
For the mixing assembly, it needs to complete a series of actions: the linear movement along
two directions, a repeated shaking action, and placing the tube back. The times of shaking is
defined by the system.
4.10.20 Diagram
Diagram of the Gripper
The diagram of the gripper is shown in Figure 4-194.
Figure 4-194 Diagram of double grippers
4.10.21 Working Principle of the Automatic Mixing Assembly

The linear movement in 2 directions while mixing is driven by cylinders: the vertical
movement is driven by a double-acting cylinder, the front/back movement is driven by a
single-acting cylinder, and a spring to push back. Concise structure, quick movement, reliable
position setting, and low noise all feature the design. The front of the cylinders uses nonrigid
connection, which is self-adaptable. This design has special assembly requirements, but
4-209
Subsystem Functions
concise structure, and is cost-effective.

The rotation in the mixing process is driven by stepping motor, which is adopted from the
mature design of previous projects. Comparing with the cylinder driven rotation of XE-2100,
using stepping motor can make the grippers shaking in consistent speed, the angle and
position easy to control.
The working principle of the mixing assembly is shown in Figure 4-195.
Figure 4-195 Diagram of the mixing assembly
4.10.22 Piercing Assembly
4.10.23 Functions of Piercing Assembly

The piercing assembly mainly aspirates a specified volume of blood sample after the sample
is mixed and placed in piercing position. The piercing assembly of 3110 project is adopted.
The relative movement of the sample probe, probe wipe and tube position setting block are
driven by a cylinder.
4.10.24 Diagram
The structure of the piercing assembly is shown in Figure 4-107.
4-210
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-196 Structure of the piercing assembly
4.10.25 Adjusting Requirements
4.10.26 Barcode Scanning Unit
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
1 Remove the right lower cover;
2 Dismount the autoloader;
3 Unplug the connecting cables of the scanning assembly;
4 Remove the screws fixing the barcode scanning assembly, and install a new one;
4-211
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-197 Replacing the barcode scanning assembly

1 Barcode scanning 801-3201-00052-0 3 Fixed barcode
023-000032-00
assembly 0 scanner
2 M4 cross-recessed 4 Rotary pressure
/ 043-001082-00
panhead screws head patch
Validation
1Start up the instrument and make sure the rotary scanning function is proper;
2To check the rotary scanning function, make sure the center of the rotary
pressure head and that of the tube cap are aligned; if not, adjust the position of the
barcode scanning assembly before fixing it;
After the installation, adjust again to ensure perfect alignment. Do as follows:
1. Adjusting the position of the rotary pressure head

1) Place the rotary scanning fixture above the tube rack, and then place the tube rack on the
autoloader. Tap "Service">"Debug">"Auto Loading Adjustment". In the "Autoloader" tab,
tap "Initialize", "Load" in turn, and "Feed" continuously until the fixture is transported to the
scanning position.
4-212
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-198 Loading adjusting fixture
2) Tap "Scan/Mix Assembly", and then in the "Mixing&Piercing Single-Step Adjustment" area,
tap "Press Tube Rack".
Figure 4-199 Pressing tube rack
3) Check the left/right position of the pressure head to see if it is at the center of the tube cap,
and then in the "Scanning Unit" area, tap "Initialize", "To Start", and "To Lower", and check if
the scanning pressure head can go into the hole of the fixture. If deviation is found, loosen the
screws fixing the scanning assembly to adjust the left/right position of the scanning pressure
head, as shown in Figure 4-200. Check the front/back position of the pressure head to see if it
is at the center of the tube cap. If the deviation is not acceptable, adjust according to Figure
4-201.
4-213
Subsystem Functions
Loosen the 4
screws here, and
adjust the
left/right position
of the pressure
head
Figure 4-200 Adjusting the left/right position of the pressure head
Loosen the 4
screws here, and
adjust the
front/back
position of the
pressure head
Figure 4-201 Adjusting the front/back position of the pressure head
4Tap the "To Start" button in the "Scanning Unit" area to release the pressure head.
2. Adjusting the position of the barcode scanner

1) Tap "Service">"Debug">"Auto Loading Adjustment">"Scan/Mix Assembly". In the
"Mixing&Piercing Single-Step Adjustment"area, tap "Release Tube Rack";
Figure 4-202 Releasing tube rack
4-214
Subsystem Functions
2) Place a A4 paper at the scanning position, and tap "Scanner on" button in the "Scanning
Unit" area to turn on the scanner.
Figure 4-203 Turning on the scanner
3) Check whether the beam emitted from scanner is at the center of the tube position.
Requirement: all the beams should be at the center of the openings of the tube rack. If the
requirement is not met, loosen the 2 screws fixing the scanner bracket and adjust.
Note: when the scanner is on, avoid direct eye contact with the beam
Loosen the screws here,

and adjust the left/right
position of the scanner
Figure 4-204 Adjusting the left/right position of the scanner
Note: After the barcode scanning assembly is installed and adjusted, get some tubes with
barcode labels on them. Select the code system in "Barcode" setup screen. Tap
"Service"-"Debug"-"Auto Loading Adjustment"-"Barcode Detection". Tap "Start" after
"Barcode Scanning&Verification", and the instrument starts auto loading and rotary scanning
starts. Check the tube rotation process. In this way, you can check the rotary scanning
function conveniently.
Figure 4-205 Checking the barcode scanning function
4-215
Subsystem Functions
4.10.27 Tube Gripper
Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
2Remove the protective cover of the autoloader.
3Use the short side of the inner hexagon spanner to loosen the M3 screws on the
left of the gripper, pull the gripper forward and dismount it.
4Replace and install a new gripper.
Figure 4-206 Removing the gripper

1 Tube gripper 801-3201-00042-00 2 M3x8 inner /
hexagon screws
Validation
5After the new gripper is installed, start auto loading to see whether the gripper
works properly.
4-216
Subsystem Functions
4.10.28 Auto Sampling Assembly
Tools
NO.107 cross-headed screwdriver
Removal
1Open the front cover assembly, fix the cover firmly with the stop bar; Or lift the
front cover with the angle of 180, and then place the cover on the top cover stably.
2Remove the protective cover of the autoloader;
3Remove the autoloader;
4Take off the tray and remove the the left lower cover and the right lower cover;
5Remove the 4 M4 screws that fixing the assembly, move the assembly
horizontally forward a little, remove all the tubes and cables that connecting the
assembly, and then take off the assembly.
Figure 4-207 Removing the auto sampling assembly
No. Name No. Name

1 M4X8 screws (upper) 3 M4X8 screws (lower)
2 Auto sampling assembly
4-217
Subsystem Functions
4.10.29 Piercing unit
Tools
M2.5 inner hexagon spanner, NO.107 cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
2Loosen the screws that fix the protective cover of the auto loading piercing unit,
and then remove the protective cover from the analyzer.
Figure 4-208 Removing the piercing unit-1
No. Name No. Name

1 Protective cover of the piercing unit 2 M4 screws loosened with hands
3Remove all the rubber tube connected to the piercing probe assembly, and
remove the 2 M3 screws fixing the piercing probe wipe and piercing probe assembly
using the #2.5 inner hexagon spanner. After removing the 2 M4 cross-recessed
screws using the cross-head screwdriver, the assembly can be dismounted.
4-218
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-209 Removing the piercing unit-2

1 Protective cover of / 4 Piercing unit 801-3201-00043-00
the piercing unit
2 M3x20 inner hexagon / 5 Piercing probe /
screws wipe
3 M4X20 /
cross-recessed
panhead screw
Validation
6After replacing the piercing probe, take an empty tube and stick with adhesive
tape and perform auto loading counting;
7Check if the piercing action is normal, after the piercing, check if the pin hole on
the tube cap is in the middle;
8Check the piercing depth, and adjust the adjusting screw stem, to ensure
effective aspiration.
4.10.30 Autoloader
Tools
4-219
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
2Remove the protective cover.
3Remove the screws that fix the autoloader at the front and pull the autoloader out
a little, remove the cable connectors and lines on the left of the autoloader that
connected to the analyzer, and then pull the autoloader forward a little horizontally to
take it off.
Figure 4-210 Removing the autoloader

1 M4X8 screw / 4 Connecting part /
between the autoloader
and the analyzer
2 Autoloader cover 043-000661-00 5 Autoloader assembly 801-3201-00035-0
0
3 Bridging beam of /
the autoloader
Validation
9There is pin hole at the left bottom of the analyzer, note that when installing the
autoloader, the relevant pins on the autoloader shall align to the hole, ensure that
the position is right.
10The cables and lines shall be connected properly, there are 2 lines, including
the back supporting board and the pusher dog.
11Start up the analyzer, go to "Maintenance" -"Debug" screen, select
"Autoloader" , perform initialization and one-step operation, check if the autoloader
works normally.
4-220
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-211 Installing cables and air tubes of the autoloader
4.10.31 Tube Detection Assembly
Tools
Procedure
2Open the right door, pull the autoloader outwards a little bit, and then remove the
right lower cover.
3Unplug the cable connectors connected to the tube detection assembly; remove
the 2 M3 screws of the fixing assembly using the NO.107 cross-head screwdriver.
Figure 4-212 Removing the tube detection assembly
4-221
Subsystem Functions
1 Transmissive / 3 Tube Detection 801-3201-00036-00

sensor bracket Assembly
installation plate
2 M3X8 screws /
Validation
12Start up the instrument after the replacement, and get several tube racks
loaded with empty tubes.
13Tap "Service"-"Debug"-"Auto Loading Adjustment", and then go to the "Tube
Detection" tab. Tap "Start", and the instrument starts auto loading and tube
detection.
14Check the tube detection result displayed on the screen is consistent with the
tube position status. If a tube is detected, the corresponding tube position displayed
on the screen turns green.
Figure 4-213 Tube detection screen
4.10.32 Components inside the autoloader
4.10.10.7.1 Loading Unit
Tools
Procedure
1Shut down the instrument and remove the autoloader;
4-222
Subsystem Functions
2Remove the cover of the autoloader;

3Remove the board assembly of the autoloader;
4As shown in the following figure, remove the 4 small M3X8 panhead screws
with 107 cross-headed screwdriver, disconnect the sensor connecting cable and
motor cable, then the assembly can be replaced;
Figure 4-214 Removing the loading unit

1 M3X8 panhead screws / 2 Loading unit 801-3201-00038-00
(small)
Validation
1Check whether the components are assembled and fixed properly;

2Check whether the signal cables are connected properly;
3Start up the instrument and check whether the autoloader works properly.
4.10.10.7.2 Horizontal sampling
Tools
Procedure
1Shut down the analyzer and remove the autoloader. Reference
2Remove the cover of the autoloader.
5As shown in the following figure, remove the 6 small M3X8 panhead screws with
107 cross-headed screwdriver, disconnect the sensor connecting cable, motor cable
and air tube, then the assembly can be replaced;
4-223
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-215 Removing the feeding unit

1 M3X8 panhead screws / 2 Feeding unit 801-3201-00039-00
(small)
Validation

5Check whether the signal cables are connected properly;
4.10.10.7.3 Pneumatic pusher unit
Tools
Procedure
1Shut down the instrument and remove the autoloader;

4Remove the horizontal sampling;
5As shown in the following figure, remove the 2 panhead screws on the protective
cover with 107 cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the protective cover;
6Loosen the M3X8 panhead screws on the press bar of the synchronous belt to
separate the cylinder pusher unit from the synchronous belt;
7Loosen the 2 screws that fix the fluidic towline on the baffle plate of the horizontal
sampling with the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to separate the cylinder pusher unit
from the fluidic towline;
4-224
Subsystem Functions
8Loosen the 4 M3X5 inner hexagon screws with the inner hexagon spanner to
remove it from the slider box;
9Pull the air tube from the fluidic towline, and then remove the cylinder pusher
unit;
Figure 4-216Removing the feeding unit

1 Protective cover \ 4 Press bar 1 of the \
synchronous belt
2 M3X8 panhead \ 5 M3X5 inner \
screws (small) hexagon screws
3 Pneumatic pusher 801-3201-00040-00
unit
Validation

2Check whether the signal cables and cables are connected properly;
4.10.10.7.4 Unloading Unit
Tools
4-225
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
1 Shut down the instrument and remove the autoloader;

2 Remove the cover of the autoloader;
3 Remove the board assembly of the autoloader;
4 As shown in the following figure, remove the 5 small M3X8 panhead screws with 107
cross-headed screwdriver, disconnect the sensor connecting cable and motor cable,
then the assembly can be replaced;
Figure 4-217 Removing the unloading unit

1 M3X8 panhead screws / 2
Unloading unit 801-3201-00041-00
(small)
Validation
1 Check whether the components are assembled and fixed properly;
2 Check whether the signal cables are connected properly;
3 Start up the instrument and check whether the autoloader works properly.
4.10.10.7.5 Vertical Compressing Unit
Tools
Procedure
1 Tube rack lateral 801-3201-00037-0
compressing unit 0
4-226
Subsystem Functions

3 Remove the tube rack lateral compressing unit;
4 As shown in the following figure, remove the circlip with the circlip pliers, and take off
the press bar of the tube rack;
5 Remove M5X10 inner hexagon screws and 4 M6X12 inner hexagon screws with
inner hexagon spanner as shown in the following figure, unplug the cables and then
remove the cylinder;
Figure 4-218Removing the cylinder inside the tube rack lateral compressing unit
No. Name No. Name

1 8 M5X10 stainless-steel socket cap screw
Cylinder holder
passivated
2 9 Single-acting cylinder, thin flat, pressed
Elevating decelerating tube
spring
3 10 M3X8 stainless-steel panhead screws
Connector.4X2.5mm tube, M5
(small)
4 11 M6X12 stainless-steel socket cap screw
Connecting block
passivated
5 Press bar shaft 12 Tube. PU tube, 4mmX2.5mm, transparent
6 Press bar of the tube rack 13 Connector.straight thread, 40D, 40D
7 Axial circlip
4-227
Subsystem Functions
Validation
1 Check whether the components are assembled and fixed properly;

2 Check whether the signal cables and cables are connected properly;
3 Start up the instrument and check whether the autoloader works properly.
4.10.10.7.6 Counter Unit
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
3 Remove the screw fixing the counter unit (located next to the back supporting board)
using a screw driver;
4 Unplug the connecting cables of the counter unit sensor;
5 Install a new counter unit.
Figure 4-219 Removing the counter unit

7 Guiding plate / 9 M4X8 panhead screws /
(small)
8 Counter unit 801-3201-00087-00
Validation
1 Check whether the counter unit is properly installed;
2 Start up the instrument, and make sure the autoloader works properly;
4-228
Subsystem Functions
4.10.10.7.8 Components Inside the Assembly
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, inner hexagons (1 suite), nipper pliers, cutting nippers
Procedure
1 Dismount the assembly;
2 Replace the components inside the assembly, e.g. motor, belt, etc.;
3 After the replacement, mount back the assembly and connect all cables;
4 Start up the instrument, and make sure it works properly.
Figure 4-220 Loading unit

1 4 Synchronou M6C-010002---
Linear guide rail 032-000134-00
s pulley
Stepping motor 0000-10-10985
s belt
3 Synchronous 6 Sensor 011-000021-00
M6C-010001---
pulley
4-229
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-221 Feeding unit

1 Synchronous 5 Synchronous M6C-020006---
M6C-010002--
pulley belt
2 Linear guide rail 032-000134-00 6 Towline BA33-10-35085
3 Stepping motor 3100-21-49048 7 Sensor 011-000021-00
4 Synchronous M6C-010001---
pulley

Figure 4-222 Unloading unit 1
4-230
Subsystem Functions

1 4 Synchronou M6C-010002--
s pulley
M6C-010001---
pulley
3 Synchronous 6 Linear guide M6H-010003---
801-3110-00155-00
belt rail
Figure 4-224 Mixing assembly

1 Lifting cylinder M6Q-010002--- 4 Linear guide rail M6H-010003---
2 Linear guide rail M6H-010004--- 5 Stepping motor 0000-10-10985
3 Oil buffer 082-000620-00 6 Telescoping M6Q-010003---
4-231
Subsystem Functions
cylinder
Figure 4-225 Piercing unit

1 Linear guide rail M6H-010009--- 3 Sensor 011-000021-00
2 Piercing cylinder 082-000143-00
4.10.10.8.1 Sensors inside the autoloader
Note: Layout and connector description of the autoloader sensors are shown below.
Tube rack Barcode Tube Tube rack Loading
end scanner detection start motor end
position sensor position position
counter SE28 counter SE6
SE8 SE28
Unloading
pushing bar
original
position In-position
sensor SE2 micro-swit
ch in
loading
area
Last tube rack Loading motor Loading

Unloading unloading start position motor start
tray full position sensor sensor SE4 position
sensor SE4 sensor
SE39 SE5
Figure 4-226 Layout of sensors inside the autoloader
4-232
Subsystem Functions
Type of the Name of the sensor Function of the sensor label of the
sensor connecting
cable
Unloading pushing bar
start position detection Unload motor initialization SE2
sensor
Feeding motor start Feeding motor initialization
SE3
position sensor
Unload position sensor at Unload home position of the last
SE4
the tube rack end rack tube
Loading motor start Half motor initialization
Interruptible SE5
position sensor
photosensor
Loading motor end Loading motor end position
SE6
position sensor
Counter of the tube rack Position detection at the right of
SE7
start position tube rack
Counter of the tube rack Position detection at the left of
SE8
end position tube rack
Unloading tray full Detecting the unloading tray is
SE29
detection sensor full
Micro-switch Loading tray loading Detect whether there are tube
S2
in-position micro-switch racks in the loading tray
4.10.10.8.2 Tube Rack Loading In-Position Detection Switch
Tools
M1.5 cross-head screwdriver
Procedure
1Remove the micro-switch using the cross-head screwdriver;

2Unplug the cables connected to the micro-switch, and then install a new switch.

1 SWITCH
M07-00143S---
micro-switch
4.10.10.8.3 Counter Unit Sensor
Tools
4-233
Subsystem Functions
Procedure

3 Remove the whole counter unit;
4 Remove the M4X10 cross-recessed panhead screw with 107 cross-headed
screwdriver, and then the sensor inside the counter can be replaced;
Figure 4-227 Removing the counter sensor

1 Sensor 011-000022-00 3 M4X10 \
cross-recessed
panhead screw
4.10.10.8.4 Sensor inside the Loading Unit
Tools
Procedure
4-234
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-228 Loading unit

Linear guide rail 032-000134-00
s pulley
s belt
M6C-010001---
pulley
4.10.10.8.5 Sensor inside the Feeding Unit
Tools
Procedure
4-235
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-229 Feeding unit

1 Synchronous 5 Synchronous M6C-020006---
M6C-010002--
pulley belt
2 Linear guide rail 032-000134-00 6 Towline BA33-10-35085
3 Stepping motor 3100-21-49048 7 Sensor 011-000021-00
4 Synchronous M6C-010001---
pulley
4.10.10.8.6 Unloading Unit Sensor
Tools
Procedure
4-236
Subsystem Functions


1 4 Synchronou M6C-010002--
s pulley
M6C-010001---
pulley
3 Synchronous 6 Linear guide M6H-010003---
801-3110-00155-00
belt rail
4.10.10.8.7 Unloading Tray Full Detection Sensor
Tools
Procedure
Note: the procedure of replacing this sensor is the same to that of the tube detection
assembly sensor.
4-237
Subsystem Functions
1 Dismount the autoloader;

3 Remove the transmissive sensor using the screwdriver, and then unplug the cables
connected to it;
4 Install a new sensor.
Figure 4-232 Unloading tray full detection sensor

1 Transmissive sensor 801-3201-00036-0 M3X8 panhead \
0 screws (small)
2 Transmissive sensor \ Autoloader deck \
bracket installation plate (A)
plate
4
4.10.10.8.8 Mixing Assembly Sensors
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
Procedure
1 Open the front cover and left door of the instrument;
2 Find the sensors in the mixing assembly, and remove the fixing screws using the
cross-head screwdriver. Install new sensors.
4-238
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-233 Position of the sensors and stepping motor
No. Name No. Name

1 Sensor of the piercing cylinder 5 Pincher rotation Home position sensor
2 End position sensor of the 6 Pincher rotation step motor
pincher elevating
3 Home position sensor of the 7 End position sensor of the pincher
pincher elevating extension
4 End position sensor of the 8 Home position sensor of the pincher
pincher elevating extension
The sensors used in the mixing assembly are the same.

1 Sensor 011-000021-00
4-239
Subsystem Functions
4.11 Covers
4.11.1 Mechanical Appearance
Figure 4-234 Mechanical appearance

1 Top cover of the main unit / 10 Front door assembly /
2 Upper left plate of the / 11 Regulating valve
/
main unit assembly
3 Left door assembly / 12 USB assembly /
4 Lower left plate the main / 13 Right door of the main /
unit unit
5 Lower left cover / 14 Interface plate
/
assembly
6 Auto loading assembly / 15 Back plate of the
/
main unit
7 Protective cover / 16 Electric interface /
assembly
8 Upper left cover assembly / 17 Pneumatic assembly /
9 Lower right cover /
4-240
Subsystem Functions
4.11.2 Mechanical Layout
Figure 4-235 Mechanical layout (covers removed) (a)

1 Valve plate assembly / 15 Dispensing position 3 /
pinch valve assembly
2 Control board assembly / 16 Front cover baffle
/
plate
3 Top supporting frame / 17 Base plate assembly
4 Staining unit / 18 Slide loading and
dispatching /
subsystem
5 Cleaning bath assembly / 19 Right plate of the /
supporting frame
6 Slide levering assembly / 20 Slide printing system /
7 Left plate of the supporting / 21 burkert valve
/
frame assembly
8 Ultrasound power / 22 Side cistern assembly
/
assembly
9 Slide basket drying / 23 Cistern assembly /
assembly
10 Heating driving assembly / 24 Back plate of the /
supporting frame
11 Slide output subsystem / 25 Power supply
/
assembly
12 Blood film drying unit / 26 Drive board assembly /
13 Crossbeam assembly / 27 Front cover
/
supporting assembly
4-241
Subsystem Functions
14 Auto sampling assembly /
Figure 4-236 Mechanical layout (covers removed) (b)

28 5.4ml metering pump / 31 Pinch valve assembly /
assembly (8mm)
29 0.3ml metering pump / 32 2.5ml syringe
assembly assembly /
(fluororubber)
30 Hydraulic pressure / 33 100ul lead screw
detection assembly driving syringe /
assembly
4-242
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-237 Mechanical layout (covers removed) (c)

34 PHOTOELEC Optical / 40 Position 2 pinch valve
/
Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm assembly
35 Protective cover of sensor / 41 Drain valve assembly /
36 Blood dispensing / 42 6ml metering pump /
assembly assembly
37 Open-vial assembly / 43 3204 power drive /
board PCBA
38 Dispensing probe cleaning / 44 Air-pressure detection /
bath board PCBA
39 Shuttle truck assembly / 45 3204 SM&S data /
board PCBA
4-243
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-238 Mechanical layout (covers removed) (d)

46 Valve drive board PCBA / 50 Humidity and /
temperature sensor
board PCBA
47 SM&S power distributor / 51 FAN 12V 49CFM
/
board PCBA 46dB 80*80*20mm
48 Probe clog detection / 52 FAN 12V 7CFM 27dB
/
board PCBA 40*40*10mm
49 Spreader slide / 53 Empty status
Y/Z-direction moving detection assembly /
assembly
4-244
Subsystem Functions
Figure4-239 Mechanical layout (covers removed) (e)

54 PHOTOELEC Optical / 55 TRANSFORMER /
Sensor 940nm 88cm INSULATE 24V
200VA
4.11.3 Mechanical system introduction

The work flow of the mechanical system is: slide loading and dispatching mechanism
inputting slides; smearing system completing the dispensing, slide printing, blood film
spreading and slide levering; the staining unit and blood film drying unit completing the
staining process; slide output subsystem outputting the finished slides.
4.11.4 Overview of FRU Replacement and Requirements

This chapter introduces the FRU replacing procedures, and the corresponding FRU codes.
The requirements for FRU replacing and servicing are as follows:
For any service procedure involving electric parts, the power shall be switched off, and
measures shall be taken to prevent static electricity
For any service procedure involving fluidics, pay attention to the fluid inside the fluidic piping.
While servicing any piping with pressure, make sure you turn off the pneumatic unit before
plugging/unplugging or replacing piping. Using tissue for protection during the service;
4-245
Subsystem Functions
After the service is completed, restart the system and wait for the completion of the startup
fluidic initialization. Confirm that the system is in a proper state after startup, and then run
samples to make sure the instruments are in good state;
For important service related to performance or parameter result, make sure you re-adjust
the gain or re-calibrate the system before putting it into use again. After services of other core
parts, such as the data board, etc., re-calibration is also needed.
4.11.5 Removing and Installing Covers
4.11.6 Opening the Left Door Assembly
Tools
/
Procedure
5 Open the left door assembly (shown in Figure 4-240).
Figure 4-240 Opening the left door

1 Permanent / 2 Left door assembly /
magnet,
external
4-246
Subsystem Functions
diameter
12mm, width
6mm, with
bright nickel
coating
4.11.7 Removing the Left Door Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Open the left door assembly,
2 Remove the 4 M3X10 sunk screw using the cross-head screwdriver (as shown in the
figure below).
Figure 4-241 Removing the left door

1 Cross-recessed / 2 Left door assembly /
sunk screw
GB/T819.1-200
0 M3X10 with
environment-fri
endly color-zinc
coating
4-247
Subsystem Functions
4.11.8 Open the Upper Left Cover Assembly
Tools
/
Procedure
1 Uplift the upper left cover assembly, revolve the stop bar that support the front cover
assembly to fix the upper left cover. Note: make the head of the stop bar fit into
corresponding slot of the front cover(as shown in Figure 4-242).
2 If you need to watch the screen after the front cover is lifted, just loosen the 2 screws
that fix the touch screen assembly without removal, and then turn and make the
touch screen hanging down naturally (as Figure shows).
Figure 4-242 Opening the upper left cover

1 Screen assembly / 3 Stop Bar of /
the Front
Cover
2 Upper left cover /
assembly
4-248
Subsystem Functions
4.11.9 Opening the Front Door Assembly
Tools
/
Procedure
8 Open the front door assembly to the right (as shown in Figure 4-154).
Figure 4-243 Opening the front door assembly

1 Front door /
assembly
4.11.10 Removing the Pneumatic Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the 2 M4X8 stainless steel screws using the cross-head screwdriver, and
remove the shielding cover of the pneumatic assembly.
2 Remove the 2 M4X12 stainless steel screws using the cross-head screwdriver, and
remove the pneumatic assembly (as shown in the figure below).
4-249
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-244 Removing the pneumatic assembly

1 Stainless steel, / 3 Shielding /
cross-recessed cover of the
panhead screw pneumatic
combination assembly
GB/T9074.4
M4X12
passivated
2 Pneumatic / 4 Stainless /
assembly steel
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
Validation
1 Connect the tubes after the installation;
4-250
Subsystem Functions
2 Start up the analyzer and check whether the pressure of the pressure system is
within the required range, make sure there is no air leakage of the pneumatic
assembly.
4.11.11 Removing the Lower Left Plate the Main Unit
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the left door;

2 Remove the pneumatic assembly;
3 Remove the 2 M4X8 stainless steel screws using the cross-head screwdriver;
4 Lift the posterior part of the lower left plate (the corner) up by 3-4mm and pull it back
by about 15mm, and then remove the lower left plate (as shown in Figure 4-156).
10
4-251
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-245 Removing the lower left plate of the main unit

1 Lower left plate / 2 Stainless /
the main unit steel,
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
Validation
Make sure the fasteners under the lower left plate are well fixed after it is mounted
4-252
Subsystem Functions
back, and the middle of the plate is not projected.
4.11.12 Removing the Top Cover of the Main Unit
Tools
Procedure
2 Move the top cover of the main unit to the back to dismount it (as shown in Figure
4-157).
11
Figure 4-246 Removing the lower left plate of the main unit

1 Top cover of the / 2 Stainless /
main unit steel,
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
4-253
Subsystem Functions
4.11.13 Removing the Upper Left Plate the Main Unit
Tools
Procedure
1 Removing the top cover of the main unit;
2 Open the upper left plate assembly;
3 Remove the 2 M4X8 stainless steel screws at the front of the instrument using a
cross-head screwdriver (as shown in Figure 4-158);
4 Open the left door assembly;
5 Remove the 2 M4X8 stainless steel screws at the back of the instrument using the
cross-head screwdriver, and then move the upper left plate of the main unit upwards
to dismount it (as shown in Figure 4-158).
12
Figure 4-247 Removing the upper left plate of the main unit (a)
4-254
Subsystem Functions
1 Upper left plate of / 2 Stainless /

the main unit steel
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
Figure 4-248 Removing the upper left cover of the main unit (b)

1 Upper left plate of / 2 Stainless /
the main unit steel
cross-recess
ed panhead
4-255
Subsystem Functions
screw
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
4.11.14 Removing the Back Plate of the Main Unit
Tools
Procedure
13Remove the M4X8 stainless steel screw using the cross-head screwdriver to
dismount the back plate of the main unit (as shown in Figure 4-249).
14
Figure 4-249 Removing the back plate of the main unit

1 Back plate of the / 2 Stainless /
main unit steel
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
4-256
Subsystem Functions
4.11.15 Removing the Right Door of the Main Unit
Tools
Procedure
2 Move the right door of the main unit to the back of the instrument by 15mm, and then
lift it up by 5mm, after which you can remove it from the right side (as shown in
Figure 4-250).
15
Figure 4-250 Removing the right door of the main unit

1 Right door of the / 2 Stainless /
main unit steel,
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
GB9074.4
4-257
Subsystem Functions
M4X8
burnished
4.11.16 Removing the Protective Shield
Tools
Procedure
2 Remove the 2 M4X8 screws using the cross-head screwdriver;
3 Move the protective shield upwards to dismount it (as shown in Figure 4-251).
Figure 4-251 Removing the protective shield

1 Protective cover / 2 M4X8 screw /
4.11.17 Removing the Lower Left Cover
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the lower left cover of the main unit;
3 Remove the protective shield.
4-258
Subsystem Functions
4 Remove the 2 M4X6 sunk screws and 1 M4X8 screw using a cross-head
screwdriver.
5 Remove the lower left cover (as shown in Figure 4-252).
16
Figure 4-252 Removing the lower left cover

1 Lower left cover / 3 M4X8 screw /
2 M4X6 sunk screw /
4.11.18 Removing the Lower Right Cover
Tools
Procedure

2 Open the front door assembly;
3 Remove the protective shield;
4 Remove the right door of the main unit;
5 Remove the 2 M4X8 screw of the front cover baffle plate using the cross-head
screwdriver to dismount the lower right cover.
6 Remove the 2 M4X6 sunk screws and 2 M4X8 screw using the cross-head
screwdriver.
7 Remove the lower right cover (as shown in Figure 4-253).
17
4-259
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-253 Removing the lower right cover

1 M4X6 sunk screw / 3 Front cover /
baffle plate
2 Lower right cover / 4 M4X8 screw /
4.11.19 Open the Cistern Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the back plate of the main unit;

3 Open the cistern assembly (as shown in Figure 4-254).
18
4-260
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-254 Open the cistern assembly

1 Cistern assembly / 2 Stainless /
steel,
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
M4X8
burnished
4.11.20 Drive Board Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1Remove the back plate of the main unit;

3 Open the drive board assembly (as shown in Figure 4-255).
19
4-261
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-255 Open the drive board assembly

1 Drive board / 2 Stainless /
assembly steel,
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
M4X8
burnished
4.11.21 Opening the Control Board Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Removing the top cover of the main unit;

2 Remove the 2 M4X8 screws and 2 M4X12 screws using the cross-head screwdriver.
3Lift the control board assembly as shown in Figure 4-256 (pay attention to the
4-262
Subsystem Functions
wires).
Figure 4-256 Opening the control board assembly

1 Control board / 3 M4X8 screw /
assembly
2 M4X8 screw 4 Washer /
4.11.22 Opening the Side Cistern Assembly
Tools
Procedure
3 Open the side cistern assembly (as shown in Figure 4-257).
20
4-263
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-257 Opening the side cistern assembly

1 Side cistern / 2 Stainless /
assembly steel,
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
combination
M4X8
burnished
4.11.23 Removing the Power Supply Assembly
Tools
Procedure

3 Remove the power assembly (shown in Figure 4-258) out from the instrument. Pay
attention to the wires.
21
4-264
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-258 Removing the power assembly

1 Power supply / 2 Stainless /
assembly steel
cross-recess
ed panhead
screw
GB9074.4
M4X8
burnished
Validation
1 Make sure all wires are correctly connected after replacing the assembly;
2 Switch on the power of the instrument, and check whether the instrument starts up
and is initialized properly.
4.11.24 Removing the Ultrasound Power Assembly
Tools
Inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
2 Remove the 2 M4X8 inner hexagon screws with its flat washers using the inner
4-265
Subsystem Functions
hexagon spanner.
3 Remove the ultrasound power assembly (shown in Figure 4-259) out from the
instrument. Pay attention to the wires while removing.
22
Figure 4-259 Removing the ultrasound power assembly

1 Ultrasound power / 2 M4X8 inner /
assembly hexagon
screws and
flat washer
Validation
4.11.25 Removing the Heating Driving Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the lower left plate of the main unit;
hexagon spanner.
3 Remove the heating driving assembly (shown in Figure 4-260) out from the
4-266
Subsystem Functions
instrument. Pay attention to the wires while removing.

23
Figure 4-260 Removing the heating driving assembly

1 Heating driving / 2 M4X8 inner /
assembly of the hexagon
right door screws and
flat washer
Validation
4.11.26 Removing the Power Switch 85-264VAC 24V 150W
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the power assembly;
4-267
Subsystem Functions
2 Remove the 8 M4X8 screws in the power box cover using the cross-head
screwdriver;
3 Remove the power box cover;
4 Remove the 4 M4X8 screws in the shielding cover of the power assembly using the
cross-head screwdriver.
5 Remove the shielding cover of the power assembly.
6 Unplug the wires connected to the power switch 85-264VAC 24V 150W;
7 Remove the M3X8 screw of the power switch 85-264VAC 24V 150W (as shown in
Figure 4-261) Pay attention to the wires while removing.
24
Figure 4-261 Removing the power switch 85-264VAC 24V 150W

1 Power box cover / 4 Removing /
the Power
Switch
85-264VAC
24V 150W
2 M4X8 screw / 5 Input voltage /
patching
board PCBA
3 Shielding cover of / 6 3204 power /
the power board PCBA
assembly.
4-268
Subsystem Functions
Validation
4.11.27 Removing the Input Voltage Patching Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
Same as removing the power switch 85-264VAC 24V 150W.
Validation
4.11.28 Removing the 3204 Power Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
Same as removing the power switch 85-264VAC 24V 150W.
Validation
4.11.29 Removing the Data and COME Board Assembly
Tools
4-269
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
1 Remove the top cover of the main unit;

2 Removing the Data and COME board assembly;
3 Remove the the M3X8 screw of the data and COME board assembly using the
screwdriver;
4 Remove the data and COME board assembly.
25
Validation
4.11.30 Removing the Valve Drive Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
2 Open the drive board assembly;
3 Unplug the wires connected to the valve drive board PCBA;
4 Remove the M3X8 screw on the valve drive board PCBA using the screwdriver.
5 Remove the valve drive board PCBA.
26
Validation
4.11.31 Removing the Probe Clog Detection Board PCBA

Tools
Procedure
Same as removing the valve drive board PCBA.
27
4-270
Subsystem Functions
Validation
4.11.32 Removing the Power Distributor Board PCBA

Tools
Procedure
Same as removing the valve drive board PCBA.
28
Validation
4.11.33 Removing the Humidity and Temperature Sensor Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the upper left plate of the main unit;
2 Unplug the wires connected to the humidity and temperature sensor board PCBA.
3 Remove the M3X8 screw on the humidity and temperature sensor board PCBA
using the screwdriver.
4 Remove the humidity and temperature sensor board PCBA.
29
Validation
30
4-271
Subsystem Functions
4.11.34 Removing the Air-pressure Detection Board PCBA
Tools
Procedure
2 Open the cistern assembly;
3 Unplug the tubes and wires;
5 Remove the air-pressure detection board PCBA (as shown in Figure 4-262).
31
Figure 4-262 Removing the air-pressure detection board PCBA

1 M3X8 screw / 3 Air-pressure /
detection
board PCBA
2 Protective plate of /
the air pressure
detection board
Validation
1 Make sure all tubes and wires are correctly connected after replacing the assembly;
and is initialized properly;
within the required range, make sure there is no air leakage of the tubing.
4-272
Subsystem Functions
4.11.35 Removing the Slide Basket Drying Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the 3 M4X12 screws and the 2 washers using the cross-head screwdriver;
2 Unplug the wires connected to the assembly;
3 Remove the slide basket drying assembly (as shown in Figure 4-263).
32
Figure4-263 Removing the slide basket drying assembly

1 Slide basket / 3 Washer /
drying assembly
2 M4X12 screw
Validation
2 Switch on the power, and check whether the assembly works properly.
4-273
Subsystem Functions
4.11.36 Removing the Blood Dispensing Assembly
Tools
Procedure
3 Remove the slide storage box;
5 Unplug the tubes and wires connected to the blood dispensing assembly.
6 Remove the 2 M4X8 screws at the lower part of the blood dispensing assembly, and
loosen the 2 M4X8 on the upper part.
7 Move the blood dispensing assembly upwards until its hardy hole is parted from the
screw. Move the assembly to the right side until the motor at the left side is fully
revealed. Move the blood dispensing assembly forward to dismount it (as shown in
Figure 4-264).
Figure 4-264 Removing the blood dispensing assembly

1 Blood dispensing / 3 M4X8 screw /
4-274
Subsystem Functions
assembly
2 Front cover baffle
plate
Validation
1 Make sure all tubes and wires are correctly connected after replacing the assembly;
within the required range, make sure there is no leakage of the tubing.
4.11.37 Removing the Open-Vial Assembly
Tools
Procedure
3 Remove the slide storage box;
5 Unplug the cables connected to the open-vial assembly;
6 Remove the 3 M4X10 panhead screws and the wire harness retainer.
7 Remove the 4 M4X8 screws of the assembly using the cross-head screwdriver;
8 Move the open-vial assembly until the motor on the bottom is fully revealed. Tilt the
upper part of the open-vial assembly, and take out the assembly from above (as
shown in Figure 4-265).
4-275
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-265 Removing the open-vial assembly

1 Open-vial / 4 M4X10 /
assembly panhead
screw
2 M4X8 screw / 5 Front cover /
baffle plate
3 Wire harness /
retainer
Validation
4-276
Subsystem Functions
4.11.38 Removing the Slide Levering Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the lower left plate of the main unit;
2 Remove the slide basket drying assembly;
hexagon spanner.
4 Unplug the wires connected to the assembly;
5 Remove the assembly (as shown in Figure 4-266).
Figure 4-266 Removing the slide levering assembly

1 Slide levering / 2 M4X8 inner /
assembly hexagon
screws and
flat washer
Validation
4-277
Subsystem Functions
4.11.39 Removing the Slide Loading and Dispatching Subsystem
Tools
Procedure
4 Remove the lower right cover;
screwdriver to dismount the lower right cover;
6 Remove the 4 M4X12 inner hexagon screws with its spring washers using the inner
hexagon spanner;
7 Unplug the rubber tubes and the wires;
8 Move the slide loading and dispatching subsystem upwards until it is completely
separated from the bottom plate, and then remove it from the front (as shown in
Figure 4-267).
Figure 4-267 Removing the slide loading and dispatching subsystem
4-278
Subsystem Functions

1 Front cover baffle / 3 M4x12 inner /
plate hexagon
screw and
spring
washer
2 M4X8 screw 4 Slide loading
and
dispatching
subsystem
Validation
4.11.40 Removing the Cleaning Bath Assembly
Tools
Procedure
1 Remove the top cover of the main unit;
2 Open the control board assembly;
4 Loosen the 2 M3X8 inner hexagon screws using the inner hexagon spanner. Move
the assembly leftwards until the hardy hole is apart from the screw. Remove the
assembly from the above (as shown in Figure 4-268).
4-279
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-268 Removing the cleaning bath assembly

1 Cleaning bath / 2 M3X8 inner /
assembly hexagon
screw
Validation
1 Connect the tubes and wires after the installation;
within the required range;
4.11.41 Removing the Dispensing Probe Cleaning Bath
Tools
Procedure
2 Unplug all tubes connected to the assembly;
3 Loosen the 2 M3X16 inner hexagon screws using the inner hexagon spanner, and
then remove the assembly (as shown in Figure 4-269).
4-280
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-269 Dispensing probe cleaning bath

1 Dispensing probe / 2 M3X16 inner /
cleaning bath hexagon
screws
Validation
1 Connect the tubes after the installation;
within the required range.
4.11.42 Removing the Blood Film drying Unit
Tools
Procedure
2 Remove the upper left plate of the main unit;
3 Remove the lower left cover;
4 Unplug all tubes and wires connected to the assembly;
5 Remove the 2 M3X16 panhead screws and the sprint/flat washer at the front of the
assembly using the cross-head screwdriver, and then remove the 2 M3X16 panhead
screws and the flat washers at the back;
6 Remove the assembly (as shown in Figure 4-270).
4-281
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-270 Removing the blood film drying unit

1 Blood film drying / 2 M3X16 /
unit panhead
screw and
spring/flat
washer
Validation
4-282
Subsystem Functions
4.11.43 Removing the Staining Unit
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, inner hexagon spanner
Procedure
2 Remove the left door;
4 Remove the 2 M4X6 sunk screw fixing the left plate of the frame using the
cross-head screwdriver, and then remove the left plate of the frame;
5 Remove the 4 M8X16 inner hexagon screws and its spring washers fixing the
staining unit using the inner hexagon spanner;
6 Unplug all tubes and wires connected to the assembly;
7 Remove the staining unit (as shown in Figure 4-271).
Figure 4-271 Removing the staining unit

1 Inner hexagon / 4 Left plate of /
spanner the
4-283
Subsystem Functions
supporting
frame
2 M8X16 inner / 5 M4X8 inner /
hexagon screw hexagon
and spring washer screw
3 M4X6 sunk screw /
Validation
4.11.44 Removing the Auto Loading Assembly
Tools
Procedure
2 Remove the protective shield;
5 Move the auto loading assembly backwards, and then remove it (as shown in Figure
4-272).
4-284
Subsystem Functions
Figure 4-272 Removing the auto loading assembly

1 Auto loading / 3 Bridging /
assembly beam of the
autoloader
2 M4X8 screw /
Validation
4.11.45 Removing the Bridging Beam of the Autoloader
Tools
4-285
Subsystem Functions
Procedure
1 Remove the auto loading assembly;

2 Remove the M4X8 screw using the cross-head screwdriver;
3 Move the bridging beam of the autoloader forward to remove the beam (as shown in
Figure 4-273).
Figure 4-273 Removing the bridging beam of the autoloader

1 Bridging beam of / 2 M4X8 screw /
the autoloader
4.11.46 Pneumatic Unit
Tools
Cross-head screwdriver, tweezers, monkey spanner
Procedure
Note: the pneumatic unit differs according to the power specification used in site. Pay
attention to the power specification while applying for service parts of the pneumatic unit.
4The pneumatic unit can be replaced separately:
5Remove the left and right door and top cover of the pneumatic unit using the
cross-head screwdriver;
6The pneumatic control board can be replaced separately after removing its
shielding cover;
7Remove and replace the filter using the spanner;
8Unplug the pneumatic tubes and remove the pressure regulator;
9The fuse of the pneumatic unit is located inside the power socket box. Open the
socket box using the tweezers, and replace the fuse;
There are 3 types of the pneumatic unit FRU based on the difference in specifications.
1 Pneumatic unit 801-3201-00051-00 3 Pneumatic unit 801-3201-00069-00
4-286
Subsystem Functions
(220V) (220V,
international)
2 Pneumatic
801-3201-00068-00
unit(110V)
Figure 4-274 Replacing the air pump
Figure4-275 Replacing the fuse of the pneumatic unit

1 Pneumatic unit 4 THOMAS air pump
051-000760-00 801-3100-00238-00
control board (220V)
2 Pressure 5 Fuse of the
regulator of the 801-3100-00027-00 pneumatic unit M07-00067F---
pneumatic unit (110V)
3 5 Fuse of the
Filters 801-3110-00217-00 pneumatic unit M07-00046F---
(220V)
4-287
Subsystem Functions
Validation
1 Make sure the pneumatic unit works properly and the output pressures are abnormal
after startup.
4.12 Open-Vial Unit

4.12.1 Open-vial Assembly
Figure 4-276 Open-vial assembly

1 Driven wheel assembly 115-014632- 9 Uncapped tube
/
00
2 Open-vial sensor baffle / 10 1.5ml centrifugal tube /
3 Synchronous flat-toothed M6C-020003 11 1.5ml centrifugal tube /
belt.160MXL025 rubber --- adapter
4 Stepping motor 3.7V 1.8 12 Anticoagulant tube
0000-10-109
degree 3.2kgfcm single /
85
shaft
5 Sensor PHOTOELEC 011-000021- 13 Anticoagulant tube adapter
/
Optical Sensor IP55 00
4-288
Subsystem Functions
940nm 15cm
6 Linear guide rail 14 0.5ml centrifugal tube /
set.MGN9-C1-R155-Z0C /
M
7 Adapter accommodator 15 0.5ml centrifugal tube /
/
adapter
8 Uncapped tube adapter /

The open-vial assembly is designed to enable open-vial sample aspiration.
The step motor provides the driving power, the synchronous pulley and belt are driven, the
linear guide rail provides guidance, and a sensor position setting point provides the function
of position initialization.
Different adapters are designed to accommodate different sample containers, which support
the minimum sampling volume requirement. The open-vial assembly supports uncapped
evacuated blood collection tube, anticoagulant tube, 1.5ml centrifugal tube, and 0.5ml
centrifugal tube.
4.12.4 Replacing the wipe block

1Unplug the rubber tube connected to the open-vial probe wipe;
2Twist the 2 poles counterclockwise and then pull them out;
3Remove the open-vial probe wipe;
4Replace with a new open-vial probe wipe, insert the fixing poles, and twist them
clockwise to tighten them;
5Connect the rubber tube to the open-vial probe wipe;
6Move the dispensing probe up and down, making sure that it can move smoothly
without clamping stagnation from the probe wipe.
4-289
Subsystem Functions

1 Dispensing probe / 4 Probe wipe fixing /
pressing ring pedestal
2 Cylindrical shell / 5 Fixing poles of the /
fixing the probe wipe
dispensing probe
with spring
3 Blood dispensing 115-017561-00 6 Open-vial probe 041-000976-00
probe wipe
Validation
4.12.5 Maintaining the Open-Vial Assembly

Tools
1 107 cross-head screwdriver
4-290
Subsystem Functions
Inner hexagon spanner (1 suite)
4.12.6 Removing the Open-vial Assembly

1Open the front cover assembly, right cover, and top cover;
2Unplug the cables connected to the open-vial assembly;
3Remove the 4 M4x8 screws fixing the open-vial assembly using the cross-head
screwdriver, and then dismount the open-vial assembly from the instrument.

1 M4X8 screw / 2 Open-vial assembly 115-016088-00

You don't need to dismount the open-vial assembly from the instrument before replacing
sensors.
1Unplug the connected cables of the sensor;
2Remove the M4x16 inner hexagon screw fixing the sensor using the inner
hexagon spanner, and then dismount the sensor;
3Mount the new sensor;
4Connect the sensor cables;
4-291
Subsystem Functions
5Readjust the sensors after replacement. See ..... for the procedure.
4.12.8 Replacing the Motor

Before replacing the motor, you need to dismount the open-vial assembly from the
instrument.
1Dismount the open-vial assembly from the instrument;
2Remove the 4 M3x8 screws (with big washer) using the cross-head screwdriver,
and then dismount the motor and the synchronous pulley;
3Mount and pre-tighten the new motor (with synchronous pulley), strain the
synchronous belt manually, and then tighten the retaining screws;
4Mount the open-vial assembly back, and adjust the position of the assembly to
make its axle aligned with that of the dispensing probe;
5Plug the cables connected to the motor.

1 Stepping motor 3.7V 1.8 3 Sensor PHOTOELEC 011-000021-00
degree 3.2kgfcm single Optical Sensor IP55

TBD
shaft, with synchronous 940nm 15cm
pulley
2 M3x8 with big /

washer
4-292
Subsystem Functions
4.13 Replacing the Wearing Parts

4.13.1 List of Wearing Parts
Table 4-6 List of Wearing Parts
No. Name FRU Code Function Service Remark

Life s
By the side of the
20 30000
1 Piercing unit 801-3201-00043-00 auto loading piercing
weeks times
cylinder
On the left of the
2 Air filter 801-3201-00024-00 2 years \
back plate
Air filter. Film type On the left of the
3 801-3201-00023-00 4 years \
IDG5-02 back plate
Vacuum overflow By the side of the left
4 801-3201-00008-00 4 years \
valve regulator
Sheath fluid filter By the side of the Half a
5 801-3201-00065-00 \
LF3 diluent heating bath year
Cylinder liner
Inside the THOMAS 11800
6 (THOMAS air 801-3110-00215-00 4 years
air pump hours
pump FRU
Piston ring
Inside the THOMAS 11800
7 (THOMAS air 801-3110-00216-00 4 years
air pump hours
pump FRU)
Rotary pressure On the rotary
8 043-001082-00 1 years \
head patch scanning assembly
NRBC diaphragm On the fluidic valve Half a
9 801-3100-00059-00 \
pump of the back plate year
4-293
Fluidics
5 Fluidics
5.1 Fluidic Structure
5.1.1 Fluidics System Introduction
The fluidics system of the SM&S includes 3 subsystems.
Sampling & Dispensing Subsystem
Spreader Slide Cleaning Subsystem
Reagent Metering & Cycling Subsystem
See the following fluidics diagram:
5-1
Fluidics
Piercing probe
wipe
Blood sensor1
Piercing T88
PV01/GV25 PV02/GV21 Baffle plate
190uL Diluent detection
probe connector
C93 C5 C7 C96 C35 photocoupler 4 C34
T4-J1 C72 C73
T10 T11 J7 T14-J8-P4 T91 T87 T86 T85
C74 C75
J3 T101
T5-J2 T9-P1 C77 T178
C94 T99 C76
T1 C3 C78 C79
Blood sensor2 T90 T103 T179
J5-T13-J6 Dispensing
C80 C81
T6 probe T97 T180
LC-A
Hydraulic
C82 C83
-40KPa
-40KPa
-40KPa
70KPa
OPEN
sensor
70KPa
OPEN
T95
PS1
C4 T181
Open-vial
probe T182
C8 SV02 SV07 SV06 GV42 SV01 SV08 SV05 SV04
T20 wipe GV58 GV54
T7 T183
-40KPa
70KPa
-40KPa
-40KPa
70KPa
C37
70KPa
OPEN
CV
Dispensing probe
C27
TS
T17 T192 GV44
cleaning bath
1 T21 C28 T114
-40KPa
-40KPa
OPEN
C1
70KPa
T92 C84
WC-W4
WC-W3
WC-W1
WC-W2
T19 C24 GV56
GV46 GV50
Deionized
T16 T73
methanol
T96
Diluent container
Stain A2
T2
solution
Stain A
C85
Buffer
water
PV03/GV2 T74 T69T70 T72 T52 GV52
OF1
GV57 T18 T66 C30 GV39
T184
0 T65 C25
100uLsyringe
T68 LF2 GV48
2.5mL syringe
T12-P3 C9 C11 C12 T102
T100 C88 Reagent
T23 T24 LC-D LC-M TC3
PV04/GV16 PV05/GV15 TC4 T104 T98 T54 container
T29 T78 T64 T189
TC2 T49 T75 T55
T193
70KPa
C2 LC-A1 T154T48 T57 T58

C92 T50 T76
C13
T81 T89
T42 T80
TC6 LC-A2 TC5 TC1 TC7
T28 LC-W TC9
T22 LC-A LC-P
WC-B2
LF1
WC-B1
C29 WC-W C26
T34 T59
C20 T82 T51
C91 T105 T84
J9-T27-J10
C36 T79 T63
J19-Ta5-J20 C31
LVM valve manifold C90 C39 T93
250KPa
B C D E F C32 C33 C48

T35 T36 SV69
T111
T106 SV68 T142 T195
GV24 SV32 SV34 SV37 SV35 SV33 SV31 SV03 PV11/GV11
T107 T112
-40KPa
70KPa
T62
C18
SV36 T113 T194
SV71 C38 SV72 C40
C21 T116 T115
T109
T3 T133 C49
J11-Ta1-J12 T94 T175
T123
H
G A T108 GV47 Waste
C22 SV62
C95 C17
-40KPa
PV07/GV13 connector 2
70KPa
T31
-40KPa
T26
-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
J4 C19
T39 T40 T32 T150
DP4 SV65
Ultrasonic 6mL T124
cleaning bath T83 PV09/GV1 SV73 GV43
C53 T128
T110 8 T151 C43 GV53 GV51
T139
SV61 C42 C41
70KPa
T126
-40KPa
T138
WC-B1
T120 T119 T118 T149 T125
detection photocoupler
C54
OF2
C16
T117 C52 T155
Liquid discharging
T191
T121 T53 T152 C46 T177
2T127
T148 DP2
WC-B2
GV45 DP1 DP6

SV63 0.3mL C55 C56
0.3mL T130 6mL
PV06/GV14
-40KPa
70KPa
OF1
GF1
T156
WC-W3
T140
LC-A
GV55 C57
Overflow bath T153
Liquid discharging
T41 C14 C15 DP5
photocoupler 3
T25 GV41 70KPa T122 T147 SV64 T157
6mL SV67
detection
C10 T44 C66 C71
C67 C44
C89 T185 T132 T129
T43 T143 C68 T137 C70
C65 T160
photocoupler 5
C64 T168 SV70 T173

photocoupler 1
C61 T190 C62 C63 C69 T131
discharging
T169
discharging
detection
T45 T167 T172

detection
Liquid
T163 T166 T170 T158

Liquid
T164 T165
WC-W1
WC-W2
Probe No. 2
Probe No. 2
T171 T136 SV66

Probe No. 6
Probe No. 1
Probe No. 5
Probe No. 4
Probe No. 5
Probe No. 4
C58
Probe No. 1
Probe No. 7
Probe No. 3
Probe No. 2
SV10 C45 T134
WC_B TC8 T159
-40KPa
70KPa
T46 C59
C23 T186 T144
T188 T146 T135 GV49
T174
T61 T161
PV10/GV17 Waste
C86 PV13/GV22 C87 C50 container
C47 PV12/GV12 PV08/GV19 C51 C60
Pos. 3
Pos. 1 Pos. 2 Pos. 4 T162 WC-W4
T176
T141 T187 T145 DP3

5.4mL
Waste connector 1
Waste
container
5-2
Fluidics
The Sampling & Dispensing Subsystem and Spreader Slide Cleaning Subsystem both use
diluent, the fluidics diagram is as follows:
Piercing probe
wipe
Blood sensor1
Piercing T88
PV01/GV25 PV02/GV21
190uL Diluent detection
probe
C93 C5 C7 C96 C35 photocoupler 4 C34
T4-J1 C72 C73
T10 T11 J7 T14-J8-P4 T87 T86 T85
J3
T9-P1 T91
T5-J2
C94
T1 C3
Blood sensor2 J5-T13-J6 Dispensing
T6 probe T178
Hydraulic
-40KPa
sensor
70KPa
PS1
C4 Open-vial
probe
C8 SV02
T20 wipe GV58
T7
Dispensing probe
TS
CV1 T17 T192
cleaning bath
T21
C1
T92 C84
T19
T16 T73
Diluent container
T2 C85
T74
OF1
PV03/GV20 GV57 T18
T184
100uLsyringe
T12-P3 2.5mL syringe C9 C11 C12
T23 T24 LC-D
PV04/GV16 PV05/GV15 TC4
T29
T193
70KPa
C2 C92
C13
T81
T42
T28
T22
WC-B2
LF1
T34 WC-B1
C20 T82
C91
J9-T27-J10
J19-Ta5-J20 C31
LVM valve manifold
250KPa
T35 T36 B C D E F
GV24 SV32 SV34 SV37 SV35 SV33 SV31
SV36
C21
T3
J11-Ta1-J12
H A
C22 G
C95
T31
J4 C19
T39 T40 T32
Ultrasonic
cleaning bath T83
WC-B1
OF2
T191
WC-B2
PV06/GV14
-40KPa
OF1
70KPa
GF1
T41 C14 C15 Overflow bath

T25 GV41
C10 T44
T43
T45
SV10
WC_B TC8
T46
C23
T174
T61
C47 PV12/GV12
T176
T141
Waste connector 1
Waste
container
5-3
Fluidics
The fluidics diagram of the Reagent Metering & Cycling Subsystem is as follows:
Baffle plate
connector
C74 C75
T101
C76 C77
T99
T90 C78 C79
T103 T179
C80 C81
T97 T180
LC-A
C82 C83
-40KPa
-40KPa
OPEN
70KPa
OPEN
T95 T181
T182
SV07 GV54 SV06 GV42 SV01 SV08 SV05 SV04
T183
-40KPa
70KPa
-40KPa
-40KPa
70KPa
C37
70KPa
OPEN
C27
C28 GV44 T114
-40KPa
-40KPa
OPEN
70KPa
WC-W4
WC-W3
WC-W1
WC-W2
C24 GV56 GV50
Deionized
GV46
Methanol
Stain A2
solution
Stain A
T96
Buffer
water
T69 T70 T72 T52 GV52
T66 C30 GV39
T65 T68 LF2 GV48 C25
T102
T100 C88 Reagent
LC-M TC3 T98 T54 container
T104 T78 T189
T75 T64
TC2 T49 T55
LC-A1 T154T48 T57 T58
T50 T76
T80 T89
TC6 LC-A2 TC5 TC1 TC7
LC-W TC9
LC-A LC-P
C29 WC-W C26
T59
T105 T51
T84
C36 T79 T63
C90 C39 T93
C32 C33 C48
SV69
T111
T106 SV68 T142 T195
T107 T112 SV03 PV11/GV11
-40KPa
70KPa
T62
C18
T113 T194
SV71 C38 SV72 C40
T109 T116 T115
T133 C49
T94 T175
T123
T108 GV47 Waste
SV62
PV07/GV13 C17 connector 2
-40KPa
70KPa
-40KPa
T26
-40KPa
70KPa
70KPa
DP4 T150
SV65
6mL T124
SV73 GV43
PV09/GV18 C53 T128
T110 T151 C43 GV53 GV51
T139
SV61 C42 C41 T126
70KPa
-40KPa
detection photocoupler 2
T138
T120 T119 T118 T149 T125
C16 C54
Liquid discharging
T117 C52 T155

T121 T53 T152 C46 T177
T127
T148 DP1 DP2

SV63 GV45 C56 DP6
0.3mL T130 0.3mL C55
6mL
T156
WC-W3
T140
detection photocoupler 3
LC-A
GV55 C57
Liquid discharging
DP5 T153
70KPa T122 T147 SV64 T157
6mL SV67
C66 C71
C67 C44
C89 T185 T132 T129
T143 C68 T137 C70
C65 T160
photocoupler 5
C64 SV70 T173

photocoupler 1
C61 T190 C62 C63 T168 C69 T131

discharging
T169
discharging
detection
T167 T172
detection
Liquid
T163 T166 T170 T158

Liquid
T164 T165
WC-W1
WC-W2
Probe No. 2
Probe No. 2
T171 T136 SV66

Probe No. 6
Probe No. 1
Probe No. 5
Probe No. 4
Probe No. 5
Probe No. 4
C58
Probe No. 1
Probe No. 7
Probe No. 3
Probe No. 2
C45 T134
T159
-40KPa
70KPa
T186 C59
T188 T144 T146 T135 GV49
T161
PV10/GV17 Waste
C86 PV13/GV22 C87 C50 container
PV08/GV19 C51 C60
Pos. 3
1 Pos. 2 Pos. 4 T162 WC-W4
T187 T145 DP3
5.4mL
5.1.2 Fluidics Component Introduction

This section introduces the fluidics components and their functions, the symbols refer to the
symbols in the fluidics diagram.
LVM valve
Symbols:
Two-way valve (NC) Two-way valve (NO) Three-way valve
Appearance:
5-4
Fluidics
Model:
LVM 2-way normally closed valve model: LVM10R3-6A-2-Q
LVM 2-way normally open valve model: LVM10R4-6A-2-Q
LVM 3-way valve model: LVM105R-6A-2-Q
ID
Material ID
LVM 2-way normally closed valve
body
http://mindraysrm.mindray.com:80 115-022504-00
80/part/Materiel.aspx?Code=115-
022504-00%20%20%20%20%20
LVM 2-way normally open valve
bodyhttp://mindraysrm.mindray.co
m:8080/part/Materiel.aspx?Code= 115-022505-00
115-022505-00%20%20%20%20
%20
LVM fluidic valve body 115-010436-00
Function
2-way normally closed valve: for liquid transmission control. When the electromagnetic valve is
not electrified, the input and output ports are blocked; when the electromagnetic valve is
electrified, the input and output ports are connected.
2-way normally open valve: for liquid transmission control. When the electromagnetic valve is
not electrified, the input and output ports are connected; when the electromagnetic valve is
electrified, the input and output ports are blocked.
3-way valve: switches channels. When the electromagnetic valve is not electrified, the
common port and normally open port are connected; when the electromagnetic valve is
electrified, the common port and normally closed port are connected.
Note: the voltage of the LVM valves is DC 12V, the pressure range is -75~250KPa.
BURKERT valve
Symbols:
2-way valve 3-way valve
5-5
Fluidics
Appearance:
2-way valve (6128-2, 6628) 3-way valve (6128-3)
Model:
There are 2 models of 2-way BURKERT valve: 6628A and 6606A
3-way BURKERT valve: 6128-3
ID
Material ID
6606A BURKERT valve 115-022605-00
6628A BURKERT valve 115-022606-00
3-way BURKERT valve body 115-010435-00
Function
2-way BURKERT valve (6628A) 082-001596-00: priming the cisterns. When the
electromagnetic valve is not electrified, the input and output ports are blocked; when the
electromagnetic valve is electrified, the input and output ports are connected; priming can be
performed then.
2-way BURKERT valve (6606A) 082-000050-00: measuring reagents and controlling reagent
dispensing of the Cycling Subsystem. When the electromagnetic valve is not electrified, the
input and output ports are blocked; when the electromagnetic valve is electrified, the input and
output ports are connected; dispensing can be performed then.
3-way BURKERT valve (6128-3): controlling deionized water dispensing. When the
electromagnetic valve is not electrified, the common port and normally open port are
connected, and the dosing pump aspirates deionized water; when the electromagnetic valve is
5-6
Fluidics
electrified, the common port and normally closed port are connected and the dosing pump
dispenses deionized water.
Note: the voltage of the BURKERT valve is DC-12V. The 6128-2 BURKERT 2-way valve
controls the priming of the cisterns; The 6628 2-way BURKERT valve controls the reagent
dispensing at position 1~3; and the 6128-3 3-way BURKERT valve controls the deionized
water dispensing at position 4.
Draining valve (steel)

Symbol:
Appearance:
ID
Material ID
SMC fluidic valve (with connector) 115-007950-00
Function:
To drain the liquid accumulated during the process of air filtration. There is only one steel valve
(SV10) used in the SM&S, located under the air filter.
Note: the draining valve can provide passage for large particles (up to 150um). The maximal
bearable pressure is 400KPa, and the operating voltage is 12V. The end marked as "1" is the
inlet of the valve, and the other end is the outlet. There is an arrow on bottom of the valve,
indicating the direction of connecting the valve.
1-way valve
Symbol:
Appearance:
5-7
Fluidics
ID
Material ID
Pneulinesupply duckbillcheck
BA40-10-62038
valve
Function:
allows 1-way air flow to blow dry the air release opening of the piercing probe
Note: Only allow gas or liquid flow from A to B (B to A is not allowed).
Reused-stain filter
Symbol
Appearance:
ID
Material ID
Reused-stain filter 115-024453-00
Function:
For the filtration of the A solution collected in the circulation pool. There is only one such filter
in the SM&S, marked as LF2.
5-8
Fluidics
Note: ensure to replace the filter when it reaches its service life.
Liquid filter
Symbol:
Appearance:
ID
Material ID
Filter. Inline Filter 65um
082-000156-00
1/8I.D.Tubing
Function:
Filters the impurities in diluent. There is only one such filter in the SM&S, marked as LF1.
Note: make sure the filter is in the right direction as indicated by the arrow on the filter.
Dosing pump
Symbols:
Appearance:
5-9
Fluidics
Liquid chamber
connector
Gas chamber connector

ID
Material ID
0.3ml dosing pump assembly 115-016413-00
5.4ml dosing pump assembly 115-016416-00
6ml dosing pump assembly 115-016417-00
Function:
used for accurate aspiration or dispensation. When vacuum is brought to the gas chamber, the
dosing pump will aspirate a fixed volume of liquid accurately and the liquid will be stored in the
liquid chamber; when pressure is brought to the gas chamber, the fixed volume of liquid will be
pushed out by the membrane in the dosing pump.
Note: make sure the connectors are connected to the gas chamber and liquid chamber
correctly.
Table 5-1 Functions of dosing pumps
No. ID Specifi Functions

cation
1 DP1 0.3ml Controls the liquid dispensing at
Pos. 3 from LC-A cistern
Pos. 3 from LC-A2 cistern
Pos. 3 from LC-P cistern
4 DP4 6ml Controls the liquid dispensing at
Pos. 1 from LC-M cistern
Pos. 1 or 2 from LC-A cistern
Pos. 4 from LC-W cistern
Syringes
Symbol:
5-10
Fluidics
Appearance: N/A.
ID
Material ID
2.5ml syringe assembly
0033-30-74625
(fluororubber)
Structure of 100ul lead screw
115-011898-00
driving syringe assembly
Function:
The 2.5ml syringe is mainly used in sample aspiration, cleaning, etc. The 100ul syringe is used
for dispensing blood.
Note: the two syringes are of different specifications. Do not misuse them.
Probe wipe
Symbols:
Probe Wipe Piercing Probe
Appearance:
ID
Material ID
Closed tube probe wipe 041-002388-00
Open-vial probe wipe 041-000976-00
5-11
Fluidics
Function:
Provide a cavity where the open-vial probe or piercing probe can be cleaned by liquid flow.
Note:
A: Diluent B: Waste
C: Waste DCleaning opening
E: Air releasing opening F: Sample probe opening
Probes
Symbols:
See the symbol of probe wipe.
Appearance:
Blood dispensing probe
Piercing probe
Sample
aspiring Air
opening releasing
opening
5-12
Fluidics
Pos. 1 dispensing probe Pos. 2 dispensing probe
Dispense 6ml Dispense Discharge liquid Dispense 6ml Discharge liquid at Reserve 70kPa
methanol 6ml Stain 1 at Pos. 1 stain 1 Pos.2 Blow-dry
Pos. 3 dispensing probe Pos. 4 dispensing probe

Dispense 0.3ml Dispense 0.3ml Discharge liquid at
Discharge liquid at Dispense 6ml
stain 2 stain 1 Pos. 3
Pos.4 deionized water
Dispense 5.4ml
buffer solution
5-13
Fluidics
ID
Material ID
Blood dispensing probe 082-001871-00
Piercing unit 115-005373-00
Pos. 1 dispensing probe 115-022601-00
Function: the open-vial probe is used to aspirate the sample from the tube under the
open-vial mode. The piercing probe is used to pierce through the tube cap, release the air
in the tube to balance the pressure inside and outside of the tube, and aspirate sample at
the same time. The dispensing probes at Pos. 1, 2, and 4 are used for stain dispensing to
the cassettes and waste collection at the positions; while the Pos. 3 dispensing probe is
used for stain dispensing to Pos.3 cassette and the collection of both waste and stain. For
the details, see the explanatory texts on above figure.
Note: since the piercing probe is vulnerable, it needs to be replaced periodically by the
service engineer or your local distributor.
Cisterns and waste baths:

Symbol
ID
Material ID
LC-D cistern 115-018620-00
LC-M cistern 115-018614-00
LC-P cistern 115-018617-00
LC-A cistern 115-018619-00
LC-A1 cistern 115-018615-00
5-14
Fluidics
LC-A2 cistern 115-018616-00
LC-W cistern 115-018618-00
WC-W waste bath 115-018622-00
WC-B waste bath 115-018621-00
Function: LC-D stores diluent; LC-M stores methanol; LC_A1 stores stain 1; LC_A is used
for recycling of stain 1; LC_A2 stores stain 2; LC_P stores buffer solution; LC_W stores
deionized water; WC_B collects blood sample waste; and WC_W collects stain waste.
Note: when servicing the cisterns or baths, fix the fluidic tubing connection by cable ties.
Buffer cistern
Symbols
ID
Material ID
Buffer cistern assembly 115-023295-00
Function: provide some buffer in case the liquid in the cisterns or waste baths flows back.
Note: when servicing the buffer cistern assembly, ensure the tubings are properly
connected (the in and out tubings are not reversely connected). After empty the liquid in
the cisterns or baths, check the seal tightness of the tubings.
Hydraulic sensor:
Symbol
5-15
Fluidics
Appearance:
ID
Material ID
Reagent temperature detection
115-008185-00
assembly
Function: used for hydraulic measurement.

Note: ensure to connect the tubings correctly.
Dispensing probe cleaning bath

Symbols
Appearance:
ID
Material ID
Dispensing probe cleaning bath 115-018371-00
5-16
Fluidics
Function: the bath collects the waste discharged during the dispensing probe cleaning
process.
Note: when servicing the bath, ensure that the bath is installed in correct position; and the
tubings are properly connected.
Ultrasonic cleaning bath:

Symbol
Appearance Blow-dry
opening
Dispensing
opening
ID
Material ID
Cleaning bath assembly 115-018089-00
Function: clean and dry the spreader slides; collect the diluent.
Note: when servicing the bath, ensure that the bath is installed in correct position; and the
tubings are properly connected.
LVM valve manifold

Symbols
5-17
Fluidics
LVM valve manifold
A2
A1
A3
GV52 GV55
GV50 GV45 GV47
GV54 GV57 GV56 GV43 GV49
GV44
GV42 GV58 GV39 GV51
GV48 GV41 GV53

GV46
B16 B17 B13 B14 B1 B2 B11 B12 B15 B9 B10 B8 B7 B3 B4 B5 B6
LVM valve manifold

B C D E F
SV32 SV34 SV37 SV35 SV33 SV31
SV36
H A
G
Appearance:
Side view of the manifold
Front view of the manifold

Valve connecting holes
Manifold mounting
Tubing connection holes
5-18
Fluidics
A2/T234
70KPa 15-T234-1000
15-T233-1030 A1/T233
-40KPa
A3 OPEN 15-T241-750
A3 A2 A1
C31
G 29-T83-1200 6-T82-40 G/LF1
C11 F/open-vial
F J9-18-T27-750-J10 29-T17-570
probe wipe
LVM valve E 29-T22-630 E/100ul syringe
manifold D 29-T28-710 D/T28

TS C/hydraulic
C 29-T29-70 29-T20-70 measurement
assembly
B 29-T34-560 B/spreader slide
cleaning
A 29-T32-500
H
C19
15-T268-360
15-T267-510
29-T31-20
15-T260-590
15-T266-450
15-T269-510
15-T261-610
15-T272-1200
15-T265-510
15-T271-980
15-T262-430
15-T257-510
15-T258-600
15-T259-530
15-T263-430
15-T264-600
15-T270-630
15-T273-840
C65
B1/1-way
14-T167-20
B13/LC-M
B10/WC-W
B6/DP4
B7/DP5
B8/DP6
B3/DP1
B4/DP2
B5/DP3
B9/WC-B
B11/LC-D
B15/LC-W
B14/LC-P
B12/LC-A2
B16/LC-A
valve
B17/LC-A1
B2/POS2 Probe
No. 5
ID
Material ID
Manifold 082-001822-00
Function: the manifold for LVM gas valve and fluidic valve.
Note: when replacing the valves, make sure you are using the correct model and the seal
ring is properly mounted; also make sure the tubings are connected to the correct
channels.
5-19
Fluidics
5.1.3 Pneumatic System Introduction

The pneumatic diagram of the SM&S is as follows:
LVM Valve Manifold
Assembly
Press Sensor
PS5 PS3 70KPa
PS4 PS2 A2
OPEN
-40KPa
40KPa 250KPa A1
-40KPa
70KPa
T229
A3
RGV2
T241
GV52 GV55
Isolation Chamber GV50 GV45 GV47
Anti-pour Bath
T219
T208 T232
C113 GV54 GV57 GV56 GV43 GV49
C139 T218
OPEN
T212
C106 Vacuum C111 C116 T228
T203 T216 T236
C108 T220
C105 T233 GV44
C103 C104 C112 GV42 GV58 GV39 GV51
T204 T207 T209 T210 T211 T217
C107 Pressure C109 T222
T205 GF1 Air Drier C110 C117
T213 C114
T226 GV48 GV41
GP1 T214 GV46 GV53
C101 C102
T201 RGV1 GF2 T230
T202
T206
T223
Open
Open
T215
T265
RGV3 T264 T269
GF1
T263 T268
T221 T231 T258 T259 T261 T270 T267
T257 T260 T271
T266
T262 T272
T224 T273
Piercing Probe
C120
WC-W
LC-A1
Methanol Dry
LC-A2
WC-B
LC-W
LC-A
LC-D
DP4
DP6
DP1
DP2
DP3
LC-M
DP5
LC-P
C124 C125 C126 C127 C128
C115 C119 C122 C123
T227 Ta3-P6 T244
J13 Ta2-P5 J14 T242 T243 J15 J16
C121 T234
T239 T240
T225
Blood film
Blood film
drying1
drying 2
C131 C130 C129 C118
T276 T275
C136
C138 C134 C135
T274 T235 T316 T294 T296
Baric Manifold 1 T298
R Baric Manifold 3
T277 T281 R Baric Manifold 2
T317 T293
T295
R T297
R
P P
P GV23 GV24 GV25
GV89 GV88 GV87 GV86 GV85 GV84 GV83 GV82 P
GV81 GV17 GV18 GV19 GV20 GV21 GV22
GV11 GV12 GV13 GV14 GV15 GV16
T313
T282 T289 T284 T314
T278 T286
T283 T311
C132 C133
T291 T288 C137
GV90 T290 TP4 T287 T309 T308 T307 T310 T300 T318
T292 T301 T302 T306 T305 T304 T303 J17-Ta4-J18
T285
TP2
Slider Dry
Slider Dry
Plate Clean
T279
PV01
AC2 TP5 TP1
PV03
PV02
PV10
PV08
T280
PV09
PV13
PV06
PV05
PV11
PV07
PV12
PV04
TP6 TP3
AC5 AC7
AC3
O S
AC4
AC6 AC8
AC1
The pressures of different specifications have their own functions.
Table 5-2 Pressure Function
Type Value Function

Provide pressure for the operation of the
pinch valve;
250kPa
Provide pressure for the operation of the
cylinders.
Provide pressure to dosing pumps for
liquid dispensing;
Provide pressure to the air release
opening of the piercing probe while
70KPa cleaning the probe wipe;
Pressure Provide pressure for liquid dispensing of
cisterns;
Provide pressure for discharging waste
from the waste container.
Provide vacuum to dosing pumps for
liquid aspiration;
Provide vacuum to the waste container
-40KPa
for aspirating the waste from the
piping;
Withdrawing waste of the probe wipe.
5-20
Fluidics
5.1.4 Pneumatic Component Introduction

Air filter
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: to remove the liquid drops and dust in air.

Note: make sure the direction of the air flow is the same as indicated by the arrow on top
of the air filter.
Air desiccant
Symbol:
Appearance:
Function: dry the air, removing the gaseous water.
5-21
Fluidics
Note: make sure the direction of the air flow is the same as indicated by the red arrow on
top of the air desiccant.
Pneumatic regulator
Symbols:
Pressure regulator Vacuum regulator (Relief valve)
Appearance:
Function:
The regulators are used to regulate the pressure or vacuum to a required range (usually to
reduce the pressure).
Note: when you adjust the pressure regulator, pull the blue knob upwards until you hear a
"tuck" or feel the knob is in position, and then tweak the knob to regulate pressure. Push the
knob downwards to the initial position after you finish. Before you adjust the relief valve, loosen
the retaining nut, and then tweak the adjusting pole to regulate. Secure the retaining nut after
you finish.
Gas valve
Symbols:
2-way valve (NO) 3-way valve (NO) 3-way valve (NC) 5-way valve
Appearance:
5-22
Fluidics
2-way and 3-way valves 5-way valve
Function: similar to 3-way electromagnet valves, but mainly used in the pneumatic system.
GA0100E1 is a 3-way normally closed valve, GA0100E1-11 is a 3-way normally open valve;
G010E1-2-21 is a 2-way normally open valve, and 010-4E1 is a 5-way valve.
Note: read the label of the gas valves carefully to know the specification and model. When
the gas valves are powered on, the indicator of the valves will be red. While servicing the
analyzer, you may press the pink button on the gas valve to manually make the valve work.
Make sure you are not pressing too hard or using sharp tools which may damage the button.
The operation voltage for gas valves is also 12V AC.
Pinch valve
Symbols:
Appearance:
5mm pinch valve Pinch valve assembly (pharmed)
5-23
Fluidics
Function: the pinch valve is driven by pressure. When the 250KPa pressure is brought to
the pinch valve, the pressure lever in the valve will be propped up to cut off the passage of the
liquid flow.
Note: since the pinch valves pinch tubings while working, to protect the tubings, it is
designed the valves do not work when the SM&S is in the standby status. Pinch valves are
categorized into 2 types according to the size of the through hole: one is 8mm pinch valve
used for fat pharmed tube, the other is 5mm pinch valve used for thin pharmed tube.
Table 5-3 Pinch valves
No. ID Specifica Control Function

tion gas valve
1 PV01 5mm GV25 Control tube piercing and sample aspirating
2 PV02 5mm GV21 Control sample dispensing and aspirating
under open-vial mode
3 PV03 Pharmed GV20 Control the cleaning of the interior and exterior
of the piercing probe and the discharging of
waste
4 PV04 Pharmed GV16 Control the cleaning of the interior and exterior
of the dispensing probe and the discharging of
waste
5 PV05 Pharmed GV15 Control the dispensing probe cleaning bath
waste discharging
6 PV06 Pharmed GV14 Control the spreader slide cleaning bath waste
discharging
7 PV07 Pharmed GV13 Control the stain recycling of the circulation
pool
8 PV08 Pharmed GV19 Control the waste collection at Pos. 2
11 PV11 Pharmed GV11 Control the WC_W waste container waste
discharging to waste container
12 PV12 Pharmed GV12 Control the WC_B waste container waste
discharging to waste container
5.2 Slide Making and Staining Sequence

The slide making and staining procedure includes 3 parts:
Slide Staining procedure
Sampling & Dispensing procedure
Spreader Slide Cleaning procedure
The requirements are as follow:
1.All sequences run by the cycle of 30 seconds;
5-24
Fluidics
2.The staining procedure (STAIN) lasts for 29.5 seconds;

3.The sampling & dispensing procedure starts 2.3 seconds after the staining
procedure;
4.The spreader slide cleaning procedure starts 3.9 seconds after the staining
procedure;
The fluidics sequence flow chart is as follows:
5-25
Fluidics
0 30 60 90 120 150 180
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120 120
STAIN 29.5s STAIN 29.5s STAIN 29.5s STAIN 29.5s STAIN 29.5s STAIN 29.5s
F003 F002 F003 F002 F003

F001 17.5s F001 17.5s F001 17.5s
F002 12s 3.5s F003 12s 3.5s 12s
F003
A 2.3s 3.5s 2.3s F001 17.5s
12s
F002
3.5s
F001 17.5s
12s
F002
3.5s
F081 F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s
2s
3.9s
F004 F002 F004 F002 F004

F001 17.5s 3.5s F001 17.5s
26.3s 12s 3.5s 12s
F002 F004 F002 F004
B 2.3s 3.5s
2.3s
26.3s 3.5s
F001 17.5s
12s
F002
3.5s
F081 F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s
2s
3.9s
F005 F006 F005 F006 F005 F006

C 17.5s
F002
12s 17.5s
F002
12s 17.5s
F002
12s
3.5s 3.5s 3.5s
4s
F081 F082 F081 F082 F081 F082
2s 18.5s 2s 18.5s 2s 18.5s
3.9s
F002
F005 F007 3.5s F006 F005 F006
17.5s 26.3s F007 12s 17.5s 12s
F002 F002 F002
D 3.5s 26.3s 3.5s 3.5s
F081 F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s F082 18.5s
2s
3.9s
F008 F009 F008 F009 F008 F009

17.5s 12s 17.5s 12s 17.5s 12s
E F002
3.5s
F081 F082
F002
3.5s F082
F002
3.5s F082
4s
2s 18.5s 18.5s 18.5s
3.9s
5-26
Fluidics
On the figure, A~E represent examples of different run modes. See below:
No. Run modes Note
A Autoloading: single aspiration for Operating at maximum speed
single slide
B Autoloading: single aspiration for 3 Operating at maximum speed
slides
C Open vial: single aspiration for Operating at maximum speed
single slide
D Open vial: single aspiration for 3 Operating at maximum speed
slides
E Micro-loading Operating at maximum speed
See below for the functions of different sequences:

No. Modules Functions Note
STAIN Slide Staining Stain and clean the slides Including all staining
procedure sequences
F001 Sampling & Piercing the tube, aspirating blood Piercing mode
Dispensing sample, and preparing for
procedure dispensing
F002 Sampling & Dispensing blood
Dispensing
procedure
F003 Sampling & Cleaning the tubes Piercing mode
Dispensing
procedure
F004 Sampling & Cleaning the tubes, and preparing Piercing mode, single
Dispensing for dispensing aspiration for multiple
procedure slides
F005 Sampling & Aspirating blood sample, and Open-vial mode
Dispensing preparing for dispensing
procedure
F006 Sampling & Cleaning the tubes Open-vial mode
Dispensing
procedure
F007 Sampling & Cleaning the tubes, and preparing Open-vial mode,
Dispensing for dispensing single aspiration for
procedure multiple slides
F008 Sampling & Aspirating blood sample, and Micro mode
Dispensing preparing for dispensing
procedure
F009 Sampling & Cleaning the tubes Micro mode
Dispensing
procedure
5-27
Fluidics
F081 Spreader Slide Add diluent to the cleaning bath

Cleaning procedure
F082 Spreader Slide Clean and dry the spreader slides
Cleaning procedure
5-28
Hardware
6 Hardware
6.1 Overview
The location of the hardware supporting subsystem of the Auto Slide Maker & Stainer (SM&S)
is shown in
Figure . Among a series of subsystems of SM&S, the hardware supporting subsystem
consists of basic electric elements supporting the operation of other subsystems.
Stain
2
Hardware main
control and
driving platform Reagent detection, metering and cycling
Flush Stain Stain 1 +power module
Fluidics support
Slide Making
Dispensing
Me
tha
no
X
l
Y
Slide drying Z Spreader slide
detection fix cleaning
tu Sample detection
Informa
re
tion
Slide Levering print
Slide making
Open vial sampling
Slide
Drying collecti Slide cleaning
on and
Slide basket loading
Piercing and
sample collection
Mixing and
Scan
piercing
Basket Slide quantity
Slide storage detection
detecti
on
Auto loading
Figure 6-1 Location of the hardware supporting system in the instrument

The hardware supporting subsystem can:
1. provide a main control platform for man-machine interaction, main control of the whole
system, and the communication between the instrument and PC;
2. provide a drive and control platform, supporting the operation of other subsystems.
3. provide the electric power driving all subsystems;
4. provide with various sensors of driving mechanism and corresponding driving circuits, e.g.
position sensors, magnetic sensors, reagent detection sensors, etc.
5. provide electric power required by different components, and monitor these components;
6. provide the cables connecting different modules, boards, and components of the driving
modules;
6-1
Hardware
7. provide various interfaces for peripheral equipment, the serial port communication of the
tracks, as well as the network communication between the instrument and PC.
6.2 Hardware Resources for Different Subsystems

Hardware resources for different subsystems
Subsystem Name Corresponding Remarks

Board
Slide storage subsystem Drive board A /
Slide making subsystem Drive board A /
Ultrasonic
Spreader Slide Cleaning The valve control resource comes
cleaning drive
Subsystem from drive board A
board
Sampling & Dispensing Drive board A /
Subsystem
Blood film drying Drive board A
subsystem
Slide output subsystem Drive board A
Vertical transport Drive board B /

subsystem
Staining subsystem Drive board B /
Autoloading subsystem Drive board B /
This subsystem is mainly in charge

of floater and valve control, so its
Reagent metering & Drive board A and hardware resources locate in 2
cycling Subsystem B drive boards according to the
location of the floaters and valves it
controls
Slide Printing Subsystem Print drive board /
6-2
Hardware
6.3 Hardware System Connection Diagram

C-009-003512-00 Ultrasonic power supply socket
J9
J9
051-001438-00
051-001438-00
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic cleaning
cleaning drive
drive
051-001356-00
051-001356-00 Print
Print driving
driving board
board
control
control board
board (B)
(B) [K]
[K]
J1
J1 J13
J13 J5
J5
C-009-003468-00 Printer drive board power cord C-009-003469-00

Printer drive
board C-009-003510-00 Ultrasonic serial port cable 3101-30-68519
3101-30-68519
communication Keyboard[M]
Keyboard[M]
cable J1
J1
C-009-003858-00 Digital 5V and 12V board card power cord
J10
J10 A3
A3 A10
A10
J9
J9 J6
J6 J11
J11
A23
A23 C-009-004101-00 3204 keyboard cable
A40
J5
A40
J5
C-009-003467-00 Analog 12V output cable A26
A26 C-009-003516-00 Fluid pressure detection board cable
051-001508-00
051-001508-00 3204
3204 SM&S
SM&S data
data board
board
J1 051-001543-00
051-001543-00 SM&S
SM&S power
power distributor[D]
distributor[D] [A]
[A]
J1
A41
A41
C-009-003464-00 Digital 5V and 12V output cable
J1
J1
J3
J3
051-000218-00
051-000218-00 Clog
Clog
C-009-003465-00 Power 12V and 24V output cable A6 A5 detection
detection board
board [R]
[R]
A6 A5
J8
J8 J7
J7 J4
J4 J2
J2

C-009-003857-00 Board card analog 12V power cord J21
J21
J2
J2
Power
Power assembly
assembly C-009-003859-00 Drive board digital and power cables
J30
J30 J4 051-000329-00
J4 051-000329-00 Valve
Valve drive
drive board
board A(J-A)
A(J-A) J5
J5
051-001515-00
051-001515-00 3204
3204 power
power drive
drive board
board (A)
(A)
[C-A
[C-A ]]
J1
J1
009-004202-00 SM&S protective earth C-009-003961-00 Drive board B communication cable
wire C-009-003859-00 Drive board digital and power cables J28
J28
Transformer
Transformer
J21 051-000507-00
051-000507-00 Air-pressure
Air-pressure
J21 detection
J2
J2 detection board
board [P]
[P]
J1
J1
051-001515-00
051-001515-00 3204
3204 Power
Power drive
drive board
board
J1
J1 cable
cable (B)
(B) J40 C-009-003514-00 Air-pressure detection board cable
J7 Heating
Heating control
control board
board PCBA
PCBA [E] J6 [C-B J40
C-009-003479-00 Heating drive board J7 [E] J6 [C-B ]]
power cord
J30
J30 J4
J4 051-000329-00
051-000329-00 Valve
Valve drive
drive board
board B(J-B)
B(J-B) J5
J5
C-009-003461-00 Transformer output cable
C-009-003482-00 Heating drive board control signal cables
6-3
Hardware
6.3.1 Main Control Board Structure

Staining
Cover
bath
3101-30-68519 Keyboard[M] USB assembly close
cover
sensor
sensor
J1
009-004177-00
Cover sensor cable 009-004178-00
C-009-004101-00 Staining bath cover sensor
C-009-003524-00 USB extension line extension line
3204 keyboard cable
A23 A17 A18 J15 051-001515-00 3204 power drive board

A20 A21 C-009-003961-00 (B)
A5 J21
Drive board B communication cable [C-B ]
C-009-003531-00 LCD signal cable A14
Display
A12
screen C-009-003534-00 Touch screen control board cable

051-001515-00 3204 power drive board
C-009-003960-00
A11
C-009-003532-00 LCD backlight cable (A)

A6 Drive board A J21 [C-A ]
051-001508-00 3204 SM&S data board communication cable
[A]
009-001198-00 Front cover protective earth wire

A32
Blood sensor 0
051-001438-00
C-009-003510-00 Ultrasonic cleaning serial port
A10 J5
Ultrasonic serial port cable cable
[K]
A31
Blood sensor 1 J8
J15
A40 A41 A3 A26 C-009-003508-00

Network Cleaning bath
interface cable
C-009-003469-00 C-009-003516-00
Printer drive board Fluid pressure detection board
communication cable cable
C-009-003858-00
Digital 5V and 12V board card Cleaning bath
power cord
J13 J1
051-000218-00
051-001356-00 Printer Clog detection
drive control board (B) board [R]
6-4
Hardware
6.3.2 Drive Board Structure
6.3.3 Function Drive Board A
6-5
Hardware
Slide output subsystem - loading Slide truck assembly
Slide output subsystem - feeding

C-009-003446-00 051-000565-00 C-009-004095-00
3204 slide output subsystem Fluid level 3204 slide making
loading cables detection board subsystem motor cables
C-009-004094-00 J [F] C-009-003456-00 C-009-004096-00
C-009-003448-00 3204 slide output subsystem analog 1 3204 slide making 3204 slide making subsystem
3204 Slide output subsystem sensor cable subsystem sensor cables analog sensor cables
feeding cables
C-009-003515-00
C-009-003447-00 Liquid level C-009-003458-00 3204 C-009-004097-00
3204 slide output subsystem loading detection board Slide making 3204 slide making
cable extension line C-009-003449-00 C-009-004093-00 extension line subsystem sensor subsystem analog sensor
051-001508-00 3204 slide output subsystem feeding 3204 slide output subsystem analog extension line C-009-003457-00 extension line
3204 SM&S data board A6 cable extension line sensor extension line 3204 slide making
[A] subsystem motor extension
line
J3
J6 J35 J7 J36 J42 J29 J33 J8 J9 J41 C-009-003454-00
4
3204 spreader slide
assembly extension
J21 J4 line
051-000329-00
J5 J4 J30 J5
Valve drive board A(J-A)
J38
C-009-003453-00
3204 spreader slide
assembly cables
C-009-003859-00
051-001543-00 J4 J2 051-001515-00
Drive board digital and power cables
SM&S power distributor 3204 power drive board (A)
[D] C-009-003857-00 [C-A ]
J2 J1
Power card analog 12V power cord C-009-003452-00
3204 spreader slide
assembly movement
cable
C-009-003482-00 Spreader slide assembly

Transformer Heating drive board control signal J28
cable
C-009-003479-00 J43 J31 J32 J24 J11 J39 J10 J3 J37

Heating drive board
power cable
J7 J6 C-009-004098-00
C-009-003451-00
3204 dispensing
3204 dispensing subsystem
subsystem extension
syringe cable
line
Heating control board PCBA[E] C-009-003477-00
C-009-003851-00 Dispensing subsystem
Container floater cable 2 Tem&Hum sensor cable
C-009-003850-00
J2 J J Container
3 4 C-009-003501-00
floater cable 1 3204 dispensing
subsystem cables
C-009-003480-00 C-009-003481-00 C-009-003985-00 C-009-003499-00
Fan heating assembly cable Film drying heating LC_D floater C-009-003984-00 3204 dispensing subsystem
assembly cable C-009-003522-00 extension line WC_B floater movement cable
Temperature sensor cable
extension line
Fan heating Film drying heating 009-002604-00

assmbly assembly Container floater syringe earthing
T5,T6 Middle bath floater 051-000918-00 Syringes cable
T3 (LB-P,LB-W,LB-D,WB-W,
(LC-D) Rear bath floater Humidity detection (M14,M15,SEN25,SE
LB-A1,LB-M,LB-A2,WB-B)
(WC_B) board (HUM) N28) 009-002604-00
syringe earthing cable
6-6
Hardware
6.3.4 Power Drive Board B
Auto loading Automatic sampling Slide vertical transport

subsystem Staining subsystem subsystem
subsystem
C-009-003495-00
C-009-003438-00 3204 slide vertical transport
3204 auto loading subsystem C-009-003443-00 subsystem movement cable
C-009-003442-00 C-009-003489-00
cable 3204 automatic Valve
3204 automatic sampling 3204 staining
sampling cables subsystem cables extension
C-009-003437-00 subsystem movement cable line
C-009-003441-00 C-009-003496-00
3204 auto loading subsystem
3204 Automatic sampling 3204 slide vertical transport
extension line
subsystem extension line subsystem extension line
J8 J9 J35 J4 J5 J36 J30 J31 J3 J6 J37
051-000507-00
C-009-003514-00
J40 Air-pressure detection
J1
051-001508-00 Air-pressure detection board sensor
C-009-003961-00 board [P]
3204 SM&S data board A5 J21
Drive board B communication line
[A]
051-001515-00 Auto sample

C-009-003521-00
3204 power drive board (B) J18
Communication cable to auto sample processing line processing
track
051-000329-00
J4 J30
[C-B ]
Valve drive board B(J-B)
J2
C-009-003530-00
J25 Scanner
Scanner cable
J1
J31 J32 J27

C-009-003527-00 Pneumatic unit patching line
C-009-003859-00 Drive board digital and power cables
J8 J7
051-001543-00 Middle bath floater Pneumatic unit
Rear bath floater
SM&S power distributor LC-P,LC-A1,LC-M, socket
LC-A,LC-W,WC-B
[D] LC-A2
6-7
Hardware
6-8
Hardware
6.4 Hardware Component Service Instructions

6.4.1 Wires
Wires are used to connect board to board, or board to components. Common errors related to wires
include:
1.Unreliable or loose connection

Include unreliable or loose connection between board and wire, among wires, or between
wire and component (e.g. sensor, motor, etc.). You need to locate the unreliable or loose
connection first, and then reconnect and secure the connection.
2.Short-circuit caused by cable with damaged exterior

Need to replace the damaged wire. Considering that this error may cause the fusing of
board fuse or damage of elements on the board, check whether the board works properly
after replacing the wire.
3.Connector corroded
This error may be caused by the fluid leakage from the instrument, in which case the wire(s)
and corresponding components need to be replaced.
Table 4 Troubleshooting of errors related to wires
No. Error Description Troubleshooting

1 Sensor status abnormal 1.Check whether the connecting cable of the sensor is
properly connected;
2.Check whether the sensor socket to is corrosive;
3.Check whether the sensor socket at the board end is
properly connected;
4.Check whether the wire is damaged;
5.Check whether there is dust on the sensor surface.
2 Floater status abnormal 1.Check whether the connecting wire of the floater is
properly connected;
2.Check whether the floater socket to is corrosive;
3.Check whether the floater socket at the board end is
properly connected;
4.Check whether the wire is damaged;
5.Check whether the floater is faulty.
3 Magnetic switch status abnormal 1.Check whether the pressure of the pneumatic unit is
normal;
2.Check whether the corresponding cylinder action is
normal;
6-9
Hardware
3.Check whether the connecting cable of the magnetic

switch is properly connected;
4.Check whether the cable is damaged;
5.Check whether the connecting cable of the magnetic
switch on the board is properly connected;
6.Check whether the magnetic switch is loose.
4 Motor not move 1.Check whether the connector of the motor is properly
connected;
2.Check whether the motor socket is properly
connected to the board;
3.Check whether the board where the motor is
connected to works properly;
4.Check whether the connecting cable of the motor is
damaged.
5 Motor runs inversely when it is 1.Check whether the connector of the motor is properly
supposed to be positive-going connected;
2.Check whether the motor socket is properly
connected to the board;
6.4.2 Sensor
6.4.3 Digital Sensor

Common errors related to digital output reflective sensors include:
1) External light interference
Avoid direct exposure to sunlight; otherwise, the sensor may not work properly.
2) Dust on surface
Since the detection of reflective sensor depends on the receival of reflected light, the dust on the
surface of the transmitting tube or the receiving tube may reduce the intensity of the received light.
Severe dust deposition may make the sensor loose efficacy. To remove this type of error, clean the
surfaces of the transmitting tube and receiving tube using cotton balls dipped with alcohol.
3) Connector corrosion
The reflective sensors located under the analyzer or the SM&S may become corrosive due to the
fluid leakage, which may cause unreliable electric connection of the sensor. This type of error needs
to be removed by replacing the sensors and wires connected to them.
4) Connecting cable damaged
The connecting cable of the sensor may be damaged in the assembly process on the manufacture
site or in the first installation and adjustment. If the power supply wire or signal wire is damaged and
the earth wire is short-circuited, the sensor will lose efficacy. To remove this type of error, bind up the
breakage or replace with a new sensor cable.
6-10
Hardware
6.4.4 Transmissive Sensor

There are two types of outsourced transmissive sensors used in the SM&S: 4-wire sensor (ID:
801-3003-00015-00) and 3-wire sensor, where the latter can be further divided into short-wire (ID:
801-0030-00003-00) and long-wire (ID: 011-000022-00).
The difference between the 4-wire sensor and 3-wire sensor is that the power supply wire and signal
wire of the 3-wire sensor share one earth wire, while those of the 4-wire sensor have their own earth
wires.
Appearance:
Figure 6-2 Outsourced 4-wire transmissive sensor
Figure 6-3 Outsourced 3-wire transmissive sensor

The 3-wire sensor has 3 wires: red, blue and black, while the red one is the power supply wire, black
the earth wire, and the blue one signal output wire. The voltage between the red wire and black wire
is fixed to be (4.75-5.25) V. When the optical path is blocked, the voltage between the blue wire and
black wire is about 3.3V, and when not blocked, the voltage will be less than 0.2V.
The 4-wire sensor has 4 wires: red, black, green and white, while the red one is the power supply
wire, the black one and green one are earth wires, and the white one signal output wire. The voltage
between the red wire and black wire is fixed to be (4.75-5.25) V. When the optical path is blocked,
the voltage between the white wire and green wire is about 3.3V, and when not blocked, the voltage
will be less than 0.2V.
6.4.5 Reflective sensors

There is only one type of digital output reflective sensor used in the SM&S, with the ID
801-BA80-00241-00. Digital output means that the sensor outputs high level or low level signals,
6-11
Hardware
with the value of 0 and 1 respectively.

Appearance:
Detection
surface
Figure 6-4 Digital output reflective sensor

There are 3 wires connecting to each digital output reflective sensor, which are red, blue, and black
respectively. The red one is the power cord, black one earth wire, and the blue one output signal
wire. The voltage between the red wire and black wire is fixed to be (4.75-5.25) V. When the sensor
finds a reflecting object, the voltage between the blue wire and black wire is about 3.8V, and when
there is no reflecting object, the voltage will be less than 0.2V.
If the voltage between the blue wire and black wire does not meet the requirements above, the
sensor may not work properly. Moreover, you can use the sensor position screen of the service
auxiliary tool to check whether a reflective sensor works properly. When the reflective sensor finds a
reflecting object, the corresponding field is green; otherwise, it will be white.
6.4.6 Analog Sensor
Error type I
The analog sensors may have similar errors (see below) which require same troubleshooting
procedure.
Table 5 Analog sensor error type I
Sensors Common Errors Troubleshooting method Note

Slide quantity The system reports See "Never blocked"
sensor "Insufficient slides"
when the slide
storage box is full.
The system does not See "Always blocked"
report error when
there is no slide.
No slide The system reports See "Never blocked"
detection there is no slide
sensor when the slide
6-12
Hardware
storage box is full.

report error when
there is no slide.
Carbon strip The system reports See "Never blocked"
detection that carbon strip has
sensor run out when there is
sufficient.
report error when
there is no carbon
strip.
Note: the same troubleshooting principles also apply when other status-detection analog sensors
(tube detection sensor, unloading tray full sensor and ready-for-unloading sensor etc.) report false
errors.
Table 6 Troubleshooting of error type I
Error Possible Cause Troubleshooting Note

Type
Never 1.Connecting 1.Do calibration again on the "Analog Sensor Trigger:
blocked cable short Calibration" screen, and then check whether the sensor
circuited the blank voltage falls within the reference blank
range voltage is
2.Drive board
always
error 2.If the blank voltage exceeds the high limit
higher
3.Sensor value, check whether the sensor cables are
than the
damaged damaged or short-circuited. Replace the
threshold.
sensors or the drive board when necessary.
Always 1.The sensors are 1.Check whether there is any error with the Trigger:
blocked dirty, dust sensors: remove all the slides in the slide the sensor
accumulated, or basket, and enter the "Analog Sensor blank
get worn out. Calibration" screen. When the sensors work voltage is
properly, their blank voltage should be within always
2.Sensor
the reference range; and when you block the lower than
damaged
sensors with your hand, the screen should the
3.Drive board
show the sensors are "blocked"; when you threshold.
error
withdraw your hand, the screen should show
4.Loose
the sensors are "not blocked".
connection
2.Re-calibrate the sensors. Perform step 1
5.Cables get
again to confirm whether the sensors are OK.
damaged
3.If the blank voltage is not zero, and though it
increases when you adjust the DA value
upwards, it never reaches the reference range,
then senor error can be confirmed. Clean the
6-13
Hardware
dust accumulated on the optical path of the

sensors. If the sensors still cannot be calibrated
to normal conditions, replace them.
4.If the situation is not what described in step 3,
replace the sensors or the drive board
Error type II
When the following errors are reported during analog sensor self-test, follow the instruction below
for troubleshooting.
Table 7 Troubleshooting of error type II
Error code/ Possible Troubleshooting Note

message/description Cause
Error: sensor 1.Connecting 1.Enter the "Analog Sensor Calibration" Flagging
abnormal cable short screen. If the screen displays that the condition:
circuited sensors are "blocked" when you block the
sensor
2.Drive board sensors with your hand, and "not blocked"
when you remove your hand, then most blank
error
probably the error is with the drive board, voltage
3.Sensor
which causes LED cannot be turned off. exceeds
damaged
2.If the sensor blank voltage never trigger
changes whether the sensors are blocked
value when
or not blocked, then either the sensor
cables get short-circuited, or sensors are turning off
damaged or the drive board is with error. LED
Replace the fishy parts and check again.
Flag: sensor blank 1.Connecting 1.Do calibration again on the "Analog Flagging
voltage too high cable short Sensor Calibration" screen, and then condition: it
circuited check whether the blank voltage falls
is found
2.Drive board within the reference range
blank
error 2.If the blank voltage exceeds the high
limit value, check whether the sensor voltage is
3.Sensor
damaged cables are damaged or short-circuited. higher than
Replace the sensors or the drive board the pre-set
when necessary.
value
(4.6V)
during
self-test
Flag: sensor blank 1.Sensor gets 1.Do calibration again on the "Analog Flagging
voltage too low worn out, dust Sensor Calibration" screen, and then condition: it
6-14
Hardware
accumulated check whether the blank voltage falls is found

2.Connecting within the reference range
blank
cable short 2.If the blank voltage is not zero, and
voltage is
circuited or though it increases when you adjust the
open circuited DA value upwards, it never reaches the lower than
3.Drive board reference range, then senor error can be the pre-set
error confirmed. Clean the dust accumulated on value
the sensors. If the sensors still cannot be
4.Sensor (0.24V)
calibrated to normal conditions, replace
damaged during
them.
3.If the situation is not what described in self-test
step 2, check whether the connecting
cable is damaged, or open circuited, or
short circuited; replace the sensors or the
drive board
6.4.7 Magnetic Switch

A magnetic switch is a switch controlled by magnetic force. It usually switches on when a magnetic
element comes near it, and switches off when the element leaves. Magnetic switches are often used
with cylinders whose magnetic elements are usually installed on piston rods. In the SM&S, only the
manipulator pincher uses a magnetic switch to detect pincher status. The switch gets disconnected
when the pincher grips a slide, and connected when it loosens.
The magnetic switch is integrated in the cylinder of the pincher. The magnetic switch status is as
follows:
Manipulator pincher status Magnetic switch status Magnetic switch indicator
Open Not blocked On
Close Blocked Off

A magnetic switch has 3 wires (brown, blue and black), where the brown one is connected to the 5V
power, the blue one to earth, and the black one is the signal output wire (note that this is different
from the sensor whose black wire is the earth wire, and blue wire the signal output wire). See the
table below for the color design of the magnetic switch wires:
Table 8 Wires of the magnetic switch
Color of wires attached to Description

the magnetic switch
Brown 5V power supply
wire
Black Signal output wire
Blue Earth wire
6-15
Hardware
The voltage between the brown wire and blue wire attached to the magnetic switch keeps to be out
of (4.75~5.25) V. When the switch is on, the voltage difference between the blue wire and the black
wire is about 3.3V, and when the switch is off, the voltage difference is less than 0.2V. A magnetic
switch uses a red built-in indicator to indicate the status of the switch. When the switch is conductive,
the indicator lights on; when the switch is not conductive, the indicator lights off.
Common errors relates to magnetic switches include:
(1) External magnetic disturbance
Magnetic switches are magnetism-sensitive devices. Do not place them anywhere near magnetic
components.
(2) Magnetic switches move because the set screws fixing them to the cylinder get loose
Adjust the position of the switch back to their original positions, and tighten the set screws.
(3) Switch wires are damaged
Replace the magnetic switches to remove this type of error.
6.4.8 Float switch

The float switch is used to detect the bath fluid level. It mainly consists of a floating ball (with a
magnet inside) and a float rod (with a reed switch inside). The float switch has a switching point.
When the floating ball dropped with the liquid level to a certain point, the float rod switches from
"open" to "closed", by which way the system may know the bath liquid level status has changed. The
figures below show the simplified working diagram of the float switch. The two wires are connected
to the circuit board. When the floating ball has dropped below the switching point, the float switch will
disconnect (some other models may become connected), thus the board will detect liquid level
change.
Reed switch status Reed switch status

Rod
Rod
Floating ball
Floating ball
Liquid level Liquid level
No. Error phenomenon Troubleshooting

1 There are mainly two 1.Log in at service access level, and enter the float switch
types of liquid level status status screen
reporting error: no
2.Unplug the float switch and check the float switch status on
warning is given when
the screen;
there is no reagent, and
3.Then use a piece of metal to short the two pins on the float
reporting no reagent when
switch plug. If the displayed status changes, then the
the reagent container is
connecting wires/cables and the circuit board are OK, and the
sufficient.
error is with the float switch. Replace the float switch or the
bath assembly.
6-16
Hardware
6.4.9 Micro-switch
A micro-switch can be seen as a touch sensor. Utilizing the leverage principle, it can be triggered
with even very slight contact.
Working principle of micro-switch
Two common types of micro-switch
1 The micro-switch fails and is always at 1.Check whether the micro-switch is

one state on or off pressed by another object
2.Check whether any wire of the
micro-switch is broken
3.Check whether the pressure lever of the
micro-switch is deformed. When it is
deformed and cannot restore by itself,
replace the micro-switch.
6.4.10 Pressure Sensor
Frequent errors found in pressure detection:
1. Check whether the connecting cables of pressure detection board and the drive board are
damaged or broken. If yes, replace the cables.
2. The connection between the cables and the board end gets loose. Secure the connector.
3. The connector on the pressure detection board end gets corrosive by liquid leakage of SM&S.
6-17
Hardware
Replace the connector.

4. Pressure sensor is damaged. Replace the pressure sensor.
6.4.11 Temperature Sensor
The SM&S detects temperature at 6 positions: diluent temperature, print head temperature, slide
making position temperature, blood film drying position temperature, slide basket drying assembly
output port temperature, slide drying position temperature. See below table for how the temperature
are detected and reported at the 6 positions:
No Name Temperature read from Relevant factor
1 Print head temperature The temperature is read from the temperature /
sensor built in the print head, and transmitted
from the print head print head cable
printer drive board print drive board cable
2 Slide making position The temperature is read from the temp. & /
temperature humidity sensor PCBA, and transmitted from
temp. & humidity sensor PCBA temp. &
humidity sensor cable main board.
3 Blood film drying Blood films and slides must

position temperature be heated to dry, and
temperature detection is the
4 Slide basket drying method of heating control.
The temperature values are read from the
assembly output port Therefore, heating level
responding sensors of the assemblies, and
temperature decides the temperature.
transmitted from sensors temperature
sensor cables drive board A J43.
5 Slide drying position
temperature
6 Diluent temperature /
The temperature is read from the temperature
sensor in the tubing, and transmitted from
temperature sensor temperature sensor
cable drive board A J43.
When the temperature of either position is out of normal range, look for the error following the
temperature transmission line. Often the error is caused by bad connection or cable damage.
6.4.12 Humidity sensor
Error Possible Troubleshooting Note

phenomenon Cause
The SM&S 1.Humidity 1.Enter the "Humidity Adjustment" screen and The
reports relative detection click the "Heat" button, wait for tens of seconds temperature
humidity is out board error and check whether the relative humidity and displayed on
of range; 2.Drive board temperature see obvious change. Under normal the
6-18
Hardware
Or you suspect A error circumstances, temperature will increase and adjustment

that relative 3. Loose relative humidity will drop, and the two values will screen is the
humidity is connection restore after you stop heating process. Also temperature
abnormal when 4. Cables get check "Sensor mains voltage", which should of the
troubleshooting damaged display "Normal" when there is no error. humidity
some system 2.If you see no change of humidity and sensor, not
error. temperature in step 1, reconnect the cables to the
the humidity detection board and repeat step 1. environment
temperature.
3.When the error still remains after step 1 and
step 2, replace humidity detection board and
drive board A, and repeat step 1.
6.4.13 Motor
The motors hardly go out of order themselves. Generally, they only get damaged when liquid gets
into them. If a motor does not work, the problem is more probably with the circuit board or cables.
6.4.14 Valve
Common errors relates to the gas valves include:
1. The valve orifice is clogged by foreign substances.

Replace the fault gas valve.
2. Liquid enters into the valve.

When the air filter and the dryer go wrong, liquid may enter the valve. To remove the error, replace
the valve and clear the liquid in the tubes.
3. Magnetic coil error (very unlikely).

Replace the fault gas valve.
6-19
Hardware
6.4.15 Circuit Boards Service Instructions
6.4.16 SM&S Main Board
Appearance
Connector Description
Table 9 SM&S main board hardware connectors
Position Description
No. Functions
No.
1 A3 Printer drive board communication /
socket
2 A5 Drive board B communication /
socket
3 A6 Drive board A communication /
socket
4 A10 Ultrasonic drive board /
communication socket
5 A11 Touch screen backlight socket /
6 A12 Touch screen control socket /
7 A14 Screen LVDS signal socket /
8 A17A18 USB 2.0 port /
9 A20A21 USB 2.0 port /
6-20
Hardware
10 A23 Status keypad socket /

11 A24 Door detection sensor socket /
12 A26 Liquid pressure detection board /
communication socket
13 A30-A31 Blood sample sensor socket /
14 A40 12V power input socket to analog /
circuit
15 J18 CF card socket /
16 P1 Button cell port Insert the cell in accordance with the
"Up and Bottom" side marks at the
metal position of the socket.
17 J15 Network interface plate /
18 A41 5V and 12V input to digital circuit /
Indicator Description
Table 10 SM&S main board indicator
No. Functions
No.
1 D6 FPGA status indicator Blue LED, flickers at the frequency
of 1Hz
2 D56 10M Ethernet connection status The indicator flickers when
indicator connected to the 10M Ethernet
3 D66 100M Ethernet connection status The indicator flickers when
4 D39 1000 Ethernet connection status The indicator flickers when
5 D67 Ethernet connection status indicator The indicator flickers when
connected to the Ethernet
6 D12 Sensor status indicator Use to detect whether the sensor
work properly When you block the
sensor, the indicator will first flicker
for 5 times and then stay on; when
you remove your hand, the indicator
will first flicker for 5 times, and then
turn off
7 D34 Digital 5V indicator
9 D29 Analog +12V indicator
Stay on under normal conditions
10 D32 Analog -12V indicator
11 D31 Analog 5V indicator
12 D30 Analog -5V indicator
6-21
Hardware
Test point
Table 11 SM&S main board test points
Position Normal voltage range (V) Description

No. Functions
No.
1 TP26 Digital 5V test point 4.75 ~ 5.25
2 TP20 Digital 3.3V test 3.13 ~ 3.47
point
3 TP25 Digital 2.5V test 2.38~ 2.63
point
4 TP124 Digital 12V test 11.4~ 12.6
Digital circuit ground
point
TP126 (DGND)
point
point
7 TP122 Digital 3.0V test 2.85 ~ 3.15
point
8 TP112 Digital +12V test 11.4 ~ 12.6
point
9 TP32 Digital -12V test -11.4 ~ -12.6
point Analog ground TP59
10 TP29 Digital +5V test 4.75 ~ 5.25 (AGND)
point
11 TP33 Digital -5V test -4.75 ~ -5.25
point
12 TP6 FPGA CLK test / /
point
Troubleshooting
Table 12 Troubleshooting SM&S main board

1 Cannot load the 1.Reconnect the CF card
system/screen does not
2.Reconnect cables at A12 and A11
turn on
3.Measure whether the TP124 voltage is normal
4.If TP124 voltage is normal and the cables to A11 is not
damaged and properly connected, then the COME analog
may be damaged and need to be replaced.
2 Software upgrade screen is 1.Check whether the two connectors of A6 are properly
prompted when the connected;
instrument is turned on
2.Check whether the two connectors of A5 are properly
6-22
Hardware
connected;
connected;
connected;
5.Check whether the D6 indicator (blue) on the main board
is flickering at the frequency of 1Hz;
When all above steps are performed but the error remains,
then the cables or the main board is damaged.
3 No report when error occurs 1.Check whether the status keypad is properly inserted
(A23); try reconnecting it;
2.Check whether the cables are damaged.
4 Touch screen does not 1.Check whether the touch screen control cables are
respond properly connected (A12); try reconnecting the cables;
2.Check whether the cables are damaged.
5 The touch screen does not Log in at the service access level, re-calibrate the touch
response at the touched screen
position
6.4.17 Power Drive Board
Appearance
6-23
Hardware
Figure 6-5 SM&S drive board structure of main test points
Figure 6-6 SM&S drive board structure of indicators
6-24
Hardware
Socket Description
Table 13 SM&S drive board sockets
No Pos. Board A Board B
1 J1 Analog 12V Analog 12V

2 J2 P24V and D5V P24V and D5V
3 J3 Sampling & dispensing vertical motor Slide vertical transport vertical motor
4 J4 Spreader slide vertical motor Automatic sampling mixing motor
5 J5 Spreader slide horizontal motor Automatic sampling rotary scanning motor
6 J6 Slide output loading motor Slide vertical transport horizontal motor
Slide output feeding and unloading
7 J7 Staining tray and stain pipette set motors
motors
8 J8 Slide storage loading motor Autoloader track unloading motor
9 J9 Slide transport and inversion motor Autoloader track feeding and loading motors
Sampling & dispensing horizontal
10 J10 Staining Pos.1 and Pos. 2 motors
motor and sampling position motor
11 J11 100ul and 2.ml syringe motors Staining Pos.3 and Pos. 4 motors
12 J17 MCU_JTAG MCU_JTAG
Communication port of SM&S and auto
13 J18 /
sample processing
Communication port of drive board and Communication port of drive board and data
14 J21
data board board
15 J24 Temp. & humidity sensor socket /
16 J25 / Scanner socket
Socket of drive board to air-pressure
17 J27 /
detection board
Socket of drive board to heating control
18 J28 /
board
Socket of drive board to liquid level
19 J29 /
detection board
20 J30 Valve board A socket Valve board B socket
21 J31 Container floater sensor socket 1 Middle bath floater sensor socket 1
22 J32 Container floater sensor socket 2 Rear bath floater sensor socket 1
Slide making subsystem 3-wire sensor
23 J33 Staining subsystem 3-wire sensor socket
socket 1
Slide making subsystem 4-wire sensor
24 J34 /
socket
25 J35 Slide output subsystem sensor socket 1 Auto loading subsystem sensor socket
Automatic sampling subsystem sensor
26 J36 Slide output subsystem sensor socket 2
socket
27 J37 Sampling & dispensing sensor socket Slide vertical transport subsystem sensor
6-25
Hardware
socket
28 J38 Spreader slide assembly sensor socket /

29 J39 Syringe sensor socket /
Socket of drive board to air-pressure
30 J40 /
detection board
Slide output subsystem analog sensor
31 J41 /
socket
Slide making subsystem analog sensor
32 J42 Slide drying analog sensor socket
socket
33 J43 Temperature sensor socket /
34 J46 FPGA upgrade socket FPGA upgrade socket
"/" means the socket is not used.
Table 14 SM&S drive board indicators
No Pos. Function Notes

1 D1 MCU operation indicator1 Not used
3 D3 MCU operation indicator3 After SM&S is initialized, the indicator flickers at the
frequency of 1Hz
4 D4 3.3V power indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
5 D5 5V power indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
6 D6 24V power indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
7 D7 Heating channel indicator1 Not used
8 D8 Heating channel indicator2 Not used
9 D9 Heating channel indicator3 Light on when heating the fan, and off when heating
completes
10 D10 Heating channel indicator4 Light on when heating the fan, and off when heating
completes
11 D11 Air-pressure detection board Stay on when not connected to the board; and off when
indicator connected
12 D12 Motor channel 10 indicator Flicker at the motor movement frequency when the
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
6-26
Hardware
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
motor is in action
26 D26 Liquid level detection board Not used
indicator
27 D37 Heating channel indicator5 Light on when heating the slide drying box, and off
when heating completes
28 D38 FPGA conf. complete Not used
indicator
29 D47 FPGA operation indicator1 Indicates FPGA operation status; flickers at the
frequency of 2Hz after the SM&S is electrified
30 D48 FPGA operation indicator2 Not used
31 D51 Analog +12V indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
32 D52 Analog -12V indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
33 D53 Analog +5V indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
34 D54 Analog -5V indicator The indicator stays on when the board card is
electrified
35 D60 Sensor indicator Not used
Test point
Table 15 SM&S drive board main test points
No. Pos. Test points Normal range of voltage (V) Notes
6-27
Hardware
1 TP16 Digital 5V 4.75 ~ 5.25

2 TP12 Digital circuit ground /
3 TP15 Digital 3.3V 3.13 ~ 3.47
Test in pair
5 TP8 Digital 2.5V 2.38~ 2.63
7 TP9 Digital1.2V 1.17~1.23
9 TP17 Power 24V 22.8~25.2
Test in pair
10 TP11 Power circuit ground /
11 TP23 Analog +12V 11.4~12.6
12 TP24 Analog -12V -11.4~-12.6
13 TP117 Analog +5V 4.65~5.35 Test in pair
14 TP118 Analog -5V -4.75~-5.25 with TP13
15 TP14 Analog 3.3V 3.294~3.306
16 TP13 Analog circuit ground /
Troubleshooting
Table 16 SM&S drive board troubleshooting
No. Error Troubleshooting

Many motors or sensors 1. Board card burnt: check whether the board card is
show abnormal status burnt or damaged. If yes, find the cause and replace the
board card
2. Power error: check whether any indicator is not on, and
the voltages are in normal range. If any abnormal, then
1
the board card is damaged
3. Cable problem: the cables of the SM&S run in a bundle.
Check for damage or fuse between cables, and replace
the cables if necessary. In addition, if any cable is not
tightly connected to the board card, reconnect it properly.
2 Motor channel abnormal 1. Power: check power indicators and voltage
2 .MCU and FPGA operation status: check whether the
3.3V power is good, and if MUC and FPGA indicators
flickers as expected
3.Check whether the logic is running properly, motor
indicators work as expected
4.Cables: check for damaged, broken or fused cables;
whether cables are tightly connected to board card
sockets or motor sockets
6-28
Hardware
5. Motors: if not the above problems, replace the motor.
1. Power: check power indicators and voltage

3 Sensor abnormal
If board card, MUC and FPGA run normally, check
Bad communication with
4 whether any cable is damaged, or cables are tightly
main control board
connected to the board card.
Bad communication with If board card, MUC and FPGA run normally, check
5 auto sample processing whether any cable is damaged, or cables are tightly
system connected to the board card.
6-29
Hardware
6.4.18 Printer Drive Board
Appearance
Figure 6-7 Printer drive board structure of test points and indicators
Socket Description
Table 17 Printer drive board sockets
No. Pos. Function Notes

1 J1 P24V and D5V /
Carbon strip detection
2 J4 /
analog sensor
3 J5 Digital sensor socket 1 /
For carbon strip inversion detection, use SEN6
4 J6 Digital sensor socket 2
and SEN7
5 J13 Socket to main control board /
Socket to the motor driving print head
6 J16 Socket to horizontal motor
horizontal movement
6-30
Hardware
Socket to the motor controlling print head

7 J17 Socket to depressing motor
depressing and torque holding
Socket to carbon strip Socket to the motor controlling carbon strip
8 J18
collection motor collection
9 J19 Socket to print head /
Table 18 Printer drive board indicators
No Pos. Function Notes

After SM&S is initialized, the indicator flickers at
1 D4 MCU operation indicator1
the frequency of 1Hz
4 D7 Printer status indicator Not used
5 D8 Sensor indicator Not used
After SM&S is initialized, the indicator flickers at
6 D9 FPGA operation indicator
the frequency of 2Hz
The indicator stays on when the board card is
7 D10 P24V power indicator
electrified
8 D11 5V power indicator
electrified
9 D12 3.3V power indicator
electrified
Horizontal motor operation status Flicker at the motor movement frequency when the
10 D15
indicator motor is in action
Depressing motor operation Flicker at the motor movement frequency when the
11 D16
status indicator motor is in action
Carbon strip collection motor Flicker at the motor movement frequency when the
12 D17
operation status indicator motor is in action
Test point
Table 19 Printer drive board test points
Normal range of voltage

No. Pos. Test points Notes
(V)
1 TP20 Digital 5V 4.75 ~ 5.25
3 TP21 Digital 3.3V 3.13 ~ 3.47
Digital 3.3V reference Test in pair
5 TP32 3.294~ 3.306
voltage
7 TP26 Digital 2.5V 2.38~ 2.63
6-31
Hardware
9 TP25 Digital 1.2V 1.17~1.23

11 TP19 Power 24V 22.8~25.2
Test in pair
12 TP22 Power circuit ground /
13 TP54 Analog 5V 4.75 ~ 5.25 Test in pair with TP23
Troubleshooting
Table 20 Troubleshooting printer drive board
No. Error Troubleshooting

Many motors or sensors 1. Board card burnt: check whether the board card is
show abnormal status burnt or damaged. If yes, find the cause and replace the
board card
2. Power error: check whether any indicator is not on, and
the voltages are in normal range. If any abnormal, then
1
the board card is damaged
3. Cable problem: the cables of the SM&S run in a bundle.
Check for damage or fuse between cables, and replace
the cables if necessary. In addition, if any cable is not
tightly connected to the board card, reconnect it properly.
2 Motor channel abnormal 1. Power: check power indicators and voltage
5.Motors: if not the above problems, replace the motor.
1. Power: check power indicators and voltage
3 Sensor abnormal
sockets or motor sockets.
If board card, MUC and FPGA work normally, check
Bad communication with
4 whether any cable is damaged, or whether cables are
main control board
tightly connected to the board card.
6-32
Hardware
Bad communication with If board card, MUC and FPGA work normally, check
5 auto sample processing whether any cable is damaged, or whether cables are
system tightly connected to the board card.
6.4.19 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board
Appearance
Figure 6-8 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board
Socket Description
Table 21 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board sockets
No. Position no. Function
1 J9 +24V input socket

2 J6 Serial communication socket,
connecting to main board
3 J8 Cleaning bath cable socket,
connected to the cleaning bath
4 J10 Cleaning bath cable socket,

shielded line socket
Table 22 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board indicators
6-33
Hardware
Position Function Description

No.
D3 Working status indicator 1.If the indicator flickers even when the ultrasonic
cleaning function is turned off, then the MCU
software has been burnt
2.When the "Self-adjust" function is performed on
the "Ultrasonic Debug" screen, the indicator should
stop flickering
D5 +12V power indicator The indicator stays on when power works properly
D6 +3.3V power indicator The indicator stays on when power works properly
D7 +5V power indicator The indicator stays on when power works properly
Test point
Table 23 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board test points
Position No. Function Description

D3V3 Test point of +3.3V Should be within the range of
power 3.13~3.47V when working properly
D5V Test point of +5V Should be within the range of
A12V Test point of +12V Should be within the range of
P24V Test point of +24V Should be within the range of
TP10(GND) Ground 0
Troubleshooting
Error code/ Possible Cause Troubleshooting Note

message/description
No sound or very low 1.Cleaning oscillator 1.Enter the "Ultrasonic Debug"
sound is heard during (cleaning bath screen and perform the "Self-adjust"
cleaning assembly) function. Check whether current
performance frequency and power under working
reduced conditions are within the reference
2.The cleaning range. If yes, but still no sound or
oscillator terminals very little sound is heard during the
are short-circuited cleaning process, then most
(or the cables to the probably the cleaning oscillator
cleaning board are performance is reduced. Replace
short-circuited) the oscillator (cleaning bath
assembly)
3.Ultrasonic cleaning
6-34
Hardware
drive board error 2.If the working frequency falls into

4.Connection is the reference range, but the power
loose or cable value is less than the low limit, try to
damaged adjust the frequency to target step
(open-circuited) by step (no more than +/-2KHz for
5.Main drive board every step), and perform
error. "self-adjust" function after every
step.
3.If neither working frequency nor
power fall in their reference ranges
after self-adjust, check the indicators
on the ultrasonic cleaning drive
board and the cables connecting the
main control board and the
ultrasonic board. Replace the
ultrasonic board or the main control
board to see whether the error can
be removed
Error: cannot adjust Ultrasonic cleaning 1.Enter the "Ultrasonic Debug"
frequency to a lower drive board error screen and make sure the target
value frequency fall into the reference
range. Manually adjust the working
frequency DA value to its maximum,
if then the working frequency is still
higher than the reference low limit,
then most probably the ultrasonic
cleaning drive board is with error.
Error: cannot adjust Ultrasonic cleaning 1.Enter the "Ultrasonic Debug"
frequency to a higher drive board error screen and make sure the target
value frequency fall into the reference
frequency DA value to its minimum,
if then the working frequency is still
lower than the reference high limit,
then most probably the ultrasonic
cleaning drive board is with error.
Error: power 1.Ultrasonic cleaning 1.Enter the "Ultrasonic Debug"
abnormally high drive board error screen and check whether the target
power value falls into the reference
power DA value. When the DA is
adjusted to lower than 30 and
current power is still higher than the
reference high limit, replace the
6-35
Hardware
ultrasonic cleaning drive board

Error: power 1.Cleaning oscillator 1.Enter the "Ultrasonic Debug"
abnormally low (cleaning bath screen and check whether the target
assembly) power value falls into the reference
performance range. Manually adjust the working
reduced power DA value to higher than 150,
2.The cleaning and check whether current power
oscillator terminals still falls into the reference range.
short-circuited (or 2.If the power is too small, adjust the
cleaning oscillator target frequency value step by step
cables (no more than +/-2 KHz for every
short-circuited) step), and perform self-adjust after
3.Ultrasonic cleaning every step. If the power still cannot
drive board error meet requirements, check whether
the cleaning oscillator terminals are
4.Connection is
short-circuited, or the cables get
loose or cable
loose or short-circuited; try replace
damaged
the oscillator or ultrasonic cleaning
(open-circuited)
drive board
6.4.20 Power Distributor Board
Appearance
Figure 9 Power distributor board structure of sockets
6-36
Hardware
No. Function
No.
1 J1 5V and 12V input to digital circuit Outgoing line connection to the
power assembly
2 J2 12V input to the analog circuit Outgoing line connection to the
power assembly
3 J3 12V and 24V input to the power Outgoing line connection to the
circuit power assembly
4 J4 Drive board A 5V output to the Connect drive board A and power
digital circuit and 24V output to the distributor board with cables
power circuit
5 J5 Drive board A 12V output to the Connect drive board A and power
analog circuit distributor board with cables
6 J6 Printer drive board 5V output to the Connect printer drive board and
digital circuit and 24V output to the power distributor board with cables
power circuit
7 J7 Drive board B 12V output to the Connect drive board B and power
analog circuit distributor board with cables
8 J8 Drive board B 5V output to the Connect drive board B and power
digital circuit and 24V output to the distributor board with cables
power circuit
9 J9 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board 24V Connect ultrasonic cleaning drive
output to the power circuit board and power distributor board
with cables
10 J10 Valve cleaning drive board 12V Connect the two valve drive boards
output to the power circuit to the power distributor board with
cables
11 J11 Data board 5V and 12V output to Connect main control board and
the digit circuit, and 12V output to power distributor board with cables
the power circuit
No. Function
No.
3 D3 Analog +12V indicator
4 D4 Analog -12V indicator Stay on under normal conditions
5 D7
Power 24V indicator
6 D2
7 D1 Power 12V indicator
6-37
Hardware
6.4.21 Status Keypad
Appearance
Figure 6-10 Top side of status keypad
Figure 6-11 Bottom side of status keypad
Socket Description
No. Function
No.
1 J1 Communication socket to main /
control board
1. Indicator of main unit working status
The keypad uses a bi-color indicator (yellow and green) and a buzzer to indicate the main unit
6-38
Hardware
working status. When the system is standby, the bi-color indicator lights in yellow; when the system
is working properly, the bi-color indicator lights in green; and when the system is with error, the
bi-color indicator flickers in green at the frequency of 1Hz. When the system works properly, the
buzzer is silent; but when there is any error with the system, the buzzer buzzes.
2. Start-up with soft switching
Start-up: when the power cord is plugged and the power switch is turned on, the system goes into
standby mode (bi-color indicator lights in yellow) when the power system is closed. When the soft
switch (located under the keypad) is pressed, the power system begins to supply power the main
unit starts to work, and the bi-color lights in green.
6.4.22 Touch Screen Control Board
Appearance
Figure 6-12 Touch screen control board
Socket Description
No. Position Function Description
6-39
Hardware
No.
1 J4 Connect the touch screen to supply /
voltage to the touch screen
electrodes and collect information
from the touch spots
2 J5 Connect the main control board, /
and transmit the touch spot signals
to the main control board through
RS232 level serial port
None
Test point
Table 24 Touch screen control board adjustment and test points

Test point Tested signal Function
TP1 GND Digital circuit ground
TOUCH_DIN Test touch screen controller sampling
TP2
input data
TP3 TOUCH_NPENIRQ Test touch screen signals
TP4 LR X+ electrode
WIPER Test the voltage of the touch spots of
TP5
the 5-wire touch screen
Troubleshooting
Table 25 Troubleshooting the touch screen control board

Error phenomenon Possible Cause Solution
Touch screen does not Touch screen control board Reconnect the cables/replace
respond fails/touch screen/cables get the touch screen main
loose board/touch screen
The cursor can only move in The cable connecting the Reconnect the cable/check
horizontal or vertical direction touch screen main board and whether there is any crack on
when touching the screen the touch screen gets the touch screen. If yes,
loose/touch screen is broken replace the touch screen
The cursor does not move to Touch screen is not properly Re-calibrate the touch
a certain position calibrated/touch screen is screen/check whether there
broken is any crack on the touch
screen. If yes, replace the
touch screen
6-40
Hardware
6.4.23 Fluid Detection Board
Appearance
Top
Bottom
Socket Description
No. Function
No.
1 J1 The socket connects the drive /
board. Through the socket, voltage
is supplied to the fluid detection
board and fluid level information is
uploaded to the drive board.
Table 26 Indicators of the fluid detection board

Position Color Description
6-41
Hardware
No.
D1~D6 Green On means there is no fluid in the sensor of the luminotron.
Off means there is fluid in the sensor of the luminotron.
D7 Red On means the fluid detection board is working, D1~D6 can
detect if there is fluid.
Off means the fluid detection board is in standby mode, D1~D6
cannot detect if there is fluid.
Test point
Test point Tested signal Function

TP4 VREF Reference voltage of test signal
Troubleshooting
When error occurs to the fluid detection board, the analyzer will report "insufficient reagent".
Troubleshoot the fluid detection board error as per the following procedure:
6-42
Hardware
Error of Insufficient
reagentis reported
NO NO
J1.2 v J1.10 voltage Fluid detection board Indicator
Other errors
is 5V? lights in red when running?
YES
YES
NO
J1.9 v J1.10 voltage
Other errors
is 0? D1~D6 (green indicators)on the Fluid
NO
fluid detection board light on or detection
off when there is or no liquid at board error
the corresponding sensors
YES
Fluid YES
detection
board error
The voltage of the
LIQ position on
corresponding JI is NO Fluid
higher than 4V when detection
D1~D6 light on, and board error
lower than 1V when
the indicators are off.
YES
Other errors
Figure 6-13 Troubleshooting procedure
6-43
Hardware
6.4.24 Air-pressure Detection Board
Appearance
Power
indicators
Figure 6-14 Air-pressure detection board structure
Socket Description
No. Function
No.
1 J1 The socket connects to the drive /
board; and the detected
air-pressure is uploaded through
the socket
Table 27 Air-pressure detection board indicators

Indicator and functions
The LED indicator stays on under normal conditions
When the indicator lights off, then the analog 5V power
supply to the air-pressure detection board is with error.
Analog 5V power
D1 Check whether the cables connecting the air-pressure
supply indicator
detection board and the mother board are properly
plugged, or the analog 5V voltage of the driving control
board is normal.
When the indicator lights off, then the digital 3.3V power
Digital 3.3V power
D2 supply to the air-pressure detection board is with error.
supply indicator
Check whether the cables connecting the air-pressure
detection board and the mother board are properly
6-44
Hardware
plugged, or the digital 3.3V voltage of the driving control

board is normal.
Test point
Table 28 Test points on the air-pressure detection board

Test point Description
TP1 Pressure detection channel 1, sensor output
TP11 5V input to the analog circuit
TP12 Analog ground
TP13 3.3V input to the digital circuit
TP14 Digital circuit ground
Troubleshooting
Error with the air-pressure detection board will cause abnormal pressure of the whole device and
trigger alarm. When the SM&S reports error of "abnormal pressure", follow the troubleshooting
procedure below.
6-45
Hardware
Pressure error is
reported
N
All channels report
error
1. Check whether pneumatic unit is

started; Identify the faulty channel
2. Check whether the air-pressure tubing
detection board analog 5V indicator
lights on;
3. Check whether drive control board
analog power indicator work properly
N
Crystallization in the
tubing?
1. Re-connect the cables. If error is
removed, end service; otherwise turn to
step 2; Y
2. Replace drive control board. If error is
step 3; Replace air-pressure
Gas leakage in the tubing
3. Replace the cables. If error is detection board
step 4;
4. Replace the air-pressure detection
board.
Repair the tubing
Record error information and service

log. Return the failed parts.
End
Figure 6-15 Troubleshooting for abnormal pressure of the whole device
6.4.25 Liquid Pressure Detection Board
Function overview
Liquid pressure detection board (clog detection board) detects the liquid pressure, which is then
transmitted in the form of the liquid pressure signals to ADC through the liquid pressure sensor. The
signals are then transferred to digital signals and transmit to data board through serial port
transmission.
6-46
Hardware
Figure 6-16 Liquid pressure detection board structure
Socket Description
No. Function
No.
1 J1 The socket connects the liquid /
pressure sensor which receives
liquid pressure signals
2 J4 The socket connects data board. It
supplies power and works as the
serial port to transmit the digital
signals of liquid pressure to data
board.
Indicator Definition functions

D6 5V voltage indicator When the indicator is off, the 5V voltage is abnormal,
and you need to check if the 12V voltage is OK.
12V power supply
D7 When the indicator lights off, then the digital 12V power
indicator
supply to the liquid pressure detection board is with
6-47
Hardware
error. Check whether the cables connecting the liquid

pressure detection board and the data board are
properly plugged, or the digital 12V voltage of the data
board is normal.
Test point
None
Troubleshooting
None
6.4.26 Valve Drive Board
Function overview
The valve drive board is used for multi-valve control. The 12V power for the drive board is supplied
by the power distributor board, and the control signals are from driving control board. There are two
valve drive boards in the SM&S, which are exactly the same (only differentiated as board A and
board B by their locations) and can be exchanged during service.
3
4
1
Valve drive
Valve 1
board A
Power
Drive board
3
distributor
4
Valve drive 2
Valve 2
board B
Figure 6-17 Valve drive board connection block diagram
On the figure above, and are both control signals output by driving control board; is the
12V power supply to the valve drive board, and shows various external valves to the valve drive
board.
6-48
Hardware
Appearance:
D50
D141 D142 D143

D51
D119 ~ D140
(Increased from right
to left)
D52
D54 D53
D55
D101 D100
D144 ~ D161 (Increased from right to D103 ~ D118 (Increased from right to
left) left)
Figure 6-18 Valve drive board structure
On above figure, the blocks indicate the locations of valve drive board indicators.
Socket Description
No. Function
No.
1 J1 Gas valve socket /
4 J4 Connect the drive board, the /
information socket to the valve
control
5 J5 12V power socket /
Test point
There are relatively large number of indicators (68 in all), and some of them are for reservation
purpose.
Table 29 Valve drive board (A) indicators

Indicator Definition functions
Under normal conditions, this LED indicator stays
Digital 5V power on. When it is off, check whether the valve control
D50
indicator cables are well connected, and whether the 5V
output power works properly.
Under normal conditions, this LED indicator stays
12V power supply on. When it is off, check whether the valve control
D51
indicator cables are well connected, and whether the 5V
output power works properly.
Valve cable status This is a green LED indicator. When the indicator
D52
indicator lights on, the valve cables are correctly connected.
6-49
Hardware
This is a red LED indicator. When the indicator

Valve cable status
D53 lights on, the valve cables are not correctly
indicator
connected.
This is a red LED indicator. When the indicator
Valve cable status
D54 lights on, the valve cables are not correctly
indicator
connected.
Valve cable status This is a green LED indicator. When the indicator
D55
indicator lights on, the valve cables are correctly connected.
When the LED indicator is on, the valve is not
Valve operation
D101~D161 connected, or it is connected but not electrified.
indicator
When the indicator is off, the valve is electrified.
Troubleshooting
When the valve drive board is with error, the valve cannot be turned on or off as expected. There
are various possible reasons for the valve issue, for example, driving circuit damage, valve damage,
valve cable broken or not properly connected. When a valve cannot perform actions, follow below
instruction for troubleshooting:
No action of valves
N
No valve works?
Y N
All valves connected to
a certain valve drive
board do not work?
1. Use a multimeter to measure whether
the 12V power voltage is in reference 1. Check whether the valve
range; Y cables are properly
2. Check whether the drive control board connected, and any pin falls
works properly; out;
3.Check whether the 12V power supply 1. Check whether the 12V power cord 2. Test the valve drive circuit
cord and valve drive board control cable and valve drive board control cable get on the instrument screen;
on the valve drive board get loose; loose; 3. If the valve drive circuit is
4. If all the three steps fail, replace the 2. If the error still remains, replace the broken, replace the valve
valve drive board. valve drive board. drive board; otherwise
replace the valve.
Record error information and service log.

Return the faulty parts.
End
Figure 6-19 Troubleshooting for valve not performing actions
6-50
Hardware
During troubleshooting, pay special attention to the following 3 points:
1.When checking the valve cable connections, do not forget to check whether the contact pins of
sockets J1~J3 (especially the pins on both sides of the sockets, which are easily be ignored) on
the valve drive board are bent.
2.When the two red indicators on a valve drive board light on, check whether the valve cables on the
valve drive board are wrongly connected.
3.To identify errors of valve driving circuit, close the pneumatic unit through the software screen first;
then tap "Menu" "Service""Debug" to go the "Valve" screen and tap the valve numbers
and check the how the corresponding valve indicators respond on the valve drive board. Under
normal conditions, when taping a valve number, the indicator of the corresponding channel will
light off for about 1 second, and then light on again. When a valve indicator stays off, the valve
driving circuit is damaged, or the valve cables are not correctly connected. When the valve
indicator stays on (instead of turning off first), then the valve driving circuit is damaged.
6-51
Hardware
6.4.27 Heating Control Board
Function Overview
Heating control board drives the heaters of 5 channels: reaction bath, sheath tank, preheating bath,
optical system and flow cell). It is supplied with AC 24V power by the transformer, and receives 5
channels of control signals from the driving control board.
Transformer
Mother Drive control

Heating control board board board
Reaction Sheath Preheating Optical

bath Flow cell
bath bath system
Heating Temp Heating Temp Heating Temp Heating Temp Heating Temp
film switch film switch film switch film switch film switch
Figure 6-20 Heating control board connections
On above figure, indicates the AC 24V power supplied by transformer to the heating control
board; indicates the 5 channels of heating control signals output by the driving control board;
and shows the heating assemblies of the 5 channels connected to the heating control board.
6-52
Hardware
Appearance
Indicators
of the 5
channels
Figure 21 Heating control board structure
Socket Description
None
The 5 indicators on the driving control board indicate the heating status of their corresponding
channels:
Table 30 Heating driving board indicators
No. Indicator Functions
Reaction bath heating The indicator lights on or flickers when the
D11
indicator reaction bath assemblies are being heated.
Sheath bath heating The indicator lights on or flickers when the
D12
indicator sheath bath assemblies are being heated.
Preheating bath The indicator lights on or flickers when the
D13
heating indicator preheating bath assemblies are being heated.
Flow cell heating The indicator lights on or flickers when the flow
D14
indicator cell assemblies are being heated.
Optical system heating The indicator lights on or flickers when the
D15
indicator optical system assemblies are being heated.
The heating control board owns 5 heating channels, each of which has 2 protective tubes.
Table 31 Protective tubes of the heating channels

Heating channels Protective tubes
Reaction bath F1, F7
Sheath tank F2, F8
Preheating bath F3, F9
6-53
Hardware
Flow cell F4, F10

Optical System F5, F11
Test point
None
Troubleshooting
When the heating control board is with error, the heating assemblies will not be heated; and the
SM&S reports error when the assembly temperature is lower than alarming temperature. When
there is heating problem, following below instruction for troubleshooting:
Error is reported when

assembly temp. is lower
than alarming value
Temp. of 5 N
channels all
low?
Y Heating indicator (on the N

heating control board) of
Transformer the faulty channel on?
N output voltage is
about 24V?
Fuse of the faulty N

Drive control board
heating indicator channel fused?
1. Reconnect transformer output cable. on? N
If transformer output voltage is
abnormal, turn to step 2;
2. Check whether the slide switch of 1. Reconnect
power assembly is at correct position. heating control
If not, switch it to the correct position. If Y board cable. If no
Heating extension Replace the use, turn to step 2;
voltage is still abnormal, turn to step 3;
1.Upgrade drive line or heating heating control 2. Replace the
3.Replace the transformer. If the
Reconnect heating board MCU and assembly board heating control
voltage is still abnormal, turn to step 4;
control cable. If no FPGA program; damaged. Replace board cable. If no
4.Replace input voltage patching
use, replace the 2. If no use, them. use, turn to step 3.
board. If voltage is still abnormal, turn
cable replace drive 3. Replace heating
to step 5;
control board. control board.
5. Replace transformer input and
output cables.
Record error information and

service log. Return the faulty
parts.
End
Figure 6-22 Troubleshooting for system heating problem
There are two possible problems that may cause heating control board failure. Follow below
instruction for troubleshooting:
6-54
Hardware
1.Protective tube fused. All the heating channels of the heating drive board are fitted with protective
tubes, and fused tubes are the main cause of heating control board failure. The problem can be
confirmed simply by checking the circuit of the two ends of the tube (should be short-circuited
under normal conditions). When the tube of certain channel is broken circuit, replace the
corresponding tube.
2.Control circuit is broken (comments get damaged, loosen, or have dry joint) Replace the
corresponding control circuit.
Table 32 Troubleshooting of the control circuit of heating control board

No Heating channels Control circuit troubleshooting
.
1 Reaction bath Replace R1, Q1 and R11
2 Sheath tank Replace R2, Q2 and R12
3 Preheating bath Replace R3, Q3 and R13
4 Flow cell Replace R4, Q4 and R14
5 Optical System Replace R5, Q5 and R6
3.Electric relay breaks If 1 and 2 are not the problem, then some electric relay must have broken.
Replace the electric relay of the corresponding channel.
6-55
Hardware
6.4.28 Humidity Detection Board
Function overview
The humidity detection board detects environment relative humidity. It has a quite simple structure,
composed of a PCB and humidity sensor with no other function circuit. Beside relative humidity
detection, the humidity sensor also boasts a self-test function. The test results will be uploaded to
drive board A through connecting cables.
Figure 6-23 Humidity detection board (top and bottom)
Socket Description
Table 33 Humidity detection board sockets
Pin no. Description Note
1 Ground Pin 1 is indicated by

triangle arrow
2 Signal controlling
3 Signal controlling
4 +3.3V power supply
6-56
Hardware
6.4.29 Power Supply Assembly
Function overview
The power supply assembly supplies power to different modules of the SM&S:
Name Output voltage Supplied by
function
D5V Digital 5V 051-001627-00
D12V Digital 12V 3204 power board PCBA
P12V Power 12V

P24V-B Power 24V
A12V Analog 12V
A12V_N Analog -12V
P24V-A Power 24V 022-000136-00 24V/150W power
module
AC24V AC 24V 006-000121-00 Insulation transformer
Socket Description
Table 34 Sockets inside power assembly

No. Function
No.
1 J101 Circuit board AC input socket 3204 Power board
2 J2 Fan power supply socket
3 CN1 AC input socket 24V/150W power module
4 CN2 P24V-A voltage + output socket
5 CN3 P24V-A voltage + output socket
6 CN4 Control signal socket
7 J2 Assembly AC input socket Input voltage patching board
8 J3 Insulation transformer AC input
socket
9 J1 3204 power board socket
10 J4 24V/150W power module socket
There is no indicator inside the power assembly.
Test point
Table 35 Test points inside power assembly

Hardware
No. Position No. Function Description
1 TP10 and 11 Power P24V output port 3204 power board
2 TP1 and 2 Power P12V output port
3 TP3, 4, 12 and Power P24V and P12V output

13 (ground)
4 TP21 Digital D12V output (ground)
5 TP22 Digital D12V output port
6 TP15 Analog A12V output port

7 TP16 and 17 Analog A12V and A-12V output
(ground)
8 TP18 Analog A-12V output port
9 TP5 and 6 Digital D5V output port
10 TP7 and 8 Digital D5V output (ground)
Troubleshooting
Table 36 Troubleshooting for power issues

1 The SM&S does not start up or Check whether the hardware board cards
respond when electrified are electrified one by one. If none of the
board cards are electrified, pay special
attention to the following two points:
1.Whether F1 and F2 on the input voltage
patching board are normal;
2.Whether 3204 power board works
properly.
2 Some heaters do not work Check whether insulation transformer
output voltages are normal
3 P24V-A does not have voltage output 1.Check whether the control signal
connectors of the 24V/150W power
module are properly mounted;
2.Check whether output connectors fall
out.
6-58
Hardware
6.4.30 Network Board
Appearance
Figure 6-24 Mini network board PCBA (top and bottom)
Troubleshooting
Table 37 Troubleshooting the network board

Error
Cause Troubleshooting method
phenomenon
Step 1: Check if the network cable connection
is loose. If yes, reconnect the cable and see if
1. The network
the problem is solved; if no, go to step 2.
cable is not
Step 2: Take out the mini network board, and
properly
The PC cannot test the conducting state of the pins of J1 and
connected;
communicate J2 (see the figure above for pin definition of J1
2. The cable is
with SM&S and J2). If pin 1-8 of J1 are conducted with pin
damaged or in
1-8 of J2, then the mini network board is OK,
poor contact with
and the error may be caused by some other
the socket
part of the SM&S; otherwise the mini network is
damaged and must be replaced.
The table above can be represented by the flow chart below:
6-59
Hardware
PC not communicate with

SM&S
YES
Plug the Cable connector to the mini
connector tightly network board gets loose?
NO
YES Pin 1~8 of JI can be put through

Other errors to
pin 1~8 of J2?
NO
Mini network
board error
Figure 6-25 Troubleshooting the network board
6.4.31 FRU list

Part No. Name
051-001508-00 3204 SM&S data board
C-009-004101-00 3204 keypad cable
C-009-003524-00 USB extension line
009-004177-00 Cover close detection sensor cable
009-004178-00 Staining bath cover sensor extension cable
C-009-003961-00 Drive board B communication cable
C-009-003510-00 Ultrasonic serial port cable
C-009-003516-00 Fluid pressure detection board cable
C-009-003469-00 Printer drive board communication cable
C-009-003858-00 Digital 5V and 12V board card power line
C-009-003532-00 LCD screen backlight cable
C-009-003534-00 Touch screen control board cable
C-009-003531-00 LCD screen signal cable
051-001515-00 3204 power drive board
3204 slide output subsystem loading cable extension
C-009-003447-00 line
C-009-003446-00 3204 slide output subsystem loading cables
3204 slide output subsystem feeding cable extension
C-009-003449-00 line
C-009-003448-00 3204 slide output subsystem feeding cables
6-60
Hardware
3204 slide output subsystem analog sensor extension

C-009-004093-00 line
C-009-004094-00 3204 slide output subsystem analog sensor cable
C-009-003515-00 Fluid level detection board connection line
C-009-003458-00 3204 slide making subsystem sensor extension line
C-009-003456-00 3204 slide making subsystem sensor cables
C-009-003457-00 3204 slide making subsystem motor extension line
C-009-004095-00 3204 slide making subsystem motor cables
C-009-004097-00 3204 slide making subsystem analog extension line
C-009-004096-00 3204 slide making subsystem analog sensor cable
C-009-003454-00 3204 spreader slide assembly extension line
C-009-003453-00 3204 spreader slide assembly cables
C-009-003452-00 3204 spreader slide assembly movement cable
C-009-004098-00 3204 dispensing subsystem extension line
C-009-003501-00 3204 dispensing subsystem cables
C-009-003499-00 3204 dispensing subsystem movement cable
C-009-003451-00 3204 dispensing subsystem syringe cable
C-009-003477-00 Humidity and temperature sensor cable
C-009-003984-00 WC_B floater extension line
C-009-003851-00 Container floater cable 2
C-009-003850-00 Container floater cable 1
C-009-003985-00 LC_D floater extension line
C-009-003522-00 Temperature sensor cable
C-009-003482-00 Heating drive control signal cable
C-009-003859-00 Drive board cables to digital and power circuit
C-009-003437-00 3204 auto loading subsystem extension line
C-009-003438-00 3204 auto loading subsystem cables
C-009-003442-00 3204 automatic sampling subsystem movement cable
C-009-003441-00 3204 automatic sampling subsystem extension line
C-009-003443-00 3204 automatic sampling subsystem cables
C-009-003489-00 3204 staining subsystem cables
C-009-003496-00 3204 vertical transport subsystem extension line
C-009-003495-00 3204 vertical transport subsystem movement cable
C-009-003514-00 Air pressure detection board cable
C-009-003521-00 Communication cable to auto sample processing line
C-009-003530-00 Scanner cable
C-009-003527-00 Pneumatic unit patching line
C-009-003859-00 Drive board cables to digital and power circuit
C-009-003961-00 Drive board B communication cable
051-001356-00 Print drive control board
6-61
Hardware
C-009-003468-00 Printer drive board communication cable

051-001438-00 Ultrasonic cleaning drive board
C-009-003510-00 Ultrasonic serial port cable
051-001543-00 SM&S power distributor board
3101-30-68519 Keyboard
051-000218-00 Clog detection board
051-000329-00 Valve drive board A
051-000507-00 Air-pressure Detection Board
051-000329-00 Valve drive board B
050-000237-00 Heating control board
C-009-003467-00 12V power output cable to analog circuit
C-009-003464-00 5V and 12V output cables to power circuit
C-009-003465-00 12V and 24V output cables to power circuit
801-3003-00015-00 4-wire sensor
801-0030-00003-00 3-wire sensor (short wire)
011-000022-00 3-wire sensor (long wire)
801-BA80-00241-00 Reflective sensor
009-003966-00 Cylinder magnetic switch with cables 2
2000-10-03046 Floater
3100-20-40786 Large floater
M07-00091S-00 Micro-switch (light-touch switch)
0030-10-13064 Linear stepping motor (5V, 1.8 degree)
0000-10-10985 Stepping motor 3.7V 1.8 degree 3.2kgfcm single shaft
3100-21-49049 Mixing motor and the connecting cable
6-62
7 Software System
7.1 Software Update

The update process includes 3 phases:
Trigger update: there are 2 scenarios for trigger update:
Version match: The instrument will auto detect if the system hardware (MCU, FPGA)
changes (comparing with the results after the previous update) during each startup process, if
yes, the update procedure will be started;
Active trigger of users: Users of service access level or above may perform "Update"
(State->Version Info.) to trigger software update.
See the following figure for the scenarios that triggers software update:
Update
Startup
triggered
Version matching (identify the

version information of the software
assemblies which need update)
Hardware needs
to be updated?
Update hardware
(MCU/FPGA)
N
Update application
software and
configuration data
END
7-1
Software System
Preparation phase: When update is triggered (click "Yes") in the update program screen, the
update package in the USB flash drive will be copied and decompressed to the CF card.
Update process: attempting to update to the new version according to the version matching
result. The process may last for tens of minutes.
7.2 Notes before Update

Update duration
Prepare to update: complete copying update package from the USB flash drive and
decompressing to the CF card, the process lasts for 4~5 minutes;
Update application software: about 5~8 minutes;
Update hardware of a drive board (MCU+FPGA): about 6~10 minutes.
Note 1: The SC-120 has 3 drive boards (MCU and FPGA of drive board A, B and the
print drive board may be updated) and a main board (FPGA may be updated). Duration of the
update process differs with difference between the old and new versions, for example,
duration of updating FPGA of 1 drive board is much shorter than that of updating FPGA of 3
drive boards.
Note 2: Do not disconnect power of the instrument during the update process, even if the
process bar stays still for a while, or the update may fail or the instrument cannot be started.
Troubleshooting in the Update Process
If loading USB flash drive failed and the message "Connect the USB flash drive!" is displayed,
please insert the USB again, and start update after about 10 seconds (you may try several
times); if the same message displays again, check if the USB flash drive is damaged.
If there are boot software, microcontroller unit software and FPGA in the in update package,
and the instrument reports update failure, please do not restart or power off the instrument.
Check the USB flash drive and the update package for their correctness, and then restart
update procedure.
If power supply interruption occurs during the update process, please restore power supply,
the update module will be run automatically when the instrument is restarted.
Note: If update procedure is not completed or failed, it will be run again after the
instrument is restarted; do not click "Cancel" to quit updating then. Otherwise the update
procedure will not be run again even if the previous update actions have made the software
unstable, and thus the instrument may not be able to get started.
Do not unplug the USB flash drive during the update process.
7-2
Software System
7.3 Update Procedure

Step 1: Start update with service access level
1. Start the WINDOWS operating system;

2. Insert the main unit installation disk into the DVD ROM of the PC, and open the disk in
"My Computer";
3. Find the file update.tar.gz and copy it the the root directory of the USB flash drive (do not
decompress), and insert the USB flash drive the the USB port in the right side of the
SC-120.
Step 2: Start update with administrator access level
1. Insert the new CF card to the slot of the instrument, power on the instrument, perform
touchscreen calibration and then enter the version match screen.
7-3
8 Manual Maintenance
8.1 Tools and Consumables
Tools
Table 1 Tool List
No. Tool Name Quantity Remarks

1 Cross-head 1
screwdriver
2 Flat-headed 1
screwdriver
3 Inner hexagon 1 (suite)
spanner
4 Diagonal pliers 1
5 Tweezers 1
6 Blade 1
7 Small brush 1
Consumables
Table 2 List of Consumables
No. Tool Name Quantity Remarks

1 Gloves 1 pair
2 Tissues 1 roll
3 Cable tie (medium) Several
for
possible
use
4 Cotton swabs for medical 1 pack
use
5 Cleaning cloth 1
6 Alcohol for medical use 1 bottle
8.2 Maintenance Plan

8.2.1 When to Maintain
The manual maintenance includes daily maintenance and half-year maintenance according
to the required frequency of maintenance. The daily maintenance procedures are designed to
8-1
Manual Maintenance
be completed by operators of the instrument according to the instructions of the operator's

manual; while the half-year maintenance procedures should be performed by service
engineers.
8-2
Manual Maintenance
8.3 What to Maintain

The way of half-year maintenance could be inspection, maintenance, and replacement. Inspection is to check and determine whether maintenance is needed;
maintenance is to clean directly; and replacement is to replace the wearing parts with new ones.
8.3.1 Inspection Items

Inspection
No. What to Inspect How to Inspect Remarks
Item
Whether the temperature, humidity,
Instrument Tap "Status" > "Temp.&Humidity&Pressure" and check
1 pressure/vacuum values are in the corresponding /
status the values displayed.
ranges.
Check whether the rotation speeds of the 3 fans Tap "Status" > "Temp.&Humidity&Pressure", and then
Fan rotation
2 around the slide trying position are in required tap the second button. Wait 5-10 minutes for the /
speed
range. temperature and fan rotation speed to be stable.
If the instrument is
connected to the auto
Tap "Service" > "Analog Sensor Calibration" to go to
sample process
Perform "Auto Cal.", and check whether the the screen. Note: there are 3 pages, and click the
system, skip the "Tube
3 Analog sensor voltage value is within range rather than being page down button when necessary.
Detection Sensor" and
highlighted in red. If there is anything abnormal in the calibration process,
"Unloading tray of the
clean the holes and openings of the sensor.
auto loading module
full".
If the floater is not
Tap "Status" > "Floater Status", and check the OC_B
disconnected when
Location: right posterior of the instrument, near the field.
removing the top
reagent connectors. If it is "Full", disconnect the floater cable, remove the
4 Overflow bath cover, there may be
Check the floater status: must be "Empty" (check top cover of the overflow bath, and then remove the
false floater error
at the Status screen). reagent and crystals inside the bath. Install the
report, asking you to
overflow bath back, and connect the floater.
restart the instrument.
Backflow
Location: left posterior of the instrument (outside). For anything abnormal, shut down the pneumatic unit,
prevention Do not use alcohol to
5 Check whether there is unexpected substance, and remove the backflow prevention bath for manual
bath of the clean the bath
crystal, or reagent inside the bath. cleaning.
pneumatic unit
8-3
Manual Maintenance
Location: right posterior of the instrument, behind

For anything abnormal, shut down the pneumatic unit,
Internal buffer the cisterns, 9 in all.
6 and remove the backflow prevention bath for manual /
cisterns Check whether there is unexpected substance,
cleaning.
crystal, or reagent inside the bath.
Location: right posterior of the instrument, 2 in all. If there is, wipe them away; if there are too many and
7 Syringes /
Check whether there are crystals on the plunger corrosion is found, replace the syringe assembly.
Location: left anterior of the instrument.
8 Slide gripper Check whether there is residue in the gripper. See If there is, wipe it away using alcohol. /
0
If not, remove the carbon stripe, and then wipe the After cleaning the print
Location: right anterior of the instrument. print head (the part in contact with the carbon strip) head, leave it drying in
9 Print head
Check whether the printout is readable. gently using cotton swab dipped with alcohol. Install the air for several
the carbon strip back. minutes.
There are 20 in all. Check whether the indentation If there is stain or residue, clean it using cotton swab
10 Slide baskets /
positions, and the exterior are clean. dipped with methanol or alcohol.
Location: where the slide is placed in the slide
Slide basket basket.
11 If not, cleaning it using alcohol. /
guide block Check whether the interior slope surface of the
slide basket is clean.
Slide basket Location: middle anterior of the instrument. If there is any unexpected substance, wipe it away
12 /
loading belts Check whether the two belts are clean. using alcohol.
Location: check places around the track of the
Places inside slide shuttle truck, the staining tray, and slide
13 Clear out the slide/residue if there is any. /
the instrument baskets, to see whether there is slide or glass
residue.
Location: 1) where the slide is loaded to the shuttle
truck; 2) where the slide goes to the levering slots;
3) where the slide is put into the dryer; 4) where
Slide the slide is inserted into the stain position 1; 5) If deviation is found, go to the "Position Adjust" screen,
14 /
positioning where the slide is placed in the slide basket. and adjust using corresponding fixtures.
Check the slide when it is being placed into the
locations above, to see whether the slide rubs the
edge or tilt.
8-4
Manual Maintenance
8.3.2 Maintenance Items

No. Maintenance Item What to Maintain How to Maintain Remarks
Location: right anterior of the instrument.
Clear the glass residue inside the slide
1 Slide loading mechanism See 0 /
storage box, and around the slide loading
track.
Location: middle of the instrument.
Clean the OV probe wipe, exterior wall and
Sampling & dispensing Clean the blood residue on the OV probe
2 cleaning bath of the dispensing probe Do not use alcohol
mechanism wipe, exterior wall of the dispensing probe,
manually.
and the dispensing probe cleaning bath.
Location: middle anterior of the instrument.
Clean the reagent crystals and blood residues
3 Piercing probe wipe Wipe using cotton swabs dipped with alcohol. /
which may left on the probe wipe surfaces
and the parts around it.
Location: middle of the instrument.
Spreader slide cleaning
4 Clean the reagent crystals and dusts at the Wipe using cotton swabs dipped with alcohol. /
bath
cleaning bath opening and around the bath.
The screws are made
Clean the spreading edge of the spreader Wipe using cotton swabs dipped with alcohol.
of stainless steel. Do
5 Spreader slide slide and the 10mm part upper to remove the Uninstall the spreader slide for cleaning if
not make them fall
blood residue and reagent crystals if any. necessary.
inside the instrument.
Location: left posterior of the instrument,
inside the staining tray, 32 in all.
6 Staining cassettes See 0 /
Clean the residue on the interior and exterior
walls of the cassettes.
Location: left anterior of the instrument.
Upper surfaces of the
7 Clean the stain residue, dusts, scraps, or See 0 /
staining tray
other unexpected substances.
Location: left posterior of the instrument,
Blocking mechanisms (4 around the staining tray.
8 See 0 /
in all) Clean the stain residue, dusts, scraps, or
other unexpected substances.
Top plate of the slide Location: left anterior of the instrument. Dip the cleaning cloth with alcohol, and then Do not make the
9
basket unloading tray Clean the dusts, scraps or other unexpected wipe the top of the tray from edges to the unexpected
8-5
Manual Maintenance
substances on it. center. Remove the unexpected substances substances on the tray
gathered in the center. top fall down to the
inside of the
instrument.
Dip the cleaning cloth with alcohol, and then
Location: front of the instrument.
Autoloader top plate wipe the top of the tray from edges to the Skip this item for
10 Clean the dusts, scraps or other unexpected
(stand-alone model) center. Remove the unexpected substances integrated model.
substances on it.
gathered in the center.
For the stain waste container cap assembly, dip
Waste container cap There should be no solid impurities left on the it in methanol for half an hour; for blood sample Skip this item for direct
11
assembly floater or the rod. waste container cap assembly, dip it in diluted waste discharge.
probe cleanser for 5 minutes.
Clean the Residues inside the Slide Loading Mechanism
Manual cleaning may be needed for the following places:

1.Inside of the slide storage box, in the groove and on the surface of the guide rail, where more residues are easy to be left (see Figure 1 below);
2.The residues left on bottom of the slide storage box may raise slide pile, making the slide on the bottom damaged and unable to be moved out (the slide
is squeezed to damage at the exit);
3.The residue on the white blocks at the slide storage box exit may contaminate clean slides, as shown in Figure 2 below;
4.Residues on the bottom plate, as shown in Figure 3 below;
5.Residues in the gap between the shuttle truck bottom plate and the slip blade, as shown in Figure 3, where the large scrap may make the slip blade
stuck.
See the marked area in Figure 1-3 for the places need cleaning (circled in red). The cleaning should be performed as instructed below:
1.For the positions shown in Figure 1, move the residues to the middle using a cleaning cloth or small brush, and then clean it out from the protective
cover.
2.For the positions shown in Figure 2, wipe the bottom of the white blocks using a cleaning cloth dipped with alcohol.
3.For the positions shown in Figure 3, clean out the residues using a cleaning cloth or a small brush; if there are still residues left, remove them using
tweezers or other tools.
8-6
Manual Maintenance
Clean these areas
Clean the bottom of the

white plastic blocks
Figure 1 Figure 2
Clean this area

(on the bottom Check and clean
plate) this area (the gap)
Figure 3
8-7
Manual Maintenance
Maintaining the Staining Mechanism
1. Cleaning the Staining Cassettes

1) Tap "Service""Maintenance", and select "Methanol Maintenance" of the staining cassettes. The instrument will automatically soak the cassettes with
methanol.
2) When the soaking completes, take out the cassettes one by one, and wipe the unclean parts using cotton swabs dipped with methanol or alcohol. See the
figure below for the key positions. After the cleaning, there should be no visible stain residue in and out of the cassettes.
3) Place the staining cassettes back in the staining tray after cleaning. Make sure that each cassette is placed inside the slots.
4) Make sure there is no sensor baffle deformed.
2. Cleaning the Staining Tray

Check the upper surfaces of the staining tray for the sign of stain (see the left figure below). If stain residue is found, clean it with methanol or alcohol.
3. Cleaning the Blocking Mechanism
Check the interior and exterior blocking mechanism of the 4 staining positions for the sign of stain (see the right figure below). If stain residue is found, clean it
with methanol or alcohol (do not touch the staining pipette).
8-8
Manual Maintenance
Cleaning the Slide Gripper

Check the rubber pad of the gripper for the sign of stain (see the left figure below). If stain residue is found, clean it with methanol or alcohol.
8-9
Manual Maintenance
8-10
Manual Maintenance
8.3.3 Replacement Items

Parts which have fixed service lives are listed below:
Service
No. Name FRU Code Remarks
Life
1 Stain filter 115-024453-00 0.5 years
2 Air filter 082-001552-00 2 years \
3 Air dryer 082-001254-00 4 years \
Cylinder liner of the pneumatic
4 801-3110-00215-00 4 years 11800 hours
unit (THOMAS air pump FRU
Piston ring of the pneumatic unit
5 801-3110-00216-00 4 years 11800 hours
(THOMAS air pump FRU)
30000
6 Piercing unit 115-005373-00
times
30000
7 Blood dispensing probe 115-017561-00
times
36500
8 Rotary pressure head 043-001082-00
times
9 Vacuum overflow valve 801-3201-00008-00 4 years
30000
10 Open-vial probe wipe 041-005497-00
times
Note: the stain filter is at the back of the instrument. Before replacing the filter, shut down the
instrument, unplug the power cable and pneumatic cable (do not disconnect the reagents) at
the back, remove the back plate, and the filter is located in the cistern/waste cistern assembly,
next to the WC-W cistern.
8-11
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter introduces the error messages and possible causes corresponding to the error
codes.
9.1 Reminder
Category Error Code Related Module Message
Reminder
0x10011012 Reagent No diluent
0x10011013 Reagent No deionized water
0x10011014 Reagent No buffer
0x10011015 Reagent No methanol
0x10011016 Reagent No stain 1
0x10011017 Reagent No stain 2
0x10011018 Reagent No stain
0x10011019 Reagent Sample waste container full
0x10011020 Reagent Stain waste container full
0x10011040 Reagent Insufficient diluent
Diluent not replaced after being
0x10011053 Reagent
loaded
Deionized water not replaced after
0x10011054 Reagent
being loaded
Buffer not replaced after being
0x10011055 Reagent
loaded
Methanol not replaced after being
0x10011056 Reagent
loaded
Stain 1 not replaced after being
0x10011057 Reagent
loaded
Stain 2 not replaced after being
0x10011058 Reagent
loaded
Stain not replaced after being
0x10011059 Reagent
loaded
0x10011060 Reagent Diluent expired
0x10011061 Reagent Deionized water expired
0x10011062 Reagent Buffer expired
0x10011063 Reagent Methanol expired
0x10011064 Reagent Stain 1 expired
0x10011065 Reagent Stain 2 expired
0x10011066 Reagent Stain expired
Unloading tray of the autoloading
0x10000413 Autoloader
module full
0x10000429 Autoloader Illegal movement of tube rack
0x10000202 Slide Insufficient slides
0x10000203 Slide No slide
0x10010912 Slide Slide left/right inversion
Temperature &
0x10010901 Temperature low at smear position
Humidity
Troubleshooting
Temperature & Temperature high at smear

0x10010902
Humidity position
Temperature &
0x10010904 Humidity low at smear position
Humidity
Temperature &
0x10010905 Humidity high at smear position
Humidity
No blood while smearing (detecting
0x10010908 Blood film
start point and end point failed)
No blood while smearing (width
0x10010910 Blood film
detection failed)
0x10010607 Blood film Blood film too narrow
0x10010608 Blood film Blood film deviates to one side
0x10000903 Print Carbon strip used up
Micro-switch of carbon strip pinch
0x1000090F Print
roller not closed
0x10010500 Slide output Insufficient slide baskets
0x10000512 Slide output Slide basket unloading tray full
Slide basket unloading tray about
0x10000513 Slide output
to be full
9.2 Sample Loading

Loading
Auto loading mechanism leaving the sensor
area in initialization failed
Auto loading mechanism going back to the
sensor area in initialization failed
Loading to end position in auto loading
failed
Unloading mechanism leaving the sensor
Unloading mechanism going back to the
0x10000410 Autoloader Unloading mechanism error
Feeding mechanism leaving the sensor
Feeding mechanism going back to the
Start position sensor abnormal before
feeding
End position sensor abnormal before
0x1000042B Autoloader
feeding
Start position sensor abnormal after
feeding
0x1000042C Autoloader End position sensor abnormal after feeding
0x10000428 Autoloader Counter sensor abnormal switch in feeding
0x1000042A Autoloader Track feeding error
Feeding mechanism moving to end position
failed
Feeding mechanism moving to start
position failed
After the scanning mechanism moves up,
the start position sensor is not blocked
2
Troubleshooting
After the scanning mechanism moves

down, the start position sensor is blocked
0x10000440 Autoloader Rotary scanning mechanism error
0x10000441 Autoloader Scanner acknowledgment data incorrect
Reading scanner parameter or bar code
overtime
Manipulator moving to X-direction front
position failed
Manipulator moving to X-direction back
position failed
Manipulator moving to Z-direction up
position failed
Manipulator moving to Z-direction down
position failed
Manipulator moving to X-direction front
position overtime
Manipulator moving to X-direction back
position overtime
Mixing mechanism leaving the sensor area
in initialization failed
Mixing mechanism going back to the
Mixing mechanism moving to start position
0x1000043A Autoloader
failed
Mixing mechanism moving to end position
failed
Pierce cylinder piercing failed or sensor
error
Pierce cylinder withdrawal failed or sensor
error
Unloading tray full detection sensor
abnormal
0x10011202 Autoloader Tube detection sensor self-test abnormal
9.3 Smearing
Smear
Slide loading assembly going back to start
0x10000200 Slide loading
position sensor area in initialization failed
Slide loading assembly leaving start position
More than 1 sensor along the pathway are
blocked in slide loading assembly initialization
0x10000206 Slide loading Slide loading wait position sensor abnormal
0x10000207 Slide loading Slide loading end position sensor abnormal
0x10000210 Slide loading Moving slide out of the storage box failed
0x10000211 Slide loading Slide loading failed
0x10010200 Slide loading Slide clearing action of loading unit abnormal
Shuttle truck getting into sensor area in
0x10000250 Slide transporting
initialization failed
Shuttle truck leaving sensor area in initialization
failed
More than one sensor along the slide shuttle
pathway are blocked
3
Troubleshooting
0x10000261 Slide transporting Transporting slide to print position failed

0x10000262 Slide transporting Transporting slide to dispensing position failed
Transporting slide to scraping start position
failed
0x10000264 Slide transporting Scraping action abnormal
0x10000266 Slide transporting Smearing action abnormal
0x10000267 Slide transporting Transporting slide to levering position failed
Print position sensor of slide transporting
module abnormal
Dispensing position sensor of slide transporting
module abnormal
Scraping start position sensor of slide
transporting module abnormal
0x10000276 Slide transporting Smearing action abnormal
Levering position sensor of slide transporting
module abnormal
0x10010201 Slide transporting Slide shuttle truck clearing slides failed
More than 1 slide transporting sensor blocked in
the startup process
0x10010203 Slide transporting Shuttle truck position checking in startup failed
Slide levering assembly going back to sensor
Slide levering assembly leaving sensor area in
Levering module going to 15placing position
abnormal
Levering from horizontal position to vertical
position abnormal
0x10000295 Slide transporting Slide levering sensor abnormal
0x10000296 Slide transporting Slide levering mechanism error
0x10010204 Slide transporting Levering assembly clearing slides failed
Temperature and humidity sensor
0x100002F0 Slide transporting
communication CRC abnormal
Temperature and humidity sensor connection
0x100002F1 Slide transporting
abnormal
Dispensing probe vertical movement motor
0x10010300 Blood dispensing going back to the sensor area in initialization
failed
0x10010301 Blood dispensing
leaving the sensor area in initialization failed
overtime
Dispensing probe vertical movement commands
conflict
Touch detection sensor triggered unexpectedly
in dispensing probe vertical movement
Touch detection sensor not triggered when
0x10010305 Blood dispensing dispensing probe moves to the dispensing
position
Dispensing probe horizontal movement motor
0x10010306 Blood dispensing going back to the sensor area in initialization
failed
leaving the sensor area in initialization failed
4
Troubleshooting

overtime
Dispensing probe horizontal movement
commands conflict
OV motor leaving the sensor area in initialization
failed
OV motor going back to the sensor area in
0x10010312 Blood dispensing OV movement commands conflict
0x10010313 Blood dispensing OV movement overtime
2.5mL syringe motor leaving the sensor area in
0x10010B10 Blood dispensing
2.5mL syringe motor going back to the sensor
2.5mL syringe aspiration/dispensation action
failure 1
2.5mL syringe aspiration/dispensation action
failure 2
2.5mL syringe aspiration/dispensation action not
allowed 1
2.5mL syringe aspiration/dispensation action not
allowed 2
0x10010B16 Blood dispensing 2.5mL syringe motor movement overtime
0x10010B17 Blood dispensing 2.5mL syringe motor commands conflict
0x10010B18 Blood dispensing 2.5mL syringe aspirated volume high
0x10010B19 Blood dispensing 2.5mL syringe dispensed volume high
100uL syringe motor leaving the sensor area in
100uL syringe motor going back to the sensor
100uL syringe aspiration/dispensation action
failure 1
100uL syringe aspiration/dispensation action
failure 2
100uL syringe aspiration/dispensation action not
allowed 1
100uL syringe aspiration/dispensation action not
allowed 2
0x10010B38 Blood dispensing 100uL syringe motor movement overtime
0x10010B3A Blood dispensing 100uL syringe motor commands conflict
0x10010B37 Blood dispensing 100uL syringe aspirated volume high
0x10010B39 Blood dispensing 100uL syringe dispensed volume high
0x10010312 Blood dispensing Sample sensor 1 voltage out of range
0x10010313 Blood dispensing Sample sensor 1 sensor abnormal
0x10010318 Blood dispensing Diluent temperature sensor abnormal
0x10010319 Blood dispensing Diluent temperature out of range
5
Troubleshooting
0x10010320 Blood dispensing Diluent temperature fluctuation abnormal

0x10010321 Blood dispensing Fluid pressure sensor abnormal
0x10010322 Blood dispensing Fluid pressure out of range
0x10010323 Blood dispensing Fluid pressure fluctuation abnormal
0x10010324 Blood dispensing Atmospheric pressure detection failed
0x10010325 Blood dispensing Too much bubbles in the sampling tubing
Temperature fluctuating in a large range in the
calibration process
0x10010328 Blood dispensing Sample viscosity measurement failed
0x10010329 Blood dispensing Sample probe clogging in OV aspiration
0x10010330 Blood dispensing Air is aspirated in OV aspiration
0x10010331 Blood dispensing OV sample viscosity high
0x10010332 Blood dispensing Sample information abnormal in OV aspiration
0x10010333 Blood dispensing Sample probe clogging in piercing & aspiration
0x10010334 Blood dispensing Air is aspirated in piercing & aspiration
Transparent sample is aspirated in piercing &
aspiration
0x10010336 Blood dispensing Sample information abnormal in first aspiration
0x10010337 Blood dispensing Sample information abnormal in first aspiration
0x10010338 Blood dispensing Sample information abnormal in smearing
Spreader slide Spreader slide vertical movement motor moving
0x100002D6
cleaning overtime
Spreader slide Spreader slide horizontal movement motor
0x100002D5
cleaning moving overtime
Spreader slide
0x100002D4 Spreader slide movement commands conflict
cleaning
Spreader slide Spreader slide going back to sensor area in
0x100002C0
cleaning vertical direction initialization failed
Spreader slide Spreader slide leaving sensor area in vertical
0x100002C1
cleaning direction initialization failed
Spreader slide Spreader slide going back to sensor area in
0x100002C2
cleaning horizontal direction initialization failed
Spreader slide Spreader slide leaving sensor area in horizontal
0x100002C3
cleaning direction initialization failed
Spreader slide Both sensors in the vertical pathway of the
0x100002C4
cleaning spreader slide are blocked
Spreader slide Both sensors in the horizontal pathway of the
0x100002C5
cleaning spreader slide are blocked
Spreader slide Spreader slide horizontal cleaning position
0x100002D0
cleaning sensor abnormal
Spreader slide Spreader slide moving to horizontal cleaning
0x100002D2
cleaning position abnormal
Spreader slide Spreader slide vertical movement ready position
0x100002D1
cleaning sensor abnormal
Spreader slide Spreader slide moving vertically to ready
0x100002D3
cleaning position abnormal
Spreader slide Ultrasonic cleaning frequency self-adaptation
0x10000A04
cleaning abnormal (unable to reduce the frequency)
0x10000A05
cleaning abnormal (unable to increase the frequency)
0x10000A06
cleaning abnormal (frequency unexpectedly high)
6
Troubleshooting

0x10000A07
cleaning abnormal (frequency unexpectedly low)
Spreader slide
0x10011067 Ultrasonic cleaning frequency unexpectedly low
cleaning
Spreader slide Ultrasonic cleaning frequency unexpectedly
0x10011068
cleaning high
Smearing position temperature detection
0x10010903 Detection
abnormal
Slide left-right inversion detection sensor blank
voltage high
Slide left-right inversion detection sensor blank
voltage low
Slide left-right inversion detection system
abnormal
Slide left-right inversion detection reports slide
not wide enough
Slide left-right inversion detection sensor
self-test abnormal
Slide levering in-position detection blank voltage
high
Slide levering in-position detection blank voltage
low
0x10010916 Detection No slide after levering
Slide gripper grabbing slide at slide levering
position failed
Slide levering in-position detection sensor
self-test abnormal
9.4 Printing
Print
Print motor moving to target position
0x10000901 Print
failed
0x10000902 Print Carbon strip broken
Carbon strip withdrawal status
0x10000904 Print
abnormal
Print head moving down to pre-print
0x10000905 Print
position abnormal
Print head moving back to pre-print
0x10000906 Print
position
Print head moving down to print
0x10000907 Print
position abnormal
Print head going back to sensor area
0x10000908 Print
in horizontal initialization failed
Print head leaving sensor area in
0x10000909 Print
horizontal initialization failed
Print head going back to upper print
0x1000090A Print
position in vertical initialization failed
Print head leaving upper print position
0x1000090B Print
in vertical initialization failed
Print head vertical movement
0x1000090C Print
assembly sensor abnormal
Print head temperature detection
0x10010900 Print
abnormal
Horizontal print motor printing action
0x10000910 Print
failed
7
Troubleshooting
Print head first sampling in self-test

0x1000090D Print
overtime
Print head second sampling in
0x1000090E Print
self-test overtime
9.5 Slide Gripper

Slide
gripper
Slide gripper horizontal moving
0x10000670 Slide gripper
mechanism initialization failed
Slide gripper vertical moving
mechanism initialization failed
Slide gripper horizontal moving
mechanism resetting failed
Slide gripper vertical moving
mechanism resetting failed
0x10000674 Slide gripper Slide gripper pinching failed
0x10000675 Slide gripper Slide gripper releasing failed
Sensor blocked before slide gripper
moves horizontally to G2 position
Notch counting failed when slide
0x10000601 Slide gripper gripper moves horizontally to G2
position
Sensor blocked after slide gripper
0x10000602 Slide gripper gripper moves horizontally to G1
position
moves horizontally to S position
0x10000603 Slide gripper gripper moves horizontally to S
position
moves horizontally to S position
moves horizontally to F position
0x10000604 Slide gripper gripper moves horizontally to F
position
moves horizontally to F position
moves horizontally to R4 position
0x10000605 Slide gripper gripper moves horizontally to R4
position
8
Troubleshooting

0x10000606 Slide gripper gripper moves horizontally to R1
position
In the process of the slide gripper
inserting the slide at G2 position, the
0x10000631 Slide gripper vertical initialization sensor is not
blocked before the gripper moves
down vertically
bringing up the slide at G2 position,
0x10000630 Slide gripper the vertical initialization sensor is not
down vertically
0x10000633 Slide gripper vertical initialization sensor is not
down vertically
bringing up the slide at G1 position,
0x10000632 Slide gripper the vertical initialization sensor is not
down vertically
Vertical initialization sensor not
0x10000634 Slide gripper blocked before the slide gripper
moves down vertically at S position
moves down vertically at F position
moves down vertically at F position
0x10000637 Slide gripper blocked before slide gripper moves
down vertically at R1 position
0x10000651 Slide gripper vertical position fixing sensor is
blocked before it moves down
vertically
bringing up the slides at G2 position,
0x10000650 Slide gripper the vertical position fixing sensor is
not blocked before it moves down
vertically
0x10000653 Slide gripper vertical position fixing sensor is
blocked before it moves down
vertically
bringing up the slides at G1 position,
not blocked before it moves down
vertically
Vertical position fixing sensor blocked
before slide gripper moves down
9
Troubleshooting
vertically at S position

0x10000655 Slide gripper before slide gripper moves down
vertically at F position
vertically at R4 position
vertically at R1 position
0x10000641 Slide gripper gripper moves down vertically to
insert slide at G2 drying position
0x10000640 Slide gripper gripper moves down vertically to bring
up slide at G2 drying position
insert slide at G1 drying position
up slide at G1 drying position
insert slide at slide output position
up slide at slide levering position
up slide at stain position 4
insert slide at stain position 1
inserting the slide at G2 drying
0x10000661 Slide gripper position, the vertical position fixing
sensor is blocked after the gripper
moves down vertically
bringing up the slides at G2 drying
inserting the slide at G1 drying
bringing up the slides at G1 drying
inserting the slide at slide output
position, the vertical position fixing
10
Troubleshooting

bringing up the slides at slide levering
bringing up the slides at stain position
0x10000666 Slide gripper 4, the vertical position fixing sensor is
blocked after the gripper moves down
vertically
inserting the slide at stain position 1,
blocked after the gripper moves down
vertically
Slide gripper moving horizontally to
0x10010600 Slide gripper stain position restrained (staining
pipette set at the upper position)
Blood film spread detection blank
voltage high
Blood film spread detection blank
voltage low
Slide gripper not find slide when the
0x10010603 Slide gripper slide gripper passes by the blood film
spread detection sensor
Blood film spread detection system
0x10010604 Slide gripper abnormal (start and end points
detection failed)
Blood film spread detection reports
slide not wide enough
Blood film spread detection system
abnormal (width detection failed)
Blood film spread detection sensor
self-test abnormal
Slide inserting in-position detection
sensor self-test abnormal
blank voltage high
blank voltage low
Slide gripper inserting slide at stain
position 1 failed
9.6 Staining
Stain
Sensor not blocked before stain
0x10010800 Stain
position 1 cassette moves out
Sensor blocked after stain position 1
0x10010801 Stain
cassette moves out
0x10010802 Stain
0x10010803 Stain
cassette moves out
11
Troubleshooting

0x10010804 Stain
0x10010805 Stain
cassette moves out
0x10010806 Stain
0x10010807 Stain
cassette moves out
Sensor blocked before stain position 1
0x10010808 Stain
cassette moves in
Sensor not blocked after stain position
0x10010809 Stain
1 cassette moves in
0x10010810 Stain
cassette moves in
0x10010811 Stain
2 cassette moves in
0x10010812 Stain
cassette moves in
0x10010813 Stain
3 cassette moves in
0x10010814 Stain
cassette moves in
0x10010815 Stain
4 cassette moves in
Stain position 1 blocking mechanism
0x10000870 Stain
leaving sensor in initialization failed
0x10000871 Stain
resetting in initialization failed
0x10000872 Stain
1 blocking mechanism initialization
0x10000873 Stain
0x10000874 Stain
0x10000875 Stain
0x10000876 Stain
0x10000877 Stain
0x10000878 Stain
0x10000879 Stain
0x1000087A Stain
0x1000087B Stain
0x10000850 Stain
position 1 blocking mechanism opens
0x10000851 Stain
0x10000852 Stain
0x10000853 Stain
Notch not found when stain position 1
0x10000854 Stain
blocking mechanism opens
12
Troubleshooting

0x10000855 Stain
0x10000856 Stain
0x10000857 Stain
0x10000858 Stain
1 blocking mechanism opens
0x10000859 Stain
0x1000085A Stain
0x1000085B Stain
0x10000860 Stain
position 1 blocking mechanism closes
0x10000861 Stain
0x10000862 Stain
0x10000863 Stain
0x10000864 Stain
blocking mechanism closes
0x10000865 Stain
0x10000866 Stain
0x10000867 Stain
0x10000868 Stain
1 blocking mechanism closes
0x10000869 Stain
0x1000086A Stain
0x1000086B Stain
0x10010816 Stain Stain pipette set initialization failed
Upper position sensor not blocked
0x10010817 Stain after stain pipette set moves to the
upper position
Lower position sensor blocked after
0x10010818 Stain stain pipette set moves to the upper
position
Upper position sensor blocked after
0x10010819 Stain stain pipette set moves to the lower
position
Lower position sensor not blocked
0x10010820 Stain after stain pipette set moves to the
lower position
0x10010700 Stain circulation Position 1 emptying failed
Position 1 dispensing volume
0x10010701 Stain circulation
insufficient
insufficient
13
Troubleshooting

insufficient
insufficient
9.7 Output
Output
Feeding pathway movement abnormal in
basket clearing (slide basket detained)
Moving to slide position failed in basket
clearing
0x10000553 Slide output Leaving slide position failed in basket clearing
Leaving boundary position failed in basket
clearing
Loading area basket detection sensor error
(always blocked)
Slide loading detained or one of the sensors
does not work properly
Sensor not blocked before leaving slide
position in advanced reclaiming
Leaving slide position failed in advanced
basket reclaiming
Slide basket detained in advanced basket
reclaiming
Moving to slide position failed in advanced
basket reclaiming
Leaving boundary position failed in advanced
basket reclaiming
0x10000521 Slide output Leaving slide position failed in basket loading
Slide position sensor not blocked before
adding slide basket
0x10000522 Slide output Basket detained while adding basket
Adding basket in working area failed
(finished-adding counter not blocked)
Adding basket in working area failed (counter
counts more than 1)
Adding basket in buffer area 1 failed (sensor
not triggered)
Adding basket in buffer area 1 failed (counter
counts)
Adding basket in buffer area 2 failed (sensor
not triggered)
Adding basket in buffer area 2 failed (counter
counts)
Pusher not at the slide position when the
stepping starts
Pusher leaving slide position failed in the
stepping process
0x10000543 Slide output Sensor not triggered in the stepping process
0x10000540 Slide output Counter not count in the stepping process
0x10000544 Slide output Counter sensor not blocked when the stepping
14
Troubleshooting
finished
Slide output module unloading motor leaving
the sensor area in initialization failed
Slide output module unloading motor going
back to the sensor area in initialization failed
0x10000515 Slide output Ready-for-unloading sensor error
Slide output module unloading motor going
back to start position after unloading failed
Slide output module unloading action failed
(unloading distance too short)
0x1FFFFF01 Slide output Drying assembly air intake fan 1 not working
Slide basket drying assembly air intake fan 1
0x1FFFFF02 Slide output
speed low
0x1FFFFF03 Slide output Drying assembly air intake fan 2 not working
Slide basket drying assembly air intake fan 2
speed low
Slide basket drying assembly air outlet fan not
work
Slide basket drying assembly air outlet fan
speed low
Temperature inside the slide basket drying
assembly lower than expected
Temperature inside the slide basket drying
assembly higher than expected
Temperature at the outlet of the slide basket
drying assembly lower than expected
Temperature at the outlet of the slide basket
drying assembly higher than expected
Unloading tray full detection sensor of slide
reclaiming module self-test abnormal
Slide basket ready-for-unloading detection
sensor self-test abnormal
0x10011204 Slide output Slide basket counter sensor self-test abnormal
9.8 Supporting
Supporting
Pneumatics and
0x10011000 LC_D cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011001 LC_W cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011002 LC_P cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011003 LC_M cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011004 LC_A1 cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011005 LC_A2 cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011006 LC_A cistern priming failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011007 LC_A cistern priming failed-methanol
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011008 LC_A cistern emptying failed
fluidics
15
Troubleshooting
Pneumatics and
0x10011009 WC_B cistern emptying failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and
0x10011010 WC_W cistern emptying failed
fluidics
Pneumatics and Ultrasonic cleaning cistern priming
0x10011011
fluidics locked
Pneumatics and LC_D cistern floater empty detection
0x10011021
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_D cistern floater full detection
0x10011022
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_W cistern floater full detection
0x10011023
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_W cistern floater empty detection
0x10011024
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_P cistern floater full detection
0x10011025
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_P cistern floater empty detection
0x10011026
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_M cistern floater full detection
0x10011027
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_M cistern floater empty detection
0x10011028
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_A1 cistern floater full detection
0x10011029
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_A1 cistern floater empty detection
0x10011030
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_A2 cistern floater full detection
0x10011031
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_A2 cistern floater empty detection
0x10011032
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_A cistern floater full detection
0x10011033
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and LC_A cistern floater empty detection
0x10011034
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and WC_B cistern floater full detection
0x10011035
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and WC_B cistern floater empty detection
0x10011036
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and WC_W cistern floater full detection
0x10011037
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and WC_W cistern floater empty detection
0x10011038
fluidics failed
Pneumatics and Building up pneumatic unit output
0x10011041
fluidics pressure (250kPa) abnormal
Pneumatics and Building up pneumatic unit output
0x10011042
fluidics vacuum (-40kPa) abnormal
Pneumatics and 250kPa pressure abnormal in standby
0x10011043
fluidics state
0x10011044
fluidics state
0x10011045
fluidics state
Pneumatics and -40kPa vacuum abnormal in standby
0x10011046
fluidics state
Pneumatics and 250kPa pressure abnormal in working
0x10011047
fluidics state
0x10011048
fluidics state
16
Troubleshooting

0x10011049
fluidics state
Pneumatics and -40kPa vacuum abnormal in working
0x10011050
fluidics state
Pneumatics and Pneumatic unit output pressure
0x10011051
fluidics 250kPa abnormal
Pneumatics and
0x10011052 Overflow bath full
fluidics
Serial interface communication
0x10011205 Software
abnormal
0x10000103 Software MCU running command list overflow
0x10000106 Software MCU protocol analysis error
0x10000107 Software MCU calling resource ID error
0x10011300 Software Bar-code information overflow
0x10011301 Software Startup initialization failed
0x10011302 Software Error resetting failed
0x10011303 Software Packup failed
0x10011304 Software Instrument not connected to track
17
P/N: 046-006305-00 (2.0)

SC 120

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SC 120

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SC-120

Auto Slide Maker & Stainer

Intellectual Property Statement

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

. , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

This warranty shall not extend to:

Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

unauthorized service people.

Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

1 Using This Manual ............................................................................................... 1-1

2 Product Specifications ........................................................................................ 2-1

3 Functions and System Principles ...................................................................... 3-1

4 Subsystem Functions ......................................................................................... 4-1

5 Fluidics ................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.2 Slide Making and Staining Sequence .................................................................. 5-24

6 Hardware .............................................................................................................. 6-1

7 Software System .................................................................................................. 7-1

8 Manual Maintenance ........................................................................................... 8-1

Have comprehensive knowledge of circuitry and fluidics;

Have comprehensive knowledge of reagents;

Have comprehensive knowledge of quality control;

Have comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;

Are familiar with the operations of the system;

Are skilled users of the digital voltmeter and oscillograph;

Are able to analyze the circuit diagrams and fluidic charts.

1.2 Using This Manual

1.3 Terms Used in Software Operation

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

read the statement below the symbol . The statement is

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE

TYPE B APPLIED PART

MEASURE COMPULSURE SYMBOL

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached to

Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc. according to

To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove metal

Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

wear an antistatic wrist strap while servicing the system.

2.2 Staining Protocol

2.3 Presentation Mode and Sample Volume

2.5 Power supply

2.6 Environment Requirements

2.7 Dimensions and Weight

Figure 3-1 General appearance

Main Unit Acquiring samples, and preparing smears

Pneumatic Unit Providing pressure and vacuum to the main unit

3.4 Major Components and Modules

Figure 3-2 Front of the main unit

1 ---- Touch screen 2 ---- Front door

Basket loading platform

Basket unloading platform

Figure 3-3 Back of the analyzer